Sei sulla pagina 1di 556

PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,

ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)


V300R007C10
Installation Guide

Issue 04

Date 2019-03-13

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2019. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and
the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be
within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements,
information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or
representations of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: support@huawei.com

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide About This Document

About This Document

Purpose
This document describes how to install the cabinet, boards, modules and cables, and provides
installation checklists for reference.
The figures provided in this document are for reference only.

Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
 Hardware installation engineers
 Installation and commissioning engineers
 Network management administrator

Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will
result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could
result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may
result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could
result in equipment damage, data loss, performance deterioration, or
unanticipated results.
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to personal injury.
Calls attention to important information, best practices and tips.
NOTE is used to address information not related to personal injury,
equipment damage, and environment deterioration.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide About This Document

Change History
Changes between document issues are cumulative. The latest document issue contains all the
changes made in earlier issues.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13)
Updated the power-on and commissioning.

Issue 03 (2019-01-08)
Updated the 10 Power-on and Commissioning.

Issue 02 (2018-09-25)
Updated the power-on content of the DG.

Issue 01 (2018-06-30)
This is the first official release.
The SMU version is SMU V500R002C30.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide Contents

Contents

About This Document .................................................................................................................... ii


1 Safety Precautions ......................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 General Safety .............................................................................................................................................................. 1
1.1.1 Disclaimer .................................................................................................................................................................. 1
1.1.2 General Requirements................................................................................................................................................ 1
1.1.3 Symbol Conventions .................................................................................................................................................. 3
1.2 Personnel Requirements ............................................................................................................................................... 5
1.3 Electrical Safety ............................................................................................................................................................ 5
1.3.1 Grounding Requirements ........................................................................................................................................... 5
1.3.2 AC and DC Power Operation Requirements .............................................................................................................. 6
1.3.3 Cabling Requirements................................................................................................................................................ 6
1.3.4 TNV Circuit ............................................................................................................................................................... 6
1.3.5 Environment Requirements and Tool Insulation ........................................................................................................ 6
1.4 Installation Environment Requirements ....................................................................................................................... 7
1.5 Mechanical Safety ........................................................................................................................................................ 8
1.5.1 Hoisting ..................................................................................................................................................................... 8
1.5.2 Using Ladders ............................................................................................................................................................ 9
1.5.3 Drilling Holes .......................................................................................................................................................... 10
1.5.4 Moving Heavy Objects ............................................................................................................................................ 11
1.6 Battery Safety ............................................................................................................................................................. 11
1.6.1 Basic Requirements ................................................................................................................................................. 11
1.6.2 Battery Installation Regulations ............................................................................................................................... 12
1.6.3 Protection Against Battery Short Circuits ................................................................................................................ 12
1.6.4 Protection Against Flammable Gas .......................................................................................................................... 13
1.6.5 Battery Leakage Handling Regulations ................................................................................................................... 13
1.6.6 Lithium Battery Scenarios ....................................................................................................................................... 13
1.7 PV Module Safety ....................................................................................................................................................... 14

2 Installation Preparations ........................................................................................................... 15


2.1 Application Scenario Overview .................................................................................................................................. 15
2.2 Cabinet Installation Dimensions ................................................................................................................................. 16
2.3 Cabinet Cable Hole Positions and Definitions ............................................................................................................ 17
2.4 Tools ........................................................................................................................................................................... 19

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide Contents

2.5 Unpacking and Acceptance ......................................................................................................................................... 21


2.6 Requirements for Laying Out Cables ......................................................................................................................... 22

3 Installing PV Module Supports and Cables .......................................................................... 24


4 Installing a DG ............................................................................................................................ 25
4.1 Installing a DG ............................................................................................................................................................ 25
4.2 Installing an EPM115-M2A ........................................................................................................................................ 26
4.2.1 Installing the DG ...................................................................................................................................................... 26
4.2.2 Removing Transport Brackets and Desiccants (EPM115-M2A) ............................................................................. 31
4.2.3 Adding Engine Oil, Fuel, and Coolant (EPM115-M2A).......................................................................................... 32
4.2.4 Installing a Negative Battery Cable (EPM115-M2A) .............................................................................................. 34

5 Installing the Cabinet ................................................................................................................. 36


5.1 Installing an ICC330 ................................................................................................................................................... 36
5.2 Installing an ESC330 .................................................................................................................................................. 39
5.3 Installing an ESC710 .................................................................................................................................................. 39
5.4 Installing an ESC720 .................................................................................................................................................. 43
5.5 Installing ESC300 Battery Cabinets, Batteries, and Cables ........................................................................................ 47
5.6 Installing Rat Guards on the Left and Right Sides of the Base ................................................................................... 47
5.7 Installing a Cabinet on the Buried Steel PV Base ....................................................................................................... 49
5.8 Installing Cabinet Ground Cables ............................................................................................................................... 52

6 Installing Components............................................................................................................... 56
6.1 Component Installation Positions ............................................................................................................................... 56
6.2 Installing a Communications Expansion Module ....................................................................................................... 57
6.3 Installing Communications Expansion Modules (NIM01C3) .................................................................................... 57
6.4 Installing a DG Interface Module (GIM01C) ............................................................................................................. 58
6.5 Installing a Network Interface Module (NIM02D) ..................................................................................................... 59
6.6 Installing a WiFi Module ............................................................................................................................................ 62
6.7 Installing PSUs ........................................................................................................................................................... 63
6.8 Installing a PVDU....................................................................................................................................................... 65
6.8.1 Installing the PVDU-60A1 ...................................................................................................................................... 65
6.8.2 Installing the PVDU-200A1 .................................................................................................................................... 66
6.9 Installing an SSU (S4850G1) ..................................................................................................................................... 68
6.10 Installing a DG Battery Charger (BC-1206A) .......................................................................................................... 69
6.11 Installing a DG Battery Charger (BCU-1203A) ....................................................................................................... 71
6.12 Installing an ATS....................................................................................................................................................... 73
6.12.1 Installing an ATS (ATS-63A1/ATS-63A2) ............................................................................................................ 73
6.12.2 Installing an ATS (ATS-125C1) ............................................................................................................................. 75
6.13 Installing an ACDU .................................................................................................................................................. 77
6.13.1 Installing an ACDU-63A1/ACDU-63A2 ............................................................................................................... 77
6.13.2 Installing an ACDU (ACDU-125B1)..................................................................................................................... 79
6.14 Installing an AC Monitoring Module (AIM02C) ...................................................................................................... 81

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide Contents

6.15 Installing a DCDB48160-2 ....................................................................................................................................... 83


6.16 Installing a DMU01C1.............................................................................................................................................. 86
6.17 Installing an Inverter (DJN1000-S) .......................................................................................................................... 87
6.18 Installing an ETP24160A3........................................................................................................................................ 89
6.19 Installing a DC Heater .............................................................................................................................................. 91
6.20 Installing a Signal SPD (SPM01A) ........................................................................................................................... 92
6.21 Installing a Smoke Sensor......................................................................................................................................... 94
6.22 Installing a Temperature and Humidity Sensor Cable .............................................................................................. 95
6.23 Installing a Water Sensor .......................................................................................................................................... 97
6.24 Installing an IP Camera ............................................................................................................................................. 98
6.24.1 Wall-Mounted Installation ..................................................................................................................................... 98
6.24.2 Pole-Mounted Installation.................................................................................................................................... 101
6.24.3 Installing IP Camera Cables ................................................................................................................................. 103

7 Installing Batteries and Cables............................................................................................... 106


7.1 Installing Lithium Batteries and Cables .................................................................................................................... 106
7.2 Installing Lead-Acid Batteries and Cables................................................................................................................ 115
7.2.1 Installing Batteries, iBATs, and Cables .................................................................................................................. 115
7.2.2 Installing the iBOX and Cables ............................................................................................................................. 120
7.2.3 Installing a Battery Temperature Sensor ................................................................................................................ 123
7.3 Installing Battery Cables Between the Battery Cabinet and the ICC Cabinet .......................................................... 124

8 Installing Cables ....................................................................................................................... 134


8.1 Installing Dry Contact Signal Cables ........................................................................................................................ 134
8.2 Installing the Communications Cables ..................................................................................................................... 135
8.2.1 IP Networking ........................................................................................................................................................ 135
8.2.2 Wireless Networking.............................................................................................................................................. 137
8.2.3 BBU In-band Networking ...................................................................................................................................... 139
8.3 Installing CAN Communications Cables .................................................................................................................. 140
8.4 Installing DG Cables................................................................................................................................................. 143
8.4.1 Installing DG Control Signal Cables ..................................................................................................................... 143
8.4.2 Installing Control Signal Cables for the Reused DG ............................................................................................. 146
8.4.3 Installing a DG Battery Charging Cable (BCU-1203A) ........................................................................................ 147
8.4.4 Installing a Battery Charging Cable for the Reused DG (BCU-1203A) ................................................................ 148
8.5 Installing Cables Between the Battery Cabinet and the ICC Cabinet ....................................................................... 149
8.5.1 Installing Cables for the ESC330-D5..................................................................................................................... 149
8.5.2 Installing Cables for the ESC720-A3..................................................................................................................... 152
8.5.3 Installing Cables for the ESC330-D5 and ESC710-D2 ......................................................................................... 155
8.6 Installing a PV Module Antitheft Alarm Cable ......................................................................................................... 158
8.7 Installing the Electronic Lock Cable ......................................................................................................................... 159
8.8 Installing ETP24160A3 Cables................................................................................................................................. 160
8.9 Installing Cables for the AC Monitoring Module ..................................................................................................... 162
8.10 Installing Inverter Cables (DJN1000-S) ................................................................................................................. 164

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide Contents

8.11 Installing Cables for the DCDB48160-2 ................................................................................................................. 166


8.11.1 Installing DC Output Power Cables ..................................................................................................................... 166
8.11.2 Installing DC Input Power Cables ....................................................................................................................... 168
8.12 Installing DC Output Power Cables for the DCDU ................................................................................................ 169
8.13 Installing PV Module DC Input Power Cables ....................................................................................................... 171
8.13.1 Installing PV Module DC Input Power Cables (PVDU-60A1) ........................................................................... 171
8.13.2 Installing PV Module DC Input Power Cables (PVDU-200A1) ......................................................................... 173
8.14 Installing AC Input Power Cables........................................................................................................................... 175
8.14.1 Installing AC Input Power Cables for the DCDU ................................................................................................ 175
8.14.2 Installing AC Input Power Cables (ACDU-63A1/ACDU-63A2) ........................................................................ 179
8.14.3 Installing AC Input Power Cables (ACDU-125B1) ............................................................................................. 181
8.14.4 Installing AC Input Power Cables (ATS-63A1/ATS-63A2) ................................................................................ 184
8.14.5 Installing AC Input Power Cables (ATS-125C1) ................................................................................................. 187

9 Installation Verification........................................................................................................... 191


10 Power-on and Commissioning ............................................................................................. 193
10.1 Grid Hybrid Power Supply Solution (Lithium Battery) .......................................................................................... 193
10.1.1 Preparing for Power-On ....................................................................................................................................... 193
10.1.2 Connecting the Mains Supply .............................................................................................................................. 194
10.1.3 Connecting the Battery Supply (Lithium Battery) ............................................................................................... 195
10.1.4 Setting Parameters (Lithium Battery) .................................................................................................................. 195
10.1.5 Connecting the Load Supply ................................................................................................................................ 202
10.2 Grid Hybrid Power Supply Solution (Lithium Battery + Lead-Acid Battery) ........................................................ 202
10.2.1 Connecting the Battery Supply (Lead-Acid Battery) ........................................................................................... 202
10.2.2 Setting Parameters (Lithium Battery + Lead-Acid Battery) ................................................................................ 203
10.2.3 Connecting the Mains Supply .............................................................................................................................. 212
10.2.4 Connecting the Battery Supply (Lithium Battery) ............................................................................................... 212
10.2.5 Connecting the Load Supply ................................................................................................................................ 213
10.3 Grid + Backup DG Hybrid Power Supply Solution (Lithium Battery) ................................................................... 214
10.3.1 Preparing for Power-On ....................................................................................................................................... 214
10.3.2 Connecting the Mains Supply .............................................................................................................................. 215
10.3.3 Connecting the Battery Supply (Lithium Battery) ............................................................................................... 215
10.3.4 Setting Parameters ............................................................................................................................................... 215
10.3.5 Connecting the DG Supply .................................................................................................................................. 222
10.3.6 Starting a DG Self-Check .................................................................................................................................... 223
10.3.7 Connecting the Load Supply ................................................................................................................................ 224
10.4 Grid + Backup DG Hybrid Power Supply Solution (Lithium Battery + Lead-Acid Battery) ................................. 225
10.4.1 Connecting the Battery Supply (Lead-Acid Battery) ........................................................................................... 225
10.4.2 Setting Parameters (Lithium Battery + Lead-Acid Battery) ................................................................................ 226
10.4.3 Connecting the Mains Supply .............................................................................................................................. 236
10.4.4 Connecting the DG Supply .................................................................................................................................. 236
10.4.5 Starting a DG Self-Check .................................................................................................................................... 237

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide Contents

10.4.6 Connecting the Battery Supply (Lithium Battery) ............................................................................................... 238


10.4.7 Connecting the Load Supply ................................................................................................................................ 239
10.5 Solar Hybrid Power Supply Solution ...................................................................................................................... 240
10.5.1 Connecting the Battery Supply (Lead-Acid Battery) ........................................................................................... 240
10.5.2 Setting Parameters (Lithium Battery + Lead-Acid Battery) ................................................................................ 241
10.5.3 Connecting the PV Module Supply ..................................................................................................................... 249
10.5.4 Connecting the Battery Supply (Lithium Battery) ............................................................................................... 249
10.5.5 Connecting the Load Supply ................................................................................................................................ 250
10.6 Solar-Diesel Hybrid Power Supply Solution .......................................................................................................... 251
10.6.1 Preparing for Power-On ....................................................................................................................................... 251
10.6.2 Manually Connecting the DG Supply .................................................................................................................. 251
10.6.3 Connecting the Battery Supply (Lithium Battery) ............................................................................................... 263
10.6.4 Setting Parameters (Lithium Battery) .................................................................................................................. 263
10.6.5 Starting a DG Self-Check .................................................................................................................................... 280
10.6.6 Connecting the PV Module Supply ..................................................................................................................... 281
10.6.7 Connecting the Load Supply ................................................................................................................................ 281
10.7 Solar-Grid Hybrid Power Supply Solution ............................................................................................................. 282
10.7.1 Preparing for Power-On ....................................................................................................................................... 282
10.7.2 Connecting the Mains Supply .............................................................................................................................. 282
10.7.3 Connecting the Battery Supply (Lithium Battery) ............................................................................................... 283
10.7.4 Setting Parameters (Lithium Battery) .................................................................................................................. 283
10.7.5 Connecting the PV Module Supply ..................................................................................................................... 291
10.7.6 Connecting the Load Supply ................................................................................................................................ 291
10.8 Solar-Grid-Diesel Hybrid Power Supply Solution .................................................................................................. 291
10.8.1 Preparing for Power-On ....................................................................................................................................... 291
10.8.2 Connecting the Mains Supply .............................................................................................................................. 292
10.8.3 Connecting the Battery Supply (Lithium Battery) ............................................................................................... 292
10.8.4 Setting Parameters (Lithium Battery) .................................................................................................................. 293
10.8.5 Manually Connecting the DG Supply .................................................................................................................. 310
10.8.6 Starting a DG Self-Check .................................................................................................................................... 321
10.8.7 Connecting the PV Module Supply ..................................................................................................................... 322
10.8.8 Connecting the Load Supply ................................................................................................................................ 322
10.9 Single-DG Hybrid Power Supply Solution (Lithium-ion Battery) ......................................................................... 322
10.9.1 Preparing for Power-On ....................................................................................................................................... 322
10.9.2 Manually Connecting the DG Supply .................................................................................................................. 323
10.9.3 Connecting the Battery Supply (Lithium Battery) ............................................................................................... 334
10.9.4 Setting Parameters (Lithium Battery) .................................................................................................................. 334
10.9.5 Starting a DG Self-Check .................................................................................................................................... 351
10.9.6 Connecting the Load Supply ................................................................................................................................ 352
10.10 Single-DG Hybrid Power Supply Solution (Lithium Battery + Lead-Acid Battery) ............................................ 352
10.10.1 Connecting the Battery Supply (Lead-Acid Battery) ......................................................................................... 352
10.10.2 Setting Parameters (Lithium Battery + Lead-Acid Battery) .............................................................................. 353

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. viii


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide Contents

10.10.3 Manually Connecting the DG Supply ................................................................................................................ 372


10.10.4 Starting a DG Self-Check .................................................................................................................................. 383
10.10.5 Connecting the Battery Supply (Lithium Battery) ............................................................................................. 384
10.10.6 Connecting the Load Supply .............................................................................................................................. 385
10.11 Dual-DG Hybrid Power Supply Solution (Lithium-ion Battery) .......................................................................... 385
10.11.1 Preparing for Power-On ..................................................................................................................................... 385
10.11.2 Manually Connecting the DG Supply ................................................................................................................ 386
10.11.3 Connecting the Battery Supply (Lithium Battery) ............................................................................................. 397
10.11.4 Setting Parameters (Lithium Battery) ................................................................................................................ 397
10.11.5 Starting a DG Self-Check .................................................................................................................................. 414
10.11.6 Connecting the Load Supply .............................................................................................................................. 415
10.12 Dual-DG Hybrid Power Supply Solution (Lithium Battery + Lead-Acid Battery) .............................................. 415
10.12.1 Connecting the Battery Supply (Lead-Acid Battery) ......................................................................................... 415
10.12.2 Setting Parameters (Lithium Battery + Lead-Acid Battery) .............................................................................. 416
10.12.3 Manually Connecting the DG Supply ................................................................................................................ 435
10.12.4 Starting a DG Self-Check .................................................................................................................................. 446
10.12.5 Connecting the Battery Supply (Lithium Battery) ............................................................................................. 447
10.12.6 Connecting the Load Supply .............................................................................................................................. 448
10.13 Diesel-Grid Hybrid Power Supply Solution (Lithium Battery) ............................................................................ 448
10.13.1 Preparing for Power-On ..................................................................................................................................... 448
10.13.2 Connecting the Mains Supply ............................................................................................................................ 449
10.13.3 Connecting the Battery Supply (Lithium Battery) ............................................................................................. 449
10.13.4 Setting Parameters (Lithium Battery) ................................................................................................................ 450
10.13.5 Manually Connecting the DG Supply ................................................................................................................ 466
10.13.6 Starting a DG Self-Check .................................................................................................................................. 477
10.13.7 Connecting the Load Supply .............................................................................................................................. 478
10.14 Diesel-Grid Hybrid Power Supply Solution (Lithium Battery + Lead-Acid Battery) .......................................... 478
10.14.1 Connecting the Battery Supply (Lead-Acid Battery) ......................................................................................... 478
10.14.2 Setting Parameters (Lithium Battery + Lead-Acid Battery) .............................................................................. 479
10.14.3 Connecting the Mains Supply ............................................................................................................................ 497
10.14.4 Manually Connecting the DG Supply ................................................................................................................ 498
10.14.5 Starting a DG Self-Check .................................................................................................................................. 509
10.14.6 Connecting the Battery Supply (Lithium Battery) ............................................................................................. 510
10.14.7 Connecting the Load Supply .............................................................................................................................. 511
10.15 Setting Communications Parameters for Intelligent Battery Monitoring Modules ............................................... 511
10.16 Setting IP Camera Parameters ............................................................................................................................... 513
10.16.1 Setting Parameters ............................................................................................................................................. 513
10.16.2 Previewing the Real-Time Site Situation ........................................................................................................... 517
10.16.3 Configuring the IP Camera on the WebUI ......................................................................................................... 518
10.16.4 Viewing Real-time Photos and Alarm Photos on the WebUI ............................................................................. 519
10.17 Opening an Electronic Door Lock ........................................................................................................................ 521

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide Contents

11 Flipping the Commissioning Switch to AUTO................................................................. 524


12 Checking Before Leaving the Site........................................................................................ 526
12.1 Installing Rat Guards on the Front and Rear Sides of the Base .............................................................................. 526
12.2 Installing an Antitheft Enclosure Frame ................................................................................................................. 528
12.3 Subsequent Operations ........................................................................................................................................... 534

A Appendix ................................................................................................................................... 536


A.1 Installing a Ground Bar (BOM Number: 21120291) ............................................................................................... 536
A.2 Associations Between UIM Dry Contacts and Alarms ............................................................................................ 538
A.3 Preparing Terminals ................................................................................................................................................. 539
A.4 Installing Floating Nuts............................................................................................................................................ 540

B Acronyms and Abbreviations ................................................................................................ 542

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. x


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 1 Safety Precautions

1 Safety Precautions

1.1 General Safety


1.1.1 Disclaimer
 Before installing, operating, or maintaining Huawei equipment, read through this manual
and follow all the instructions.
 To ensure safety of humans and the equipment, pay attention to the safety symbols on the
equipment and all the safety instructions in this document.
 The "CAUTION", "WARNING", and "DANGER" statements in this document do not
represent all the safety instructions. They are only supplements to the safety instructions.
 Ensure that the equipment is used in environments that meet its design specifications.
Otherwise, the equipment may become faulty, and the resulting equipment malfunction,
component damage, personal injuries, or property damage are not covered under the
warranty.
Huawei will not be liable for any consequences of the following circumstances:
 Running in conditions not specified in this manual
 Installation or use in environments which are not specified in related international
standards
 Unauthorized modifications to the product or software code
 Failure to follow the operation instructions and safety precautions in this document
 Device damage due to force majeure

1.1.2 General Requirements


 Ensure that the product is used in an environment that meets the product design
specifications (such as the grid power, input voltage, temperature, and humidity) to avoid
causing malfunctions, damaging components, or voiding the warranty.
 Personnel who plan to install, operate, or maintain Huawei equipment need to receive
thorough training, obtain required job qualifications, understand all necessary safety
precautions, and be able to correctly perform all operations.
 Follow local laws and regulations when installing, operating, or maintaining the
equipment. The safety instructions in this document are only supplements to local laws
and regulations.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 1 Safety Precautions

 Bolts should be tightened with a torque wrench and marked using red or blue color. After
the installation personnel confirm that the screws are tightened, mark the screws using
blue color. After the inspector confirms that the screws are tightened, mark the screws
using red color. (The marks should cross the edges of the screws, as shown in the
following figure.)

 If there is a probability of personal injury or equipment damage during installation,


immediately stop operations on the equipment, report the case to the project owner, and
take feasible protective measures.
 Before installing, operating, or maintaining a cabinet, clean up the water, ice, or other
sundries on the top of the cabinet. Then, open the cabinet door to prevent sundries from
falling into the cabinet.
 Do not install, use, or operate outdoor equipment and cables (including but not limited to
moving equipment, operating equipment and cables, installing cabinets, installing power
cables, inserting and removing signal connectors connected to outdoor ports, working at
heights, and outdoor installation) in severe weather conditions such as lightning, rain,
snow, and wind of level 6.
 Before installing, operating, or maintaining the equipment, remove any conductive
objects such as watches or metal jewelry like bracelets, bangles, and rings.
 When installing, operating, or maintaining the equipment, wear dedicated protective
gears such as insulation gloves, safety clothing, safety helmet, and safety shoes, as
shown in the following figure.

 Follow the procedures of installation, operation, and maintenance.


 Before handling a conductor surface or terminal, measure the contact point voltage with
a multimeter and ensure that there is no risk of electric shock.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 1 Safety Precautions

 Ensure that all slots are installed with boards or filler panels. Avoid hazards caused by
hazardous voltages or energy on boards. Ensure that the air channel is normal, control
electromagnetic interference, and prevent dust and other sundries on the backplane,
baseplate, and boards.
 After installing the equipment, remove idle packing materials such as cartons, foam,
plastics, and cable ties from the equipment area.
 In the case of a fire, immediately leave the building or the equipment area, and turn on
the fire alarm bell or make an emergency call. Do not enter the building on fire in any
case.
 Do not stop protective devices. Pay attention to the warnings, cautions, and related
precautionary measures in this document and on the nameplates. Promptly replace
warning labels that have worn out.
 Keep irrelevant people far away from the equipment.
 Use wooden or fiberglass ladders when you need to perform live working at heights.
 Use insulated tools or tools with insulated handles, as shown in the following figure.

 All cable holes should be sealed. Seal the cable holes with firestop putty. Seal the unused
cable holes with the caps delivered with the cabinet. The following figure shows the
criteria for correct sealing with firestop putty.

1.1.3 Symbol Conventions


To ensure safety of humans and the equipment, pay attention to the safety symbols on the
equipment and all the safety instructions in this document. The NOTICE, CAUTION,

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 1 Safety Precautions

WARNING, and DANGER statements in this document do not represent all the safety
instructions. They are only supplements to the safety instructions.

Symbol Description
Indicates exposed high-voltage devices. This symbol warns
trained operation personnel that direct contact with the
power grid supply voltage or indirect contact with the power
grid voltage through damp objects or damp air will be fatal.
This symbol is attached to a position with dangerous
voltages or a power protective cover which may be removed
during maintenance.
Warns users of overheating. This symbol is attached to a
device surface that may overheat and cause scalding. It
warns users not to touch the surface during operation or
maintenance. Users should wear heat insulation gloves
before operation to prevent scalding.
Indicates protective grounding. This symbol is attached near
or the protective ground terminal and is used beside a terminal
through which a device is connected to an external
grounding grid. A device ground cable is connected from
the protective ground terminal to the external ground bar.
Indicates equipotential bonding. This symbol is used for an
equipotential bonding terminal. That is, this symbol is
attached to each equipotential bonding terminal inside a
device.
Is an ESD symbol and attached to any areas with
electrostatic sensitivity. If you see such a symbol, wear a
pair of ESD gloves or an ESD wrist strap before operating a
device.
Indicates that the device can be safely used only in areas
with an altitude lower than 2000 meters.

Indicates that the device can be safely used only in a


non-tropical climate.

Is used on a fan box or moving parts. It is attached to the


panel of the fan box to warn trained operation personnel not
or to touch the device. Do not touch the fan blade when it is
rotating.

Indicates that users should refer to the instruction. This


symbol is used when the usage of a device port cannot be
clearly described. For example, this symbol can be used in
but not limited to the following scenarios:
or
1. For a multi-power device, use it near the power supply to
replace the multi-power supply identifier. The symbol
indicates that the device has multiple power inputs.
Therefore, when powering off the device, you must

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 1 Safety Precautions

Symbol Description
disconnect all power inputs.
2. If there are multiple output ports, use the symbol near the
or output ports. Connect cables according to the rated
power output and configuration parameter information in
the instruction.
3. If there are multiple slots, use the symbol near the slot
information. For details, see the description of slot
information, restrictions on boards, and usage conditions
in the instruction.

1.2 Personnel Requirements


 Personnel who plan to install, operate, or maintain Huawei equipment need to receive a
thorough training, understand all necessary safety precautions, and be able to correctly
perform all operations.
 Only qualified professionals and trained personnel are allowed to install, operate, and
maintain the equipment.
 Only qualified professionals are allowed to remove safety facilities and inspect the
equipment.
 Personnel who will operate the equipment, including operators, trained personnel, and
professionals, should possess the local national required qualifications in special
operations such as high-voltage operations, working at heights, and operations of special
equipment.

 Professionals: personnel who are trained or experienced in equipment operations and are clear of the
sources and degree of various potential hazards in equipment installation, operation, and
maintenance
 Trained personnel: personnel who are technically trained, have required experience, are aware of
possible hazards on themselves in certain operations, and are able to take protective measures to
minimize the hazards on themselves and other people
 Users or operators: operation personnel, except trained personnel and professionals, who may handle
the equipment

1.3 Electrical Safety


1.3.1 Grounding Requirements
 Before grounding, ensure that the protection ground is reliably grounded in accordance
with local building power distribution specifications (the ground resistance should be
less than 0.1 ohm).
 For a device that needs to be grounded, install the ground cable first when installing the
device and remove the ground cable last when removing the device.
 Do not damage the ground conductor.
 Do not operate the device in the absence of a properly installed ground conductor.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 1 Safety Precautions

 For a device that uses a three-pin socket, ensure that the ground terminal in the socket is
connected to the protection ground.

1.3.2 AC and DC Power Operation Requirements

 The power system is powered by high-voltage power sources. Direct or indirect contact
(especially through damp objects) with the power sources may result in electric shock.
 Non-standard and improper operations may result in fire or electric shocks.
 Do not install or remove power cables with power on. Transient contact between the core
of a power cable and a conductor may generate electric arcs or sparks, which may cause
fire or hurt human eyes.
 If the power supply to the equipment is permanently connected, install an easily
accessible disconnector at the exterior of the equipment.
 Before making electrical connections, switch off the disconnector on the upstream device
to cut the power supply if people may contact energized components.
 If a "high electricity leakage" tag is attached on the power terminal of a device, you must
ground the protective ground terminal on the device enclosure before connecting the AC
power supply; otherwise, electric shock as a result of electricity leakage may occur.
 Before installing or removing a power cable, turn off the power circuit breaker.
 Before connecting a power cable, check that the label on the power cable is correct.
 Before connecting the power supply, ensure that electrical connections are correct.
 If the equipment has multiple inputs, disconnect all the inputs before operating the
equipment.

1.3.3 Cabling Requirements


 When routing cables, ensure that a sufficient distance exists between the cables and
heat-generating components such as power copper bars, shunts, and fuses. This prevents
damage to the insulation layer of the cables.
 Separately bind signal cables and power cables.
 Ensure that all cables meet the VW-1 test requirements.
 Do not route cables behind the air exhaust vents of rectifiers in a cabinet.
 Securely bind all cables.
 If AC input power cables need to be routed from the top, bend the cables in the U shape
outside the cabinet and then route them into the cabinet.

1.3.4 TNV Circuit


 To avoid electric shock, do not connect safety extra-low voltage (SELV) circuits to
telecommunication network voltage (TNV) circuits.

1.3.5 Environment Requirements and Tool Insulation


 Keep irrelevant people far away from the equipment.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 1 Safety Precautions

 Before operating the equipment, wear insulation shoes and gloves, and take measures to
protect your eyes. Remove conductive objects such as jewelry and watches to avoid
electric shock or burns.
 Use insulated tools or tools with insulated handles.
 Use wooden or fiberglass ladders when you need to perform live working at heights.

1.4 Installation Environment Requirements


 Do not place the equipment in an environment that has inflammable and explosive gases
or smoke. Do not perform any operation in such an environment.
 Ensure that there are no acid, alkaline, or other corrosive gases in the installation place.
 Do not place the equipment near heat sources or exposed fire sources, such as electric
heaters, microwave ovens, roasters, water heaters, furnace fire, candles, or other places
where high temperature may occur. Otherwise, the enclosure will melt or the equipment
will heat up, which can cause a fire.
 Do not use flammable materials such as paper and cotton to shield or cover the
equipment that is running. Otherwise, heat dissipation will fail and the enclosure will
deform, which can cause a fire.
 Do not place the product in areas prone to water leakage, such as near air conditioner
vents, ventilation vents, or feeder windows of the equipment room.

Installation Inside a Cabinet


Before installing the equipment into a cabinet, ensure that the cabinet is secured and will not
tilt or fall down due to loss of balance, which can cause personal injury or equipment damage.

Installation at Heights
Working at heights refers to operations that are performed at least 2 meters above the ground.
Stop working at heights if the steel pipes are wet or other potential danger exists. After any of
the preceding conditions no longer exists, the safety director and relevant technical personnel
need to check the involved equipment. Operators can begin working only after obtaining
consent.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 1 Safety Precautions

 When working at heights, comply with local relevant laws and regulations.
 Only trained and qualified personnel are allowed to work at heights.
 Before working at heights, check the climbing tools and safety gears such as safety
helmets, safety belts, ladders, springboards, scaffolding, and lifting equipment. If they do
not meet the requirements, take corrective measures or disallow working at heights.
 Wear personal protective equipment such as the safety helmet and safety belt or waist rope
and fasten it to a solid structure. Do not mount it on an insecure moveable object or metal
object with sharp edges. Make sure that the hooks will not slide off.
 Set a forbidden area and eye-catching signs for working at heights to warn away irrelevant
personnel.
 Carry the operation machinery and tools properly to prevent them from falling off and
causing injuries.
 Personnel involving working at heights are not allowed to throw objects from the height to
the ground, or vice versa. Objects should be transported by tough slings, hanging baskets,
highline trolleys, or cranes.
 Do not perform operations on the upper and lower layers at the same time. If unavoidable,
install a dedicated protective shelter between the upper and lower layers or take other
protective measures. Do not pile up tools or properties on the upper layer.
 Ensure that guard rails and warning signs are set at the edges and openings of the area
involving working at heights to prevent falls.
 Do not pile up scaffolding, springboards, or other sundries on the ground under the area
involving working at heights. Do not allow people to stay or pass under the area involving
working at heights.
 Inspect the scaffolding, springboards, and workbenches used for working at heights in
advance to ensure that their structures are solid and not overloaded.
 Dismantle the scaffolding from top down after finishing the job. Do not dismantle the
upper and lower layers at the same time. When removing a part, ensure that other parts
will not collapse.
 Before climbing up a ladder, ensure that the ladder is secure and free of cracks The angle
between the ladder and the ground should be 75°. When a step ladder is used, ensure that
the pull ropes are secured and the ladder is held firm.
 Do not loiter when working at heights. Do not sleep at heights.
 Any violations must be promptly pointed out by the site manager or safety supervisor and
the involved personnel should be prompted for correction. Personnel who fail to stop
violations may be forbidden from working and the suspension is considered as
absenteeism.
 Operators who violate the safety regulations are responsible for accidents caused. The
supervisor has to bear the responsibility accordingly.

1.5 Mechanical Safety


1.5.1 Hoisting

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 1 Safety Precautions

When heavy objects are being hoisted, do not walk under the cantilever or the objects.
 Only trained and qualified personnel should perform hoisting operations.
 Check that hoisting tools are available and in good condition.
 Before hoisting objects, ensure that hoisting tools are firmly fixed onto a weight-bearing
object or wall.
 Ensure that the angle formed by two hoisting cables is no more than 90 degrees, as
shown in the following figure.

1.5.2 Using Ladders


 Use only ladders that are in good condition. Do not exceed the maximum weight
capacity of the ladders.
 The recommended angle for a ladder against the floor is 75 degrees, as shown in the
following figure. An angle rule can be used to measure the angle. Ensure that the wider
end of the ladder is at the bottom, or protective measures have been taken at the bottom
to prevent the ladder from sliding, and that the ladder is securely positioned.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 1 Safety Precautions

 When climbing a ladder:


− Ensure that your body's center of gravity does not shift outside the legs of the
ladder.
− To minimize the risk of falling, steady your balance on the ladder before performing
any operation.
− Do not climb higher than the fourth rung of the ladder from the top.
To climb onto a roof, ensure that the ladder top is at least one meter higher than the roof line,
as shown in the following figure.

1.5.3 Drilling Holes


When drilling holes into a wall or floor, observe the following safety precautions:

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 1 Safety Precautions

Do not drill holes into the cabinet without permission. Incorrect drilling operations may affect
the electromagnetic shielding of the cabinet and damage cables inside. Metal shavings from
drilling may short-circuit boards inside the cabinet.
 Wear goggles and protective gloves when drilling holes.
 When drilling holes, protect the equipment from metal shavings. After drilling, clean up
any metal shavings that have accumulated inside or outside the equipment.

1.5.4 Moving Heavy Objects


 Be cautious to avoid injury when moving heavy objects. When lifting the chassis, keep
your back straight and move smoothly to avoid injury.
 When moving equipment by hand, wear gloves to protect against sharp edges.
 Move or lift the chassis by holding its handles or lower edges. Do not hold the handles
on certain modules such as power supply units, fans, and boards because they cannot
support the weight of the equipment.

1.6 Battery Safety


1.6.1 Basic Requirements
Before installing, operating, or maintaining batteries, read the battery manufacturer's
instructions. Observe the safety precautions provided in this document which are
supplemental to the safety instructions provided by the battery manufacturer.
When installing and maintaining batteries, pay attention to the following:
 Do not wear conductive articles such as watches, bracelets, bangles, and rings.
 Use dedicated insulated tools.
 Do not expose batteries at high temperatures or around heat-generating devices, such as
the sunshine, warmer, microwave oven, roaster, or water heater. Battery overheating may
cause explosions.
 Batteries can work properly with the allowed charge and discharge parameters when the
temperature is within the specified range. If the temperature is outside the specified
range, the battery charge and discharge performance and safety are affected.
 To avoid leakage, overheating, fire, or explosions, do not disassemble or alter batteries,
insert sundries, or immerse batteries in water or other liquid.
 Avoid skin contact with electrolyte overflow. Before installing or maintaining batteries,
wear goggles, rubber gloves, and protective clothing. If a battery leaks, protect the skin
or eyes from the leaking liquid. If the skin or eyes come in contact with the leaking
liquid, wash it immediately with clean water and go to the hospital for medical treatment.
 Move batteries in the required direction. Do not place a battery upside down or tilt it.
 Switch off the battery circuit breaker or remove the battery fuse before installation and
maintenance.
 When replacing a battery, use a battery of the same or equivalent type. Improper
replacement may cause the battery to explode.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 1 Safety Precautions

 Do not connect a metal conductor to the battery poles or touch the battery terminals.
Otherwise, the battery may be short-circuited and heat up, which can cause injuries such
as burning.
 Dispose of batteries in accordance with local laws and regulations. Do not dispose of
batteries as household waste. If a battery is disposed of improperly, it may explode.
 Do not drop, squeeze, or puncture a battery. Protect batteries from external high pressure
to prevent internal short circuits and overheating.
 Do not use damaged batteries.
 To prevent injury or explosion, do not allow children or pets to swallow or bite a battery.
 If batteries experience discoloration, deformation, abnormal heating, or other
abnormalities during working, charging, or storage, stop using the batteries and replace
them with new ones.
 Secure battery cables or copper bars to the torque specified in battery documentation.
Loose connections will result in excessive voltage drops or cause batteries to burn out
when the current increases.

Before operating batteries, carefully read the safety precautions for battery handling and
connection.

1.6.2 Battery Installation Regulations


Before installing batteries, observe the following safety precautions:
 Lead-acid batteries emit flammable gas when used. Install batteries in a dry and cool
environment with good ventilation, which is away from high temperature and flammable
materials, and take precautions against fire. High battery temperature may result in
battery distortion, damage, and electrolyte overflow.
 Switch off the power supply before installing batteries.
 Note the positive and negative polarities when installing batteries. Do not short-circuit
the positive and negative poles of the same battery or battery string. Otherwise, a great
amount of energy is released, causing personal injury and damage to equipment.
 When installing a battery string, retain at least one breakpoint to prevent a loop being
formed. After checking that the installation is correct, close the breakpoints to finish the
installation.
 Before powering on a battery string, ensure that all bolts connecting batteries are
tightened to the required torque.
 Do not use unsealed lead-acid batteries. Place and secure lead-acid batteries horizontally
to prevent device inflammation or corrosion due to flammable gas emitted from
batteries.
 During the installation, insulate the terminals of cables connecting batteries. Ensure that
the terminals do not come into contact with metal components such as the cabinet.
 When handling a battery, ensure that its electrodes are upward. Do not tilt or overturn
batteries.

1.6.3 Protection Against Battery Short Circuits

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 12


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 1 Safety Precautions

Battery short circuits can generate high instantaneous current and release a great amount of
energy, which may cause equipment damage or personal injury.

If permitted, disconnect the batteries in use before performing any other operations.

1.6.4 Protection Against Flammable Gas

 Do not use unsealed lead-acid batteries.


 Place and secure lead-acid batteries horizontally and ensure that hydrogen discharge
measures are normal to prevent inflammation or device corrosion due to flammable gas
emitted from batteries.

Lead-acid batteries emit flammable gas if they work abnormally. Store lead-acid batteries in a
place with good ventilation, and take fire safety precautions.

1.6.5 Battery Leakage Handling Regulations

High battery temperature may result in battery distortion, damage, and electrolyte overflow.

If the battery temperature is higher than 60°C, check the battery for electrolyte overflow. If
the electrolyte overflows, handle the leakage immediately.

When the electrolyte overflows, absorb and neutralize the electrolyte immediately.

When moving or handling a battery whose electrolyte leaks, note that the leaking electrolyte
may hurt human bodies. Neutralize and absorb the electrolyte with sodium bicarbonate
(NaHCO3) or sodium carbonate (Na2CO3) before moving the batteries.

1.6.6 Lithium Battery Scenarios


The precautions for lithium battery operations are similar to the precautions for lead-acid
battery operations except that you also need to note the precautions described in this section.

There is a risk of explosion if a battery is replaced with an incorrect model.


 A battery can be replaced only with a battery of the same or similar model recommended
by the supplier.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 13


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 1 Safety Precautions

 When handling lithium batteries, do not place them upside down, tilt them, or bump
them against the ground.
 Keep the battery loop disconnected during installation and maintenance.
 When the ambient temperature is lower than the lower limit of the operating temperature,
do not charge the battery (0°C Charging is not allowed). Otherwise, a short circuit occurs
inside the battery.
 Do not throw a lithium battery in fire.
 When maintenance is complete, return the waste lithium battery to the maintenance
office.

1.7 PV Module Safety


Before installing, operating, and maintaining photovoltaic (PV) modules, read the instructions
provided by the PV module vendor. The safety precautions specified in this document are
highly important precautions that require special attention. For additional safety precautions,
see the instructions provided by the PV module vendor.

 Before installation and maintenance, put on a safety helmet, goggles, insulation gloves,
and protective clothing to avoid personal injury.
 Before installing and maintaining PV modules, cover all PV modules totally using opaque
materials to avoid electric shocks caused by generated currents.
 Never focus sunlight on PV modules using a mirror or lens, because this may damage PV
modules and cause personal injury.
 When moving PV modules, do not hold connection boxes or power cables, because they
are not designed to support the weight of PV modules.
 Exercise caution when moving PV modules to avoid collision. Improper movement and
placement may cause the glass plates on PV modules to break and lose electrical
performance, which renders the PV modules useless.
 In strong wind, do not install PV modules at heights.
 To install or maintain a high support, you must set up a support platform and use a safety
helmet or safety belt.
 Do not drill holes in, step on, or place heavy objects on PV modules, because these
actions may damage PV modules.
 At least two persons are required to move and install PV modules. Only the aluminum
frame of the PV modules can be raised. Exerting force on the front or rear surface of the
PV modules using your head is prohibited. This may cause hidden cracks in the PV
modules.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 14


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 2 Installation Preparations

2 Installation Preparations

2.1 Application Scenario Overview


Table 2-1 Application scenario overview

ICC Cabinet Battery Cabinet Application Scenario


ICC330-H1-C4 ESC330-D5 (2 PCS) Lithium battery: grid, grid + backup DG, solar-diesel, solar-grid,
solar-grid-diesel, single DG, dual DGs, DG + grid
ESC720-A3 (2 PCS) Lithium battery: grid, grid + backup DG, solar-diesel, solar-grid,
solar-grid-diesel, single DG, dual DGs, DG + grid
ESC330-D5 (1 PCS) Lithium battery + lead-acid battery: grid, grid + backup DG, single
and ESC710-D2 (1 DG, dual DGs, DG + grid
PCS)
ESC330-D5 (2 PCS) Lithium battery + lead-acid battery: solar
and ESC710-D2 (1–2
PCS)
ESC330-D5 (2 PCS) Lithium battery + lead-acid battery: solar
and ESC300-N1 (1–4
PCS)
ICC330-H1-C5 ESC330-D5 (2 PCS) Lithium battery: grid, grid + backup DG, solar-diesel, solar-grid,
solar-grid-diesel, single DG, dual DGs, DG + grid
ESC720-A3 (2 PCS) Lithium battery: grid, grid + backup DG, solar-diesel, solar-grid,
solar-grid-diesel, single DG, dual DGs, DG + grid
ESC330-D5 (1 PCS) Lithium battery + lead-acid battery: grid, grid + backup DG, single
and ESC710-D2 (1 DG, dual DGs, DG + grid
PCS)

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 2 Installation Preparations

2.2 Cabinet Installation Dimensions


If multiple cabinets are installed side by side, keep a spacing of 200 mm between them.

Figure 2-1 Installation dimensions (ICC330 + ESC330)

Figure 2-2 Installation dimensions (ESC720 + ICC330)

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 16


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 2 Installation Preparations

Figure 2-3 Installation dimensions (ESC710 + ICC330 + ESC330)

The installation dimensions are for reference only. Determine the dimensions based on the site situation.

2.3 Cabinet Cable Hole Positions and Definitions


Figure 2-4 Positions and definitions of cable holes at the bottom of the ICC330

(1) For AC power cables and (2) For DC power cables (3) For signal (4)
ground cables and signal cables cables Reserved

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 17


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 2 Installation Preparations

Figure 2-5 Positions and definitions of cable holes at the bottom of the ESC330

(1) For DC power cables and ground cables (2) Reserved (3) For signal cables

Figure 2-6 Positions and definitions of cable holes at the bottom of the ESC710

(1) For DC power cables (2) Reserved (3) For signal and ground cables

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 18


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 2 Installation Preparations

Figure 2-7 Positions and definitions of cable holes at the bottom of the ESC720

(1) For DC power cables and ground cables (2) For DC power cables

2.4 Tools
This section lists the tools and instruments that you need to prepare for the installation.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 19


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 2 Installation Preparations

Figure 2-8 Tools

 A funnel is used only in diesel hybrid solutions.


 A compass is used only in solar hybrid solutions.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 20


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 2 Installation Preparations

2.5 Unpacking and Acceptance


Context

When transporting, carrying, and installing equipment:


 Ensure that components do not collide with doors, walls, or shelves.
 Wear clean gloves. Do not touch components with bare hands or wet or dirty gloves.

Procedure
Step 1 Check the total number of goods against the packing list attached to each packing case.

If... Then...
The total number of goods is consistent with Go to Step 2.
that on the packing list.
The total number of goods is inconsistent Find the cause and contact the local Huawei
with that on the packing list. office.

Step 2 Check each packing case.

If... Then...
The packing case is intact. Go to Step 3.
The packing case is severely damaged or Find the cause and contact the local Huawei
water intrudes into the packing case. office.

Step 3 Check the number and types of devices in each packing case against the packing list.

If... Then...
The number and types of devices are Sign on the Packing List with the customer.
consistent with that on the packing list.
Any device is missing, damaged, or of a Contact the local Huawei office.
wrong type.

To protect devices and facilitate future problem diagnosis, store unpacked devices and
packing materials indoors. Take photos of the storage site, any rusty or corroded devices, and
the packing cases and materials. Keep the photos for future reference.

----End

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 21


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 2 Installation Preparations

2.6 Requirements for Laying Out Cables


Lay out cables according to the following requirements to avoid signal interference.

If some of the cables described below do not need to be installed onsite, ignore the requirements for
laying out such cables.

General Requirements for Laying Out Cables


Bending Radius Requirements
The bending radii of power cables, ground cables, and signal cables should be greater than or
equal to five times their diameters.
Cable Binding Requirements
 Cables of the same type should be bound together.
 Cables of different types must keep a minimum distance of 30 mm from each other.
Cables must not be tangled or twisted.
 Cables that are bound together should be close to each other, neat, and free from damage.
 Cable ties are bound neatly in the same direction. Cable ties at the same horizontal line
must be in a straight line.
 The extra part of each indoor cable tie must be cut off. A slack of 5 mm is reserved for
each outdoor cable tie. All cut surfaces have no sharp edges.
 After cables are installed, labels or nameplates must be attached to both ends, joints, or
turns of the cables.
Safety Requirements
 Cables should be placed away from sharp objects or wall burrs. If inevitable, protect the
cables with protection pipes.
 Cables should be routed away from heat sources, or heat-insulation materials should be
added between cables and heat sources.
 Sufficient slack (about 0.1 m recommended) should be provided in cables at turns or the
position close to a device, facilitating cable and device maintenance.
Indoor Cable Layout Requirements
 Cables are routed indoors through feeder windows.
 Trap the cable part outside the feeder window according to requirements for the
minimum bending radius.
 When routing a cable into the room, ensure that a person is assisting you in the room.
 Feeder windows must be waterproofed.

Requirements for Laying Out Cables Outdoors


 Outdoor cables must be routed through a pipe to protect them from being damaged.
 AC power cables, transmission cables, and cables buried in the ground must be
protected.
 If cables at the cabinet bottom need to be routed through a pipe along the ground, the
pipe should be routed into the cabinet base for about 30 mm to 50 mm, but not into the

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 22


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 2 Installation Preparations

cabinet. The pipe end should be sealed with waterproof tape or silicon gel, and the pipe
should be secured to the cable hole at the cabinet bottom using sheet metal.
 If cables at the cabinet bottom need to be routed through a pipe along a metal cable
trough, the pipe should not be routed into the cabinet base. The cable trough should be
sealed and routed through the cable hole at the cabinet bottom.
 Arrange the cables in order in the routing direction, and install cable clips.

Special Requirements for Laying Out Cables


Power Cable Routing Requirements
 The positions for laying out power cables should be in accordance with the design
drawing.
 If the cable length is insufficient, use another power cable with a sufficient length. No
joint or weld is allowed on a power cable.
 Power cables must be routed by only qualified and trained personnel after all
preparations are made.
 Power cables are straightly routed and not twisted or winded.
Ground Cable Routing Requirements
 Ground cables in a base station should be connected to the same ground bar.
 Ground cables must not be routed in from the overhead. They must be routed
underground or indoors.
 Both ends of the external conductor of a coaxial cable and the shield layer of a shielded
cable should have good electrical contact with the metal shell of the device they connect
to.
 Ground cables and signal cables should be bound separately with a proper distance in
between to avoid interference.
 Circuit breakers or fuses are not allowed on ground cables.
 No devices can be used as a part of ground cables.
 All conductive metal components in the shell should properly connect to protection
ground terminals.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 23


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 3 Installing PV Module Supports and Cables

3 Installing PV Module Supports and


Cables

For details about how to install PV module supports and cables, see the Quick-Mount PV
Module Support Installation Guide and PV Module Support Structure Installation Guide
(2154xxxx) available at the support website.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 24


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 4 Installing a DG

4 Installing a DG

4.1 Installing a DG
Different DGs are installed in different ways. For details about how to install a DG, see the
related documents available at the support website. The following table lists the document
names.

Table 4-1 References for DG installation

DG Model Reference Document


EPM100-M2B EPM100-M2B Integrated Diesel Generating Set User Manual
EPM100-M2E EPM100-M2E Integrated Diesel Generating Set User Manual
EPM100-M2H EPM100-M2H Integrated Diesel Generating Set User Manual
EPM115-M2A 4.2 Installing an EPM115-M2A
EPM120-M2D EPM120-M2D Integrated Diesel Generating Set User Manual
EPM140-M2B EPM140-M2B Integrated Diesel Generating Set User Manual
EPM140-M2C EPM140-M2C Integrated Diesel Generating Set User Manual
EPM140-M2D EPM140-M2D Integrated Diesel Generating Set User Manual
EPM160-M2B EPM160-M2B Diesel Generating Set User Manual
EPM160-M2C EPM160-M2C Integrated Diesel Generating Set User Manual
EPM160-M2D EPM160-M2D Integrated Diesel Generating Set User Manual
EPM200-M2B EPM200-M2B Diesel Generating Set User Manual

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 25


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 4 Installing a DG

4.2 Installing an EPM115-M2A


4.2.1 Installing the DG
Procedure
Step 1 Route lifting ropes through lifting eyes and secure the ropes to the bottom of the DG. Then
move the DG to the installation position using a crane.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 26


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 4 Installing a DG

 The maximum weight of the DG is 835 kg. For safety, the lifting ropes should be able to
bear a weight greater than 2505 kg (triple the maximum weight of the DG).
 To avoid friction between the lifting ropes and the DG when hoisting the DG, place
protective materials (such as paper and foamed plastics) where the ropes will contact the
DG.

Figure 4-1 Hoisting a DG

Step 2 Mark DG mounting holes based on the anchor plate.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 27


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 4 Installing a DG

Figure 4-2 Marking mounting holes

(1) Marker (2) DG (3) Anchor plate (4) Concrete floor

Step 3 Drill holes and install expansion sleeves.


1. Drill a 52 mm to 60 mm deep hole in the concrete floor using a hammer drill.
2. Partially tighten the expansion bolt and vertically insert it into the hole. Then knock the
expansion bolt completely into the hole using a rubber mallet.
3. Partially tighten the expansion bolt.
4. Remove the bolt, spring washer, and flat washer.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 28


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 4 Installing a DG

Figure 4-3 Drilling a hole and installing an expansion sleeve

(1) M12 bolt (2) Nut (3) Spring washer


(4) Flat washer (5) Expansion sleeve (6) Concrete floor

Step 4 Secure the DG.


1. Put the anchor plate, flat washer, spring washer, and nut into the bolt.
2. Tighten bolts to secure the DG.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 29


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 4 Installing a DG

Figure 4-4 Securing a DG

Step 5 Knock off the iron plates from the cable holes on the DG base and determine DG cable outlets
based on the ICC cable inlets.

Figure 4-5 Knocking off iron plates from cable holes

(1) AC power cable, DC power cable, and ground cable (2) For signal cables

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 30


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 4 Installing a DG

Step 6 Install a DG ground cable.


1. Prepare a cable with a suitable length as required and install an OT terminal on both ends
of the cable by referring to A.3 Preparing Terminals.
2. Route the ground cable and secure it to the ground bar.

 Ensure that the ground cable is installed securely. If devices are not properly grounded,
damage to devices or personal injury may occur.
 Connect the DG and ICC to the same site ground bar.

Figure 4-6 Installing a ground cable

(1) DG ground bolt (2) Site ground bar

----End

4.2.2 Removing Transport Brackets and Desiccants


(EPM115-M2A)
Procedure
Step 1 Remove transport brackets from the DG.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 31


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 4 Installing a DG

Figure 4-7 Removing transport brackets

Step 2 Remove the desiccants in the four corners at the bottom of the DG.
----End

4.2.3 Adding Engine Oil, Fuel, and Coolant (EPM115-M2A)


Prerequisites

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 32


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 4 Installing a DG

 Shut down the engine before adding engine oil and fuel.
 Do not smoke when adding engine oil and fuel.
 Stay away from fire or sparkles when adding engine oil and fuel.

Procedure
Step 1 Check the oil level at the oil level dipstick on the engine.
 If the oil level is between the upper and lower thresholds on the oil level dipstick, do not
add engine oil.
 If the oil level is below the lower threshold, discharge engine oil from the auxiliary oil
tank, and add the discharged engine oil at the engine oil filler port until the oil level
reaches between the upper and lower thresholds.

Figure 4-8 Position and appearance of the oil level dipstick (EPM115-M2A)

(1) Oil level dipstick

Step 2 Add diesel fuel at the diesel fuel filler port.


Step 3 Add 8.5 liters of coolant into the coolant filler port.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 33


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 4 Installing a DG

Figure 4-9 Adding engine oil, fuel, and coolant

(1) Fuel filler port (2) Coolant filler port (3) Engine oil filler port

The left figure shows the front view of a DG, and the right figure shows the rear view of a DG.

----End

4.2.4 Installing a Negative Battery Cable (EPM115-M2A)


Context
The positive battery cable has been factory installed. You need only to install the negative
battery cable onsite.

Procedure
Step 1 Install the negative battery cable.

The torques required for installing battery cables are as follows:

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 34


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 4 Installing a DG

 If the battery wiring terminals are M6 screws, tighten the screws to 4.5-5.5 N.m.
 If the battery wiring terminals are M8 screws, tighten the screws to 7.2-8.8 N.m.

Figure 4-10 Installing a negative battery cable

(1) Negative battery cable

The battery appearance in the preceding figure is for reference only. Connect the cable based on site
requirements.

----End

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 35


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 5 Installing the Cabinet

5 Installing the Cabinet

5.1 Installing an ICC330


Procedure
Step 1 Remove the cabinet packing case and take off the marking-off template.
Step 2 Remove the pallet.

Figure 5-1 Removing the cabinet pallet

Step 3 Mark the mounting holes based on the marking-off template.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 36


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 5 Installing the Cabinet

Figure 5-2 Cabinet outline and base mounting hole dimensions

Step 4 Drill holes and install expansion sleeves.


1. Drill a hole in the concrete floor using a hammer drill. The hole depth should range from
52 mm to 60 mm.
2. Slightly tighten the expansion bolt and vertically insert it into the hole. Knock the
expansion bolt using a rubber mallet until the expansion sleeve is fully inserted into the
hole.
3. Partially tighten the expansion bolt.
4. Remove the bolt, spring washer, and flat washer.

Figure 5-3 Drilling a hole and installing an expansion sleeve

(1) M12 bolt (2) Spring washer (3) Flat washer


(4) Expansion sleeve (5) Expansion nut (6) Concrete floor

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 37


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 5 Installing the Cabinet

Step 5 Hoist the cabinet.


1. Bind lifting ropes to the cabinet lifting eyes and hoist the cabinet to the target position.

 To prevent scraping the cabinet coating, do not use metal lifting ropes such as steel ropes.
 To avoid friction between the lifting ropes and the cabinet during hoisting, place protective
materials (such as paper and foamed plastics) where the ropes will contact the cabinet.

Figure 5-4 Hoisting the cabinet

2. Remove the lifting ropes.


Step 6 Secure the cabinet.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 38


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 5 Installing the Cabinet

1. Place flat washers, spring washers, and bolts into the cabinet mounting holes in
sequence.
2. Tighten expansion bolts to secure the cabinet.

Figure 5-5 Securing the cabinet

----End

5.2 Installing an ESC330


Procedure
Step 1 The ESC330 and ICC330 are installed in the same way.

If the ESC330 is combined with the ICC330, ensure that the clearance between them is at
least 200 mm.

----End

5.3 Installing an ESC710


Procedure
Step 1 Remove the cabinet packing case.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 39


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 5 Installing the Cabinet

Step 2 Remove the cabinet pallet.

Figure 5-6 Removing the cabinet pallet

Step 3 Mark the mounting holes based on the marking-off template.

Figure 5-7 Cabinet outline and base mounting hole dimensions

Step 4 Drill holes and install expansion sleeves.


1. Drill a hole in the concrete floor using a hammer drill. The hole depth should range from
52 mm to 60 mm.
2. Slightly tighten the expansion bolt and vertically insert it into the hole. Knock the
expansion bolt using a rubber mallet until the expansion sleeve is fully inserted into the
hole.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 40


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 5 Installing the Cabinet

3. Partially tighten the expansion bolt.


4. Remove the bolt, spring washer, and flat washer.

Figure 5-8 Drilling a hole and installing an expansion sleeve

(1) M12 bolt (2) Spring washer (3) Flat washer


(4) Expansion sleeve (5) Expansion nut (6) Concrete floor

Step 5 Hoist the cabinet.


1. Bind lifting ropes to the cabinet lifting eyes and hoist the cabinet to the target position.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 41


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 5 Installing the Cabinet

 To prevent scraping the cabinet coating, do not use metal lifting ropes such as steel ropes.
 To avoid friction between the lifting ropes and the cabinet during hoisting, place protective
materials (such as paper and foamed plastics) where the ropes will contact the cabinet.

Figure 5-9 Hoisting the cabinet

2. Remove the lifting ropes.


Step 6 Secure the cabinet.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 42


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 5 Installing the Cabinet

1. Place flat washers, spring washers, and bolts into the cabinet mounting holes in
sequence.
2. Tighten the bolts to secure the cabinet.

Figure 5-10 Securing the cabinet

----End

5.4 Installing an ESC720


Procedure
Step 1 Unpack the cabinet.

Remove the top cover from the cabinet packing case and find the marking-off template on the cover
interior.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 43


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 5 Installing the Cabinet

Figure 5-11 Taking off a marking-off template

Step 2 Remove the cabinet pallet.

Figure 5-12 Removing the cabinet pallet

Step 3 Mark cabinet mounting holes based on the marking-off template.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 44


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 5 Installing the Cabinet

Figure 5-13 Marking mounting holes

Step 4 Drill holes and install expansion sleeves.


1. Drill holes into the concrete floor using a hammer drill. The hole depth should range
from 52 mm to 60 mm.
2. Slightly tighten the expansion bolt and vertically insert it into the hole. Knock the
expansion bolt using a rubber mallet until the expansion sleeve is fully inserted into the
hole.
3. Partially tighten the expansion bolt.
4. Remove the bolt, spring washer, and flat washer.

Figure 5-14 Drilling holes and installing expansion sleeves

(1) M12 bolt (2) Spring washer (3) Flat washer


(4) Expansion sleeve (5) Expansion nut (6) Concrete floor

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 45


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 5 Installing the Cabinet

Step 5 Hoist the cabinet.


1. Bind the cabinet using lifting ropes and then hoist the cabinet to the target position.

 To prevent scraping the cabinet coating, do not use metal lifting ropes such as steel ropes.
 To avoid friction between the lifting ropes and the cabinet during hoisting, place protective
materials (such as paper and foamed plastics) where the ropes will contact the cabinet.

Figure 5-15 Hoisting the cabinet

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 46


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 5 Installing the Cabinet

2. Remove the lifting ropes.


Step 6 Secure the cabinet.
1. Place flat washers, spring washers, and bolts into the cabinet mounting holes in
sequence.
2. Tighten the bolts to secure the cabinet.

Figure 5-16 Securing the cabinet

----End

5.5 Installing ESC300 Battery Cabinets, Batteries, and


Cables
Installing Battery Cabinets, Batteries, and Cables
For details about how to install battery cabinets, batteries, and cables, see the ESC300-N1
Installation Guide on http://support.huawei.com.

5.6 Installing Rat Guards on the Left and Right Sides of


the Base
If rat guards are required, perform the following steps to install them.

Procedure
Step 1 Install rat guards on the left and right sides of the ICC330 and ESC330 bases.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 47


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 5 Installing the Cabinet

Figure 5-17 Installing rat guards (ICC330/ESC330)

All cables for the cabinets must be routed through cable holes in the rat guards.

Step 2 Install fasteners for rat guards on the left and right sides of the ESC710 and ESC720 bases.

Figure 5-18 Installing rat guard fasteners (ESC710/ESC720)

Step 3 Install rat guards on the left and right sides of the ESC710 and ESC720 bases.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 48


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 5 Installing the Cabinet

Figure 5-19 Installing rat guards (ESC710/ESC720)

All cables for the cabinets must be routed through cable holes in the rat guards.

----End

5.7 Installing a Cabinet on the Buried Steel PV Base


Prerequisites
One cabinet is used as an example. The actual cabinet model prevails.

Context
If a standard PV module support that does not require a concrete foundation is deployed
onsite, perform the following steps to install a cabinet on the buried steel PV base.

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the cabinet pallet.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 49


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 5 Installing the Cabinet

Figure 5-20 Removing the cabinet pallet

Step 2 Determine the cabinet mounting holes based on the silk screens on the buried steel PV base.

Figure 5-21 Cabinet mounting hole silk screens (vertical beam)

Figure 5-22 Cabinet mounting hole silk screens (horizontal beam)

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 50


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 5 Installing the Cabinet

Step 3 Hoist the cabinet.


1. Bind the cabinet using lifting ropes and then hoist the cabinet to the target position.

 To prevent scraping the cabinet coating, do not use metal lifting ropes such as steel ropes.
 To avoid friction between the lifting ropes and the cabinet during hoisting, place protective materials
(such as paper and foamed plastics) where the ropes will contact the cabinet.

Figure 5-23 Hoisting the cabinet

2. Remove the lifting ropes.


Step 4 Secure the cabinet.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 51


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 5 Installing the Cabinet

Figure 5-24 Securing the cabinet

----End

5.8 Installing Cabinet Ground Cables


Procedure
Step 1 Prepare a cable of suitable length and install an OT terminal on both ends of the cable. For
details, see A.3 Preparing Terminals.
Step 2 Route the ground cable and connect it to the ground bar.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 52


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 5 Installing the Cabinet

 Ensure that the ground cable is installed securely. Inappropriate grounding may cause
device damage and personal injury.
 If a DG is deployed, connect the DG and ICC cabinet to the same site ground bar.

Figure 5-25 Installing the ICC330 ground cable

(1) Site ground bar

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 53


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 5 Installing the Cabinet

Figure 5-26 Installing the ESC330 ground cable

(1) Site ground bar

Figure 5-27 Installing the ESC710 ground cable

(1) Cabinet ground bar (2) Site ground bar

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 54


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 5 Installing the Cabinet

Figure 5-28 Installing the ESC720 ground cable

(1) Site ground bar

----End

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 55


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

6 Installing Components

6.1 Component Installation Positions


Figure 6-1 Component installation positions (using the ICC330-H1-C4 as an example)

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 56


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

6.2 Installing a Communications Expansion Module


Prerequisites
 If a communications expansion module is required, perform the following steps to install
it.
 Wear ESD gloves during installation.

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the filler panel from the slot for installing the communications expansion module.
Step 2 Push the handle of the communications expansion module rightwards.
Step 3 Gently insert the communications expansion module into its slot along the guide rails.
Step 4 Push the handle leftwards.
Step 5 Tighten the screws.

Figure 6-2 Installing a communications expansion module

----End

6.3 Installing Communications Expansion Modules


(NIM01C3)
Prerequisites

Install communications expansion modules in the upper slot and then in the lower slot.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 57


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
Step 2 Insert the SIM card into the SIM card slot in the communications expansion modules.
The SIM card inserted into the 4G communications expansion modules (NIM01C3) should
support GSM, WCDMA, and FDD standards or GSM, TD-SCDMA, and TDD standards, and
have the PS (data service) functions enabled.

Figure 6-3 SIM card slot

(1) SIM card slot

Step 3 Install the NIM01C3.


1. Unscrew the filler panel and gently remove it from the slot.
2. Open the ejector lever on the NIM01C3, put the NIM01C3 at the entry of the slot, and
gently push it in place.
3. Close the ejector lever.
4. Tighten the captive screws at both ends of the NIM01C3 panel to a torque of 0.6 N.m.

Figure 6-4 Installing a NIM01C3

----End

6.4 Installing a DG Interface Module (GIM01C)


If a GIM01C is required, perform the following steps to install it.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 58


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
Step 2 Install the GIM01C.
1. Unscrew the filler panel and gently remove it from the slot.
2. Open the ejector lever on the GIM01C, put the GIM01C at the entry of the slot, and
gently push it in place.
3. Close the ejector lever.
4. Tighten the captive screws at both ends of the GIM01C panel to a torque of 0.6 N.m.

The GIM01C must be installed in the slot under the installation slot for the communications
expansion module. Otherwise, the GIM01C cannot work properly.

Figure 6-5 Installing a GIM01C

----End

6.5 Installing a Network Interface Module (NIM02D)


Prerequisites
If an NIM02D is required, perform the following steps to install it.

Procedure
Step 1 Unscrew and take out the UIM02C.

Before taking out the UIM02C panel, cut off the cable tie on the side of the rack. Do not cut off the cable
tie on the side of the UIM02C.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 59


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

Figure 6-6 Taking out the UIM02C

Step 2 Remove the filler panel in the NIM02D installation position from the internal side of the
UIM02C panel.

Figure 6-7 Removing a filler panel

Step 3 Install bolts for securing the NIM02D.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 60


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

Figure 6-8 Installing bolts

Step 4 Push the NIM02D in position and secure it with holes aligned.

Figure 6-9 Installing an NIM02D

Step 5 Connect power cables between the NIM02D and UIM02C.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 61


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

Figure 6-10 Connecting power cables

Step 6 Push the UIM02C into the slot until its front panel is flush with the front panel of the
monitoring unit, and tighten the screws.
Step 7 Connect the communications cable delivered with the NIM02D from the FE port on the SMU
to the FE CASCADE port on the NIM02D.

Figure 6-11 Connecting a communications cable

----End

6.6 Installing a WiFi Module


Prerequisites
If a WiFi module is required, perform the following steps to install it.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 62


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

Procedure
Step 1 Insert a WiFi module into the USB port of the extension cable.
Step 2 Route the extension cable for the WiFi module and connect one end of the cable to the USB
port of the monitoring module.
Step 3 Secure the other end of the extension cable close to the cable hole at the bottom of the cabinet.

Figure 6-12 Installing a WiFi module

----End

6.7 Installing PSUs


Context

 Do not put your hands into rectifier slots, avoiding electric shocks.
 When a rectifier is running, a high temperature is generated around the air exhaust vent at
the rear. Do not touch the vent or cover the vent with cables or other objects.

Figure 6-13 Phase layout in the module installation space

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 63


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

 Refer to the phase layout when installing PSUs to ensure the balance of phases.
 The SSU and BCU can also be installed in the space for modules.

Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
Step 2 Optional: Remove filler panels from the slots in which modules will be inserted.

Figure 6-14 Removing a filler panel

Step 3 Install a module.


1. Push the locking latch towards the left.
2. Draw the handle downwards.
3. Put a module at the entry of the slot and push it into the slot until it is in good contact
with the backplane.
4. Push the handle upwards and lock it.
5. Push the locking latch towards the right to secure the handle.

Figure 6-15 Installing a module

Each module has a rated output of 50 A. Install modules based on the required capacity.

Step 4 Check whether unused slots are covered with filler panels. If not, install filler panels.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 64


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

To avoid personal injury, install filler panels in vacant subracks.

Figure 6-16 Reinstalling a filler panel

----End

6.8 Installing a PVDU


6.8.1 Installing the PVDU-60A1
If a site requires a PVDU, perform the following steps to install a PVDU.

Procedure
Step 1 Optional: If there is a filler panel on the installation slot, remove it.
1. Remove the screws that secure the filler panel.
2. Remove the filler panel out of the cabinet.

Figure 6-17 Removing a filler panel

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 65


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

Step 2 Install the PVDU.

Figure 6-18 Installing a PVDU

----End

6.8.2 Installing the PVDU-200A1


If a site requires a photovoltaic distribution unit (PVDU), perform the following steps to
install it.

Procedure
Step 1 Optional: If there is a filler panel on the installation slot, remove it.
1. Remove the screws that secure the filler panel.
2. Remove the filler panel out of the cabinet.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 66


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

Figure 6-19 Removing a filler panel

Step 2 If there are no floating nuts on both sides of the rack, install the floating nuts delivered with
the cabinet. For details, see A.4 Installing Floating Nuts.
Step 3 Install a PVDU.

Figure 6-20 Installing a PVDU

Step 4 Install a PVDU ground cable.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 67


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

Figure 6-21 Installing a PVDU ground cable

----End

6.9 Installing an SSU (S4850G1)


Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
Step 2 Optional: Remove filler panels from the slots in which modules will be inserted.

Figure 6-22 Removing a filler panel

Step 3 Install an SSU.


1. Push the locking latch leftwards.
2. Draw the handle downwards.
3. Gently push the SSU into a vacant slot along the guide rails.
4. Push the handle upwards and lock it.
5. Push the locking latch rightwards to secure the handle.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 68


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

 If a PVDU-200A1 is deployed onsite, put the SSU into the PVDU-200A1.


 If no PVDU-200A1 is deployed onsite, put the SSU into the lower slot of the DCDU.

Figure 6-23 Installing an SSU

Each SSU has a rated output of 50 A. Install SSUs based on the required capacity.

Step 4 Check whether unused slots are covered with filler panels. If not, install filler panels.

To avoid personal injury, install filler panels in vacant subracks.

Figure 6-24 Reinstalling a filler panel

----End

6.10 Installing a DG Battery Charger (BC-1206A)


If a BC-1206A is required, perform the following steps to install it.

Procedure
Step 1 Optional: If there is a filler panel on the installation slot, remove it.
1. Remove the screws that secure the filler panel.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 69


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

2. Remove the filler panel out of the cabinet.

Figure 6-25 Removing a filler panel

Step 2 If there are no floating nuts on both sides of the rack, install the floating nuts delivered with
the cabinet. For details, see A.4 Installing Floating Nuts.
Step 3 Push a BC-1206A into the cabinet and install the BC-1206A.

Figure 6-26 Installing a BC-1206A

Step 4 Install the BC-1206A ground cable.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 70


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

Figure 6-27 Installing the BC-1206A ground cable

Step 5 Install the BC-1206A power cables.


1. Connect one end of the negative cable to the -48V port on the BC-1206A, and the other
end to a load output circuit breaker on the DCDU.
2. Connect one end of the positive cable to the RTN+ port on the BC-1206A, and the other
end to the RTN(+) busbar on the DCDU.

Route and bind cables properly to prevent the cables from blocking the air channel.

Figure 6-28 Installing the BC-1206A power cables

Connect the power cable to a circuit breaker of at least 10 A based on site requirements.

----End

6.11 Installing a DG Battery Charger (BCU-1203A)


If a BCU-1203A is required, perform the following steps to install it.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 71


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

Context
The BCU-1203A installation position is for reference.

 If the BC-1206A is not deployed onsite, install the BCU-1203A in a module slot of the DCDU.
 If the BC-1206A is deployed onsite, install the BCU-1203A in the BC-1206A.

Figure 6-29 BCU-1203A installation layout (DCDU)

Figure 6-30 BCU-1203A installation layout (BC-1206A)

Procedure
Step 1 If there is a filler panel in the installation slot, remove the filler panel.

Figure 6-31 Removing a filler panel

Step 2 Install a BCU-1203A.


1. Push the locking latch leftwards.
2. Pull the handle downwards.
3. Put the BCU-1203A at the entry of the slot and push it into the slot until it is in good
contact with the backplane.
4. Push the handle upwards and lock it.
5. Push the locking latch rightwards to secure the handle.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 72


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

Figure 6-32 Installing a BCU-1203A

----End

6.12 Installing an ATS


6.12.1 Installing an ATS (ATS-63A1/ATS-63A2)
If an ATS is required, perform the following steps to install it.

Procedure
Step 1 Optional: If there is a filler panel on the installation slot, remove it.
1. Remove the screws that secure the filler panel.
2. Remove the filler panel out of the cabinet.

Figure 6-33 Removing a filler panel

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 73


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

Step 2 If there are no floating nuts on both sides of the rack, install the floating nuts delivered with
the cabinet. For details, see A.4 Installing Floating Nuts.
Step 3 Install an ATS.

Figure 6-34 Installing an ATS

Step 4 Remove the ATS panel.


Step 5 Connect the ATS ground cable to the nearest ground bolt or ground bar.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 74


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

Figure 6-35 Installing an ATS ground cable

----End

6.12.2 Installing an ATS (ATS-125C1)


If a site requires an ATS, perform the following steps to install it.

Procedure
Step 1 Optional: If there is a filler panel on the installation slot, remove it.
1. Remove the screws that secure the filler panel.
2. Remove the filler panel out of the cabinet.

Figure 6-36 Removing a filler panel

Step 2 If there are no floating nuts on both sides of the rack, install the floating nuts delivered with
the cabinet. For details, see A.4 Installing Floating Nuts.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 75


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

Step 3 Install an ATS.

Figure 6-37 Installing an ATS

Step 4 Remove the ATS panel.


Step 5 Connect the ATS ground cable to the nearest ground bolt or ground bar.

Figure 6-38 Installing an ATS equipotential cable

----End

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 76


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

6.13 Installing an ACDU


6.13.1 Installing an ACDU-63A1/ACDU-63A2
If an ACDU is required, perform the following steps to install it.

Procedure
Step 1 Optional: If there is a filler panel on the installation slot, remove it.
1. Remove the screws that secure the filler panel.
2. Remove the filler panel out of the cabinet.

Figure 6-39 Removing a filler panel

Step 2 If there are no floating nuts on both sides of the rack, install the floating nuts delivered with
the cabinet. For details, see A.4 Installing Floating Nuts.
Step 3 Push the ACDU into the cabinet and install the ACDU.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 77


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

Figure 6-40 Installing an ACDU

Step 4 Loosen the screws on both sides of the ACDU panel using a Phillips screwdriver and remove
the ACDU panel.
Step 5 Secure the ACDU equipotential cable to the nearest ground bolt or ground bar, as shown in
the following figure.

Figure 6-41 Installing an ACDU equipotential cable

Step 6 Install an ACDU alarm signal cable for AC surge protection.


1. Connect one end of the cable to the SPD terminal on the ACDU.
2. Connect the other end to the DIN6 port on the UIM02C.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 78


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

Figure 6-42 Installing an ACDU alarm signal cable for AC surge protection

----End

6.13.2 Installing an ACDU (ACDU-125B1)


If a site requires an ACDU, perform the following steps to install an ACDU.

Procedure
Step 1 Optional: If there is a filler panel on the installation slot, remove it.
1. Remove the screws that secure the filler panel.
2. Remove the filler panel out of the cabinet.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 79


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

Figure 6-43 Removing a filler panel

Step 2 If there are no floating nuts on both sides of the rack, install the floating nuts delivered with
the cabinet. For details, see A.4 Installing Floating Nuts.
Step 3 Install an ACDU.

Figure 6-44 Installing an ACDU

Step 4 Loosen the screws on both sides of the ACDU panel using a Phillips screwdriver, and remove
the ACDU panel.
Step 5 Connect the ACDU ground cable to the nearest ground bolt or ground bar.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 80


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

Figure 6-45 Installing ground cable

Step 6 Install an AC surge protection alarm signal cable for the ACDU.
1. Connect one end of the cable to the SPD signal terminal on the ACDU.
2. Connect the other end to the DIN6 port on the UIM02C.

Figure 6-46 Installing an AC surge protection alarm signal cable for the ACDU

----End

6.14 Installing an AC Monitoring Module (AIM02C)


Prerequisites
 If an AC monitoring module is required, perform the following steps to install it.
 Wear ESD gloves during installation.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 81


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

Procedure
Step 1 Optional: If there is a filler panel on the installation slot, remove it.
1. Remove the screws that secure the filler panel.
2. Remove the filler panel out of the cabinet.

Figure 6-47 Removing a filler panel

Step 2 If there are no floating nuts on both sides of the rack, install the floating nuts delivered with
the cabinet. For details, see A.4 Installing Floating Nuts.
Step 3 Install an AC monitoring module.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 82


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

Figure 6-48 Installing an AC monitoring module

Step 4 Install a ground cable for the AC monitoring module.

Figure 6-49 Installing a ground cable for the AC monitoring module

----End

6.15 Installing a DCDB48160-2


If a DCDB48160-2 is required, perform the following steps to install it.

Procedure
Step 1 Optional: If there is a filler panel on the installation slot, remove it.
1. Remove the screws that secure the filler panel.
2. Remove the filler panel out of the cabinet.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 83


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

Figure 6-50 Removing a filler panel

Step 2 If there are no floating nuts on both sides of the rack, install the floating nuts delivered with
the cabinet. For details, see A.4 Installing Floating Nuts.
Step 3 Paste a cable claw to the right of the DCDB48160-2.

Figure 6-51 Pasting a cable claw

(1) Double-sided tape

Step 4 Install the DCDB48160-2 in a 19-inch rack.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 84


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

Figure 6-52 Installing a DCDB48160-2

Step 5 Install a ground cable for the DCDB48160-2.

Ensure that the ground cable is installed securely. Inappropriate grounding may cause device
damage and personal injury.

Figure 6-53 Installing a ground cable

(1) Cabinet or site ground bar

----End

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 85


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

6.16 Installing a DMU01C1


Prerequisites
 The DMU01C1 delivered onsite is intact after unpacking and acceptance. If any problem
is found, contact your local Huawei office.
 The filler panel in the space for installing the DMU01C1 has been removed.

 To avoid electric shock, do not put your hands into a DMU01C1 slot.
 The DMU01C1 may be hot as a result of continuous operation. Do not touch it or cover it
with cables or other objects.

Context
The DMU01C1 can be installed in a DCDB48160-2 or power subrack. If it is to be installed
in a power subrack, install it in the right side of the subrack.

Procedure
Step 1 Push the locking latch leftwards.
Step 2 Pull out the handle.

Ensure that the anti-plugging connection rod faces downwards and the module handle is
unlocked.

Step 3 Insert the DMU01C1 into the slot and push it along the guide rails until it is in place.
Step 4 Push the handle upwards.
Step 5 Push the locking latch rightwards to lock the handle.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 86


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

Figure 6-54 Installing a DMU01C1

----End

6.17 Installing an Inverter (DJN1000-S)


If a site requires a DJN1000-S, perform the following steps to install it.

Procedure
Step 1 Flip the DJN1000-S power switch to OFF.
Step 2 Optional: If there is a filler panel on the installation slot, remove it.
1. Remove the screws that secure the filler panel.
2. Remove the filler panel out of the cabinet.

Figure 6-55 Removing a filler panel

Step 3 If there are no floating nuts on both sides of the rack, install the floating nuts delivered with
the cabinet. For details, see A.4 Installing Floating Nuts.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 87


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

Step 4 Install mounting ears.

Figure 6-56 Installing mounting ears

Step 5 Install the DJN1000-S.

Figure 6-57 Installing a DJN1000-S

Step 6 Install a ground cable between the DJN1000-S and the cabinet.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 88


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

Figure 6-58 Installing a ground cable between the DJN1000-S and the cabinet

----End

6.18 Installing an ETP24160A3


If a site requires an ETP24160A3, perform the following steps to install it.

Procedure
Step 1 Optional: If there is a filler panel in the installation slot, remove the filler panel.
1. Remove the screws that secure the filler panel.
2. Take the filler panel out of the ICC cabinet.

Figure 6-59 Removing a filler panel

Step 2 If there are no floating nuts on both sides of the rack, install the floating nuts delivered with
the ICC cabinet. For details, see A.4 Installing Floating Nuts.
Step 3 Install an ETP24160A3.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 89


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

Figure 6-60 Installing an ETP24160A3

Step 4 Install a DC-to-DC converter.


1. Push the locking latch leftwards.
2. Draw the handle downwards.
3. Gently insert a DC-to-DC converter into its slot along the guide rails.
4. Push the handle upwards and lock it.
5. Push the locking latch rightwards to secure the handle.

Figure 6-61 Installing a DC-to-DC converter

Step 5 Install power cables for the DC-to-DC converter.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 90


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

Figure 6-62 Installing power cables for the DC-to-DC converter

----End

6.19 Installing a DC Heater


Context
If a DC heater is required, perform the following steps to install it.

Procedure
Step 1 Install the DC heater on the cabinet door.

Figure 6-63 Installing a DC heater

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 91


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

Step 2 Install the DC heater ground cable.

Figure 6-64 Installing the DC heater ground cable

Step 3 Install the DC heater power cable.

Figure 6-65 Installing the DC heater power cable

----End

6.20 Installing a Signal SPD (SPM01A)


If a site requires an SPM01A, perform the following steps to install it.

Procedure
Step 1 Secure the SPM01A to the rack using a cable tie.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 92


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

Figure 6-66 Securing an SPM01A

(1) Cable tie (2) SPM01A

Step 2 Install the SPM01A ground cable.

Figure 6-67 Installing a ground cable

----End

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 93


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

6.21 Installing a Smoke Sensor


If a smoke sensor is required, perform the following steps to install it.

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the screws that secure the smoke sensor to the interior of the cabinet top.
Step 2 Secure the smoke sensor base to the top of the cabinet by using the removed screws.

Ensure that the switch on the smoke sensor base faces the cabinet door.

Step 3 Secure the smoke sensor to the base, as shown in the following figure.

Smoke sensors are available in two appearances, which can be installed in the same way. The actual
product prevails.

Figure 6-68 Securing a smoke sensor

Step 4 Connect one end of the signal cable to the smoke sensor and the other end to the SMOKE port
on the user interface module (UIM).

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 94


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

Figure 6-69 Installing the smoke sensor signal cable

----End

6.22 Installing a Temperature and Humidity Sensor Cable


Procedure
Step 1 Remove the fastener for the temperature and humidity sensor from the left side of the cabinet.
Step 2 Open the cover of the temperature and humidity sensor, and install the sensor on the fastener.
Step 3 Connect the signal cable for the temperature and humidity sensor to the sensor in the correct
sequence.
Step 4 Close the sensor cover.
Step 5 Reinstall the fastener for the temperature and humidity sensor on the rack.

Temperature and humidity sensors are available in two appearances, which can be installed in the same
way. The actual product prevails.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 95


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

Figure 6-70 Securing a Temperature and Humidity sensor

Step 6 Locate the temperature and humidity sensor signal cable in the cabinet.
Step 7 Connect the other end of the temperature and humidity sensor signal cable to the TEM-HUM
port on the UIM02C.

Figure 6-71 Installing the Temperature and Humidity sensor signal cable

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 96


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

----End

6.23 Installing a Water Sensor


Procedure
Step 1 Place a water sensor at the bottom of the cabinet.

Figure 6-72 Installing a water sensor

When installing a water sensor, ensure that the sensor is 5 mm to 10 mm away from the cabinet bottom.

Step 2 Connect the signal cable for the water sensor to the WATER port on the UIM02C panel.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 97


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

Figure 6-73 Installing a signal cable for the water sensor

----End

6.24 Installing an IP Camera


If an IP camera is required, perform the following steps to install it.

 It is recommended that the IP camera be installed at a position about 4 m high.


 The IP camera should face the door or cabinet, and there should be no shield between the
camera and the door or cabinet.

6.24.1 Wall-Mounted Installation


Procedure
Step 1 Insert an SD card into the SD card slot in the IP camera.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 98


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

Figure 6-74 Installing an SD card

(1) SD card (2) SD card slot

Step 2 Paste the mounting sticker to the camera installation position on the wall.

Figure 6-75 Pasting the mounting sticker

Step 3 Drill holes and install expansion sleeves.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 99


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

Figure 6-76 Drilling a hole and installing an expansion sleeve

Step 4 Install the camera onto the wall.

Ensure that the cable hole in the camera base points down, and seal the hole with waterproof
sealant.

Figure 6-77 Installing a camera

Step 5 Loosen the three hexagon socket head cap screws on the bracket, adjust the camera angle, and
tighten the screws.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 100


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

Figure 6-78 Adjusting the camera angle

----End

6.24.2 Pole-Mounted Installation


Procedure
Step 1 Insert an SD card into the SD card slot in the IP camera.

Figure 6-79 Installing an SD card

(1) SD card (2) SD card slot

Step 2 Route the camera cables through the round hole in the middle of the bracket and secure the
camera to the bracket.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 101


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

When installing the camera, choose the screw hole with the silk screen B.

Figure 6-80 Installing the camera onto the bracket

Step 3 Loosen the three clamps and secure the camera to the pole.

Figure 6-81 Installing the camera onto the pole

Step 4 Loosen the three hexagon socket head cap screws on the bracket, adjust the camera angle, and
tighten the screws.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 102


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

Figure 6-82 Adjusting the camera angle

----End

6.24.3 Installing IP Camera Cables


Procedure
Step 1 Cut a corrugated hose to required length, mount it on the camera cables, and route it to the
cable hole at the rear of the camera.

It is recommended that the corrugated hose have a diameter of 15 mm and a length of about 400 mm.

Figure 6-83 Installing a corrugated hose

(1) Corrugated hose

Step 2 Connect the camera ground cable and install it at the ground bar.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 103


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

Figure 6-84 Installing the ground cable

(1) Multi-wire cord end terminal (2) Ground bar

Step 3 Connect the camera communications cable and install it at the FE2 port on the NIM02D.
Step 4 Connect the camera power cable and install it at the 12 V port on the CIM02C.

Figure 6-85 Installing the camera communications and power cables

Step 5 Insulate and waterproof the cables.


1. Wrap the cable joints with insulation tape.

Figure 6-86 Cable insulation

2. Wrap the insulated cables with waterproof tape. Wrap the cables from the insulating
sheath to the protective tube (such as the PVC tube) using the waterproof tape. Ensure
that the wrapping is complete and tight. Wrap idle cable ends with waterproof tape to
prevent seepage.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 104


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 6 Installing Components

Figure 6-87 Cable waterproofing

----End

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 105


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 7 Installing Batteries and Cables

7 Installing Batteries and Cables

7.1 Installing Lithium Batteries and Cables


Prerequisites

 Before installing lithium batteries, ensure that the cabinet anchor bolts are tightened.
 Install lithium batteries on the lower layer and then the upper layer.
 When installing the ESM-4850A1 and ESM-4875A1, you do not need to use auxiliary
supports.

In this example, one lithium battery is installed.

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the lithium battery fuses in the DCDU using a fuse extracting unit.
Step 2 (Optional) Adjust the mounting ears of the lithium battery.

If the space between the front and rear of the battery compartment is insufficient, adjust the mounting
ears before installing the lithium battery.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 106


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 7 Installing Batteries and Cables

Figure 7-1 Adjusting mounting ears

Step 3 (Optional) Assemble the auxiliary support.


1. Take out the auxiliary support and assemble it.

 Keep the side with the wheels upwards when installing the auxiliary support.
 The stop kit should be on the inner side of the auxiliary support.

Figure 7-2 Assembling an auxiliary support

(1) Stop kit

2. Mount the bars of the support on the 19-inch rack, ensure that the mounting is reliable,
and tighten the butterfly nuts on the bars.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 107


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 7 Installing Batteries and Cables

Figure 7-3 Installing the auxiliary support

3. Install the support beam.

Figure 7-4 Installing the beam

4. Move the lithium battery onto the support and push it into the cabinet.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 108


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 7 Installing Batteries and Cables

 An ESM-4850A1 or ESM-4875A1 weighs about 43 kg. An ESM-48100A1 or


ESM-48150A1 weighs about 73 kg. At least two people are required to install it.
 Before pushing the lithium battery into the cabinet, reset the handles on both sides of the
battery to prevent the support bars from being stuck.
 When installing the ESM-4850A1 and ESM-4875A1, you do not need to use auxiliary
supports.

Figure 7-5 Installing a lithium battery (using the ESM-48100A1 as an example)

5. Remove the auxiliary support.

Store the auxiliary support, which will be used when you need to remove the lithium battery.

6. Repeat Step 3.1 to #EN-US_TOPIC_0145803648/02 to install other lithium batteries


from the bottom up.
Step 4 Tighten the screws to secure the lithium battery to the support from the bottom up.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 109


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 7 Installing Batteries and Cables

Figure 7-6 Installing a lithium battery

Step 5 Install the lithium battery ground cable.

Figure 7-7 Installing the lithium battery ground cable (ESC330, using the ESM-48100A1 as an
example)

(1) Cabinet ground bar

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 110


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 7 Installing Batteries and Cables

Figure 7-8 Installing the lithium battery ground cable (ESC720, using the ESM-48100A1 as an
example)

(1) Cabinet ground bar

Step 6 Install the lithium battery power cables.

Install the negative power cables for lithium batteries and then the positive ones.

The rules for installing cascading cables for lithium batteries and copper bars inside the
cabinet are as follows:
 Hybrid use scenario:
− Single lithium battery cabinet: There are two groups of copper bars in a single
battery cabinet. The number of lithium batteries is evenly distributed based on the
copper bars. The copper bars in the battery cabinet need to be cascaded.
− Two lithium battery cabinets: The number of lithium batteries is equally distributed
for two battery cabinets. Copper bars in each battery cabinet need to be cascaded,
and copper bars between battery cabinets need to be cascaded.
 Scenario with lithium batteries only:
− Single lithium battery cabinet: There are two groups of copper bars in a single
battery cabinet. The number of lithium batteries is evenly distributed based on the
copper bars.
− Two lithium battery cabinets: The number of lithium batteries is equally distributed
for two battery cabinets. Copper bars in each battery cabinet need to be cascaded.
The following figure shows the scenario where lithium batteries are fully configured in a
battery cabinet.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 111


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 7 Installing Batteries and Cables

Figure 7-9 Installing power cables (ESC330, using the ESM-4850A1 as an example)

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 112


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 7 Installing Batteries and Cables

Figure 7-10 Installing power cables (ESC330, using the ESM-48100A1 as an example)

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 113


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 7 Installing Batteries and Cables

Figure 7-11 Installing power cables (ESC720, using the ESM-4850A1 as an example)

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 114


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 7 Installing Batteries and Cables

Figure 7-12 Installing power cables (ESC720, using the ESM-48100A1 as an example)

----End

7.2 Installing Lead-Acid Batteries and Cables


7.2.1 Installing Batteries, iBATs, and Cables
Prerequisites
Ensure that batteries are from the same manufacturer, of the same model, and in the same
batch. Do not mix old and new batteries together.
Comply with regulations and warnings of the battery manufacturer.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 115


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 7 Installing Batteries and Cables

Before battery installation, ensure that the battery circuit breaker is OFF or that the battery
fuse is disconnected.
The rated battery string voltage must be 48 V, for example, twenty-four 2 V batteries or four
12 V batteries.

 Smoking and sparks are prohibited near batteries.


 Use tools with insulated handles, otherwise, batteries may be burnt out and personal injury
may occur.
 During battery operations, wear goggles, rubber gloves, and protective clothes. Remove
conductive articles such as watches, bracelets, and rings.
 If battery acid gets in the eyes, rinse with cold water for more than 15 minutes and seek
medical advice immediately. If battery acid contacts skin or clothing, wash with soap and
water immediately.
 Do not use a metal to simultaneously touch two or more battery terminals or
simultaneously touch a battery terminal and a grounded object (such as the battery
compartment). Otherwise, short circuits will occur, causing sparks or explosion.

 Carry batteries by referring to local regulations. To avoid damages, handle with care when
carrying batteries.
 Place batteries in strict accordance with the figure in this chapter. Otherwise, the batteries
may be short-circuited and damaged.
 During battery installation, never reversely connect positive and negative battery terminals.
Connect the negative battery cable first, and then the positive battery cable.
 Before connecting a battery cable, remove the protective lids or protective covers from
battery terminals, and reinstall them after connecting the cable.
 Secure battery cables to the torque specified in this chapter. Loose battery bolt connections
will cause batteries to be burnt.

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the fuses from the DCDU using a fuse extracting unit to avoid large currents.
Step 2 Flip the battery switch to AUTO.
Step 3 Remove the battery baffle plates from the battery cabinet.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 116


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 7 Installing Batteries and Cables

Figure 7-13 Removing battery baffle plates

Step 4 Install batteries and iBATs and paste SN labels from the bottom up.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 117


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 7 Installing Batteries and Cables

Figure 7-14 Installing iBATs and pasting SN labels

Step 5 Install cables for the batteries and iBATs.


1. Remove the protective covers from the negative terminal on battery 1 and the positive
terminal on battery 2.
2. Crimp the negative cables of iBAT 1 and battery 1 as well as the positive cables of iBAT
2 and battery 2 to the battery terminals respectively.
3. Reinstall the protective covers of the battery cables.
4. Repeat Step 5.1 to Step 5.3 to install cables between other batteries.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 118


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 7 Installing Batteries and Cables

Figure 7-15 Installing cables for the batteries and iBATs

One battery string is used as an example.

Step 6 Connect the negative battery string cable to the negative copper bar.
1. Remove the protective cover from the negative terminal on battery 24.
2. Crimp the negative cables of iBAT 24 and battery 24 to the battery terminal.
3. Install a cable between battery 24 and the negative copper bar.
4. Reinstall the protective cover of the negative cable for battery 24.
Step 7 Connect the positive battery string cable to the positive copper bar.
1. Remove the protective cover from the positive terminal on battery 1.
2. Crimp the positive cables of iBAT 1 and battery 1 to the battery terminal.
3. Install a cable between battery 1 and the positive copper bar.
4. Reinstall the protective cover of the positive cable for battery 1.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 119


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 7 Installing Batteries and Cables

Figure 7-16 Installing cables between a battery string and a battery copper bar

Install cables between battery strings and battery copper bars. One battery string is used as an example.

----End

7.2.2 Installing the iBOX and Cables


Procedure
Step 1 Attach the iBOX to the side panel of the battery compartment.

Figure 7-17 Installing the iBOX

Step 2 Install the iBOX communications cable.

 If the iBOX is located in the battery cabinet, install the iBOX at the COM2 port of the NIM01C3 or
CIM02C.
 If the iBOX is located in the ICC cabinet, install the iBOX at the COM1 or COM2 port of the
NIM01C3 or CIM02C.
 The iBOX communications cable is connected to the NIM01C3 in the same way as to the CIM02C.
The NIM01C3 is used as an example.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 120


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 7 Installing Batteries and Cables

 If network ports are insufficient, use a tee connector.

Figure 7-18 Tee connector

Figure 7-19 Installing the iBOX communications cable (communications expansion module)

Step 3 Set the address DIP switch.

If multiple iBOX units are installed, set a unique communications address for each iBOX based on the
following DIP switch settings.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 121


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 7 Installing Batteries and Cables

Figure 7-20 DIP switch

Table 7-1 DIP switch settings

iBOX Toggle Toggle Toggle Toggle iBOX


Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4 Address
(ADDR1) (ADDR2) (ADDR3) (ADDR4)

iBOX 1 1 0 0 0 61
iBOX 2 0 1 0 0 62
iBOX 3 1 1 0 0 63
iBOX 4 0 0 1 0 64
iBOX 5 1 0 1 0 65
iBOX 6 0 1 1 0 66
iBOX 7 1 1 1 0 67
iBOX 8 0 0 0 1 68
iBOX 9 1 0 0 1 69
iBOX 10 0 1 0 1 70
iBOX 11 1 1 0 1 71
iBOX 12 0 0 1 1 72
iBOX 13 1 0 1 1 73
iBOX 14 0 1 1 1 74
iBOX 15 1 1 1 1 75
iBOX 16 0 0 0 0 Invalid

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 122


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 7 Installing Batteries and Cables

iBOX Toggle Toggle Toggle Toggle iBOX


Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4 Address
(ADDR1) (ADDR2) (ADDR3) (ADDR4)
address

----End

7.2.3 Installing a Battery Temperature Sensor


Procedure
Step 1 Locate the battery temperature sensor bound at the bottom of the ICC cabinet.
Step 2 Route the battery temperature sensor through the cable hole and bind it to the battery rack in
the battery cabinet.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 123


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 7 Installing Batteries and Cables

Figure 7-21 Installing a battery temperature sensor (using the ESC710-D2 as an example)

The detection probe must not contact a metal surface.

----End

7.3 Installing Battery Cables Between the Battery Cabinet


and the ICC Cabinet
Prerequisites
If three or more battery cabinets are installed with the ICC cabinet, install the busbar in the
ICC cabinet.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 124


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 7 Installing Batteries and Cables

Figure 7-22 Installing the busbar

Context
The rules for installing battery cables between cabinets are as follows:
 Hybrid use scenario:
− Single battery cabinet: Connect the lithium battery cables and lead-acid battery
cables to the battery cable wiring terminals in the subrack.
− Two battery cabinets: After the copper bars between the lithium battery cabinet and
lead-acid battery cabinet are cascaded respectively, connect the lithium battery
cables and lead-acid battery cables to the battery cable wiring terminals in the
power subrack.
 Scenario with lithium batteries only:
− Single lithium battery cabinet: Connect one end of the two groups of cables to the
two groups of copper bars in the battery cabinet, and connect the other end to the
battery cable wiring terminals in the power subrack.
− Two lithium battery cabinets: Connect the cables of the two lithium battery cabinets
to the battery cable wiring terminals in the subrack.
The following figure shows the scenario with multiple battery cabinets.

Procedure
Step 1 Install battery cables between one or two battery cabinets and the ICC cabinet.
1. Connect the positive power cable from the positive battery copper bar in the battery
cabinet to the RTN+ busbar on the DCDU.
2. Connect the negative power cable from the negative battery copper bar in the battery
cabinet to the fuse on the DCDU.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 125


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 7 Installing Batteries and Cables

Figure 7-23 Installing battery cables between two ESC720 cabinets and the ICC330 (using the
DCDU-400AN5 as an example)

(1) (2) Battery copper bar in one (3) Battery copper bar in the other
DCDU-400AN5 ESC720 ESC720

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 126


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 7 Installing Batteries and Cables

Figure 7-24 Installing battery cables between the ICC330 and two ESC330 cabinets (using the
DCDU-400AN5 as an example)

(1) (2) Battery copper bar in one (3) Battery copper bar in the other
DCDU-400AN5 ESC330 ESC330

Step 2 Install battery cables between more than two battery cabinets and the ICC cabinet.
1. Connect one positive cable from the positive busbar in the ICC cabinet to the RTN+
busbar on the DCDU.
2. Connect the other positive cable from the positive busbar in the ICC cabinet to the
positive battery copper bar in the battery cabinet.
3. Connect one negative cable from the negative busbar in the ICC cabinet to the fuse on
the DCDU.
4. Connect the other negative cable from the negative busbar in the ICC cabinet to the
negative battery copper bar in the battery cabinet.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 127


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 7 Installing Batteries and Cables

Figure 7-25 Installing battery cables between two ESC710 cabinets, the ICC330, and two
ESC330 cabinets (using the DCDU-400AN5 as an example)

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 128


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 7 Installing Batteries and Cables

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 129


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 7 Installing Batteries and Cables

(1) Battery copper bar in (2) Battery copper bar in the (3) DCDU-400AN5
one ESC330 other ESC330
(4) Busbar in the ICC330 (5) Battery copper bar in (6) Battery copper bar in the
one ESC710 other ESC710

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 130


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 7 Installing Batteries and Cables

Figure 7-26 Installing battery cables between the ICC330, two ESC330 cabinets, and four
ESC300-N1 cabinets (using the DCDU-400AN5 as an example)

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 131


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 7 Installing Batteries and Cables

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 132


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 7 Installing Batteries and Cables

(1) Battery copper bar in (2) Battery copper bar in (3) DCDU-400AN5
one ESC330 the other ESC330
(4) Busbar in the ICC330 (5) Battery copper bar in (6) Battery copper bar in the
the first ESC300 second ESC300
(7) Battery copper bar in (8) Battery copper bar in
the third ESC300 the fourth ESC300

Step 3 Cover a PVC corrugated pipe over the cable parts outside the cabinet and secure the PVC
corrugated pipe to the cable hole.
----End

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 133


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

8 Installing Cables

8.1 Installing Dry Contact Signal Cables


If the site ECC500 requires dry contact signal cables, perform the following steps to install
the cables.

Procedure
Step 1 Press the contact plate using a flat-head screwdriver to flip the metal spring inside a dry
contact.
Step 2 Connect a signal cable to the dry contact.
Step 3 Check that the signal cable properly connects to the dry contact. Put aside the screwdriver.

Figure 8-1 Installing a dry contact signal cable

(1) Contact plate (2) Dry contact

----End

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 134


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

8.2 Installing the Communications Cables


8.2.1 IP Networking
Procedure
Step 1 Install a communications cable.
 Scenario 1: without an SPM01A
a. Connect one end of a communications cable to the FE port on the SMU.
b. Connect the other end to the network access device.

Figure 8-2 Installing a communications cable (without an SPM01A)

When the NIM02D is installed, connect the communications cable to an idle FE port on the NIM02D.

Figure 8-3 Installing a communications cable (without an SPM01A)

 Scenario 2: with an SPM01A


a. Locate the communications cable connected to the IN port on the SPM01A.
b. Connect the other end to the network access device.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 135


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

Figure 8-4 Installing a communications cable (with an SPM01A)

When the NIM02D is installed, connect the communications cable to an idle FE port on the NIM02D.

Figure 8-5 Installing a communications cable (with an SPM01A)

Table 8-1 SPM01A signal cable connections

IN Port Silk Screen on Cable Label Cable Color


the SPM01A

1 IN1_TX+ White

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 136


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

IN Port Silk Screen on Cable Label Cable Color


the SPM01A

2 IN2_TX- Orange
3 IN3_RX+ White
4 IN4_RX- Blue

Step 2 Cover a PVC corrugated pipe over the cable parts outside the cabinet and secure the PVC
corrugated pipe to the cable hole.
----End

8.2.2 Wireless Networking


Procedure
Step 1 Unscrew and remove the NIM01C3.
Step 2 Insert a SIM card into the SIM card slot in the NIM01C3.

The SIM card inserted into the 4G communications expansion module (NIM01C3) should support GSM,
WCDMA, and FDD standards or GSM, TD-SCDMA, and TDD standards, and PS (data service)
functions enabled.

Figure 8-6 SIM card slot

(1) SIM card slot

Step 3 Reinstall the NIM01C3.


Step 4 Place the antenna on the cabinet.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 137


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

Figure 8-7 Installing an antenna

Before installing the antenna, remove the plastic shell from the antenna installation base to
ensure magnetic adherence.

Step 5 Connect the antenna to the ANT port on the NIM01C3.

Figure 8-8 Connection between a wireless antenna and an NIM01C3

----End

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 138


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

8.2.3 BBU In-band Networking


Prerequisites
The SMU connects to the baseband unit (BBU) of the base transceiver station (BTS) for
in-band communication. The BTS is required to be later than GBSS12.0 and support in-band
networking.

Procedure
Step 1 Install a communications cable.
 Scenario 1: without an SPM01A
a. Connect one end of a cable to the RS485/RS232 port on the SMU.
b. Connect the other end to the MON1 or MON0 port on the BBU.

Figure 8-9 Installing a communications cable (without an SPM01A)

 Scenario 2: with an SPM01A


a. Connect one end of a cable to the RS485/RS232 port on the SMU.
b. Connect the other end to the OUT port on the SPM01A.
c. Connect one end of a cable to the IN port on the SPM01A.
d. Connect the other end to the MON1 or MON0 port on the BBU.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 139


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

Figure 8-10 Installing a communications cable (with an SPM01A)

Table 8-2 Mapping between cable labels, cable colors, and IN port silk screens

IN Port Silk Screen on Cable Label Cable Color


the SPM01A

1 IN1_T+ White
2 IN2_T- Orange
3 IN3_R+ Blue
4 IN4_R- White

Step 2 Cover a PVC corrugated pipe over the cable parts outside the cabinet and secure the PVC
corrugated pipe to the cable hole.
----End

8.3 Installing CAN Communications Cables

If the ESM is configured, you need to deploy the ESM at the last level of CAN
communication and install a build-out resistor on the ESM at the last level.
If the ESM is not configured and another device is deployed at the last level of CAN
communication, perform operations as follows:

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 140


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

 If the ATS is deployed at the last level, set the CAN DIP switch on the ATS.
 If the DCDB48160-2 is deployed at the last level, retain the build-out resistor for the
DCDB48160-2.

Figure 8-11 Installing CAN communications cables (with ESMs)

(1) Build-out resistor

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 141


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

Figure 8-12 Setting the ATS DIP switch

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 142


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

Figure 8-13 Installing CAN communications cables (without ESMs)

8.4 Installing DG Cables


8.4.1 Installing DG Control Signal Cables
Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of the cables to the J4 port on the GMU interface board.
Step 2 Connect the other end of the cables to the DG1_CTL, RST1, and COM ports on the GIM01C.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 143


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

 For single-DG scenarios, connect the DG startup/shutdown and resetting signal cables to
the DG1_CTL and RST1 ports respectively on the GIM01C. Otherwise, power supply to
the site may be disconnected.
 For dual-DG scenarios, connect the DG 1 startup/shutdown and resetting signal cables to
the DG1_CTL and RST1 ports on the GIM01C, and connect DG 2 startup/shutdown and
resetting signal cables to the DG2_CTL and RST2 ports on the GIM01C.
 For dual-DG scenarios, connect the communications cables for DGs 1 and 2 to the male
connector of the interconnection terminal, and connect the other end from the female
connector to the COM port on the GIM01C.

Figure 8-14 Connecting cables to the interconnection terminal

(1) DG 1 (2) DG 2

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 144


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

Figure 8-15 Installing DG control signal cables

Table 8-3 Cable connections

Cable J4 Port Silk Screen on the GMU Port Silk Screen on the GIM01C
Interface Board
DG DG_COM DG1_CTL M
startup/shut
down signal DG_NC DG1_CTL NC
cable
DG RST_NO RST1_NO
resetting
signal cable RST_COM RST1_M

DG RS+ COM_R+
communicat
ions cable RS- COM_R-

Step 3 Route the part of cables that are outside the cabinet through a PVC corrugated pipe and secure
the pipe to a cable hole on the cabinet.
----End

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 145


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

8.4.2 Installing Control Signal Cables for the Reused DG


Context

 For single-DG scenarios, connect the DG startup/shutdown and resetting signal cables to
the DG1_CTL and RST1 ports on the GIM01C.
 For dual-DG scenarios, connect the DG 1 startup/shutdown and resetting signal cables to
the DG1_CTL and RST1 ports on the GIM01C, and connect the DG 2 signal cables to the
DG2_CTL and RST2 ports on the GIM01C.
 For the DG that starts when the dry contact is closed, connect the DG remote
startup/shutdown signal cables to the NC and M ports. For the DG that starts when the dry
contact is open, connect the signal cables to the NO and M ports.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of the DG start/shutdown and resetting signal cables respectively to the
DG1_CTL and RST1 ports on the GIM01C.
Step 2 Connect the other end by following instructions in the DG manual.

The DG start/shutdown and resetting signal cables must be respectively connected to the
DG1_CTL and RST1 ports on the GIM01C. Otherwise, power supply to the site may be
disconnected.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 146


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

Figure 8-16 Installing control signal cables for the reused DG

(1) DG

Step 3 Route the part of cables that are outside the cabinet through a PVC corrugated pipe and secure
the pipe to a cable hole on the cabinet.
----End

8.4.3 Installing a DG Battery Charging Cable (BCU-1203A)


If a site requires a BCU-1203A, perform the following steps to install it.

Procedure
Step 1 Flip the BCU-1203A power switch to OFF.
Step 2 Install a DC output power cable for the BCU-1203A.
1. Connect the wiring terminal on one end of the cable to the BAT_OUT_A port on the
BCU-1203A.
2. Connect the other end to the J1001 port on the GMU interface board.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 147


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

Figure 8-17 Installing a DC output power cable for the BCU-1203A

----End

8.4.4 Installing a Battery Charging Cable for the Reused DG


(BCU-1203A)
If a site requires a BCU-1203A, perform the following steps to install it.

Procedure
Step 1 Flip the BCU-1203A power switch to OFF.
Step 2 Install a DC output power cable for the BCU-1203A.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 148


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

Figure 8-18 Installing a DC output power cable for the BCU-1203A

(1) DG

----End

8.5 Installing Cables Between the Battery Cabinet and the


ICC Cabinet
8.5.1 Installing Cables for the ESC330-D5
Procedure
Step 1 Install the door status sensor cable.
1. Locate the door status sensor cable bound in the ESC330.
2. Connect the cable to the DIN4 terminal on the UIM02C.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 149


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

 The door status sensor cable should be connected to the reserved DIN port.
 In this example, the door status sensor cable is connected to the DIN4 terminal on the
UIM02C.

Figure 8-19 Installing door status sensor cables (using two ESC330 cabinets as an example)

(1) Door status sensor in one ESC330 (2) Door status sensor in the other ESC330

Step 2 Install the TCUC communications cables for the battery cabinet.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 150


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

Figure 8-20 Installing TCUC communications cables (using two ESC330 cabinets as an example)

(1) UIM02C (2) Tee connector


(3) TCUC in one ESC330 (4) TCUC in the other ESC330

Step 3 Install TCUC power cables for the battery cabinet.


1. Locate the negative TCUC power cable bound to the bottom right of the battery cabinet,
and connect the cable to the negative wiring terminal on the power transfer box for the
temperature control device.
2. Locate the positive TCUC power cable bound to the bottom right of the battery cabinet,
and connect the cable to the positive wiring terminal on the power transfer box for the
temperature control device.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 151


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

Figure 8-21 Installing TCUC power cables (using two ESC330 cabinets as an example)

(1) Power transfer box for the temperature (2) Busbar in one (3) Busbar in the other
control device ESC330 ESC330

----End

8.5.2 Installing Cables for the ESC720-A3


Procedure
Step 1 Install the door status sensor cable.
1. Locate the door status sensor cable bound in the ESC720.
2. Connect the cable to the DIN4 terminal on the UIM02C.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 152


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

 The door status sensor cable should be connected to the reserved DIN port.
 In this example, the door status sensor cable is connected to the DIN4 terminal on the
UIM02C.

Figure 8-22 Installing door status sensor cables (using two ESC720 cabinets as an example)

(1) Door status sensor in one ESC720 (2) Door status sensor in the other ESC720

Step 2 Install the air conditioner communications cables for the battery cabinets.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 153


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

Figure 8-23 Installing air conditioner communications cables (using two ESC720 cabinets as an
example)

(1) Air conditioner in one (2) (3) Air conditioner in the other
ESC720 UIM02C ESC720

Step 3 Install the air conditioner power cable for the battery cabinet.
1. Locate the air conditioner power cable bound in the ESC720. One end of the cable is
connected before delivery.
2. Connect the other end to the power transfer box for the temperature control device.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 154


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

Figure 8-24 Installing air conditioner power cables (using two ESC720 cabinets as an example)

(1) Air conditioner in (2) Power transfer box for the (3) Air conditioner in
one ESC720 temperature control device in the the other ESC720
ICC330

----End

8.5.3 Installing Cables for the ESC330-D5 and ESC710-D2


Procedure
Step 1 Install the door status sensor cable.
1. Locate the door status sensor cable bound in the battery cabinet.
2. Connect the cable to the DIN4 terminal on the UIM02C.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 155


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

 The door status sensor cable should be connected to the reserved DIN port.
 In this example, the door status sensor cable is connected to the DIN4 terminal on the
UIM02C.

Figure 8-25 Installing door status sensor cables (ESC330-D5 + ESC710-D2)

(1) ESC710 door status sensor (2) ESC330 door status sensor

Step 2 Install TCUC communications cables.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 156


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

Figure 8-26 Installing TCUC communications cables

(1) UIM02C (2) Tee connector


(3) TCUC in the ESC330 (4) TCUC in the ESC710

Step 3 Install TCUC power cables for the battery cabinet.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 157


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

Figure 8-27 Installing TCUC power cables

(1) Power transfer box for the temperature (2) TCUC in the (3) Busbar in the
control device in the ICC330 ESC710 ESC330

----End

8.6 Installing a PV Module Antitheft Alarm Cable


Procedure
Step 1 Route the cable through the holes at the rear of PV modules in sequence and bind the cable
with cable ties.
Step 2 Connect the cable to the DIN2 port on the UIM02C.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 158


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

Nine PV modules are used as an example to illustrate the antitheft alarm cable installation.

Figure 8-28 Installing an antitheft alarm cable

----End

8.7 Installing the Electronic Lock Cable


Context

 If the ICC cabinet is configured with an electronic lock, the cable is connected before delivery.
 If the battery cabinet is configured with an electronic lock, connect the lock cable to the COM2 port
on the NIM01C3 or the COM1 or COM2 port on the CIM02C.

Procedure
Step 1 Install the electronic lock cable.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 159


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

Figure 8-29 Installing the electronic lock cable

----End

8.8 Installing ETP24160A3 Cables


Procedure
Step 1 Install DC output power cables for the ETP24160A3.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 160


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

Figure 8-30 Installing DC output power cables for the ETP24160A3

Connect DC load power cables to appropriate circuit breakers based on the load importance and power.
The preceding figure is for reference only.

Step 2 Install input power cables for the ETP24160A3.


1. Connect one end of the negative cable to the NEG(-) port on the ETP24160A3, and the
other end to the load output circuit breaker on the DCDU or DCDB.
2. Connect one end of the positive cable to the RTN(+) port on the ETP24160A3, and the
other end to the RTN(+) busbar on the DCDU or DCDB.

Route and bind cables properly to prevent the cables from blocking the air channel.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 161


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

Figure 8-31 Installing input power cables for the ETP24160A3

Connect DC load power cables to appropriate circuit breakers based on the load importance and power.
The preceding figure is for reference only.

Step 3 Route the cables according to the rules described in 2.6 Requirements for Laying Out Cables,
and bind the cables with cable ties.
Step 4 Fit the cables protruding from the ICC cabinet with a PVC corrugated pipe. Secure the pipe to
the cable outlet.
----End

8.9 Installing Cables for the AC Monitoring Module


Procedure
Step 1 Install a communications cable for the AC monitoring module.

 If the COM port on the UIM02C is idle, connect the AIM02C communications cable to the COM
port on the UIM02C.
 If the COM port on the UIM02C is connected to another device, connect the AIM02C
communications cable to the COM_OUT port on that device.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 162


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

Figure 8-32 Installing a communications cable for the AC monitoring module

Step 2 Connect one end of the DC input power cables for the AC monitoring module to the PWR
port on the AC monitoring module, and connect the other end to the BLVD circuit breaker
and RTN+ busbar on the DCDU.

Figure 8-33 Installing DC input power cables for the AC monitoring module

Connect the power cable to a 16 A circuit breaker based on site requirements.

Step 3 Remove the insulation covers from the AC input and output ports.
Step 4 (Optional) In the single-phase scenario, install the short-circuit copper bars available in the
fitting bag to the AC input and output terminals L1, L2, and L3.
Step 5 Connect the AC input power cables from the AC power distribution box to the input terminal
on the AC monitoring module.
Step 6 Connect the AC output power cables from the output terminal on the AC monitoring module
to the AC input circuit breaker or terminal on the power subrack.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 163


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

Figure 8-34 Installing AC power cables (three-phase)

Figure 8-35 Installing AC input power cables (single-phase AC input)

(1) Short-circuit copper bar

----End

8.10 Installing Inverter Cables (DJN1000-S)


Procedure
Step 1 Install signal cables for the DJN1000-S.
1. Connect one end of the cables to dry contact ports 4 and 6 on the DJN1000-S.
2. Connect the other end to the DIN5 port on the UIM02C.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 164


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

Figure 8-36 Installing signal cables for the DJN1000-S

(1) UIM02C

Step 2 Install an AC output power cable for the DJN1000-S.


1. Connect one end of the cable to the AC OUTPUT port on the DJN1000-S.
2. Connect the other end to an AC load.

Figure 8-37 Installing an AC output power cable for the DJN1000-S

Step 3 Install input power cables for the DJN1000-S.


1. Prepare a cable of suitable length as required and install a cord end terminal or an OT
terminal on both ends of the cable. For details, see A.3 Preparing Terminals.
2. Connect one end of the cable to the DC INPUT port on the DJN1000-S.
3. Connect the blue wire on the other end to a BLVD circuit breaker on the DCDU or
DCDB, and the red wire to the RTN(+) port on the DCDU or DCDB.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 165


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

Route and bind cables properly to prevent the cables from blocking the air channel.

Figure 8-38 Installing input power cables for the DJN1000-S

Connect the power cable to a 32 A circuit breaker based on site requirements.

Step 4 Cover a PVC corrugated pipe over the cable parts outside the cabinet and secure the PVC
corrugated pipe to the cable hole.
----End

8.11 Installing Cables for the DCDB48160-2


8.11.1 Installing DC Output Power Cables
Prerequisites

Before installing power cables, ensure that the upstream input circuit breaker is OFF, and
attach labels such as "No operations allowed."

Procedure
Step 1 Prepare a terminal for DC output power cables.
There are two types of cable terminals: EPC4 and EPC5.
 The EPC4 terminal is suitable for a cable with the maximum size of 4 mm2, and the
cable should be stripped for 8 mm.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 166


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

 The EPC5 terminal is suitable for a cable with the maximum size of 10 mm2, and the
cable should be stripped for 17 mm.

Figure 8-39 Preparing an EPC4 terminal

Figure 8-40 Preparing an EPC5 terminal

Step 2 Route and install DC output power cables.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 167


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

Figure 8-41 Installing DC output power cables

----End

8.11.2 Installing DC Input Power Cables


Prerequisites

Before installing power cables, ensure that the upstream input circuit breaker is OFF, and
attach labels such as "No operations allowed."

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the DC input protection cover from the DCDB.
Step 2 Secure the positive and negative DC input power cables to the DC input terminals.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 168


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

 If the system is connected to one input, the upstream circuit breaker should be 100 A or
higher.
 If the system is connected to two inputs, the upstream circuit breaker should be 80 A or
higher.

Figure 8-42 Installing DC input power cables

Step 3 Reinstall the DC input protection cover for the DCDB.


----End

8.12 Installing DC Output Power Cables for the DCDU


Prerequisites

Switch off all circuit breakers before installing power cables.

Procedure
Step 1 Prepare a suitable length cable based on site requirements. Install a cord end terminal or an
OT terminal on each end of the cable. For details, see A.3 Preparing Terminals.
Step 2 Secure the negative DC output power cable to the corresponding DC output circuit breaker
based on the actual load power.
Step 3 Secure the positive DC output power cable to the corresponding screw on the RTN+ busbar.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 169


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

Figure 8-43 Installing DC output power cables (DCDU-400AN5)

(1) Minor load 2 (2) Minor load 1

Connect DC power cables to the circuit breaker that controls minor load 1 or 2 based on site
requirements. The preceding figure is for reference only.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 170


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

Figure 8-44 Installing DC output power cables (DCDU-400AS4)

(1) Primary load (2) Secondary load

Connect DC power cables to the circuit breakers for controlling primary or secondary loads based on
site requirements. The preceding figure is for reference only.

Step 4 Cover a PVC corrugated pipe over the cable parts outside the cabinet and secure the PVC
corrugated pipe to the cable hole.
----End

8.13 Installing PV Module DC Input Power Cables


8.13.1 Installing PV Module DC Input Power Cables
(PVDU-60A1)
Prerequisites

Switch off all circuit breakers before installing power cables.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 171


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

Procedure
Step 1 Install DC power cables between SJBs and the PVDU-60A1, as shown in the following
figure.
1. Prepare a suitable length cable based on site requirements. Install a cord end terminal or
an OT terminal on each end of the cable. For details, see A.3 Preparing Terminals.
2. Secure the negative DC input power cable to the bolt on the PVDU.
3. Secure the positive DC input power cable to the circuit breaker on the PVDU.
4. Secure the other end to the output terminals on the SJB.

Figure 8-45 Installing PVDU power cables (PVDU-60A1)

A PVDU supports the access from a maximum of four SJBs. Install cables based on the actual number of
configured SJBs.

Step 2 Install power cables between the SSU and the PVDU, as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect the blue output power cables from the PVDU to the PV– port.
2. Connect the black output power cables from the PVDU to the PV+ port.

Figure 8-46 Installing SSU power cables

The PVDU supports a maximum of four outputs. Install output cables based on site requirements.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 172


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

Step 3 Cover a PVC corrugated pipe over the cable parts outside the cabinet and secure the PVC
corrugated pipe to the cable hole.
----End

8.13.2 Installing PV Module DC Input Power Cables


(PVDU-200A1)
Prerequisites

Switch off all circuit breakers before installing power cables.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect DC input power cables between the SJB and the PVDU-200A1.
1. Prepare a cable of suitable length as required and install a cord end terminal or an OT
terminal on both ends of the cable. For details, see A.3 Preparing Terminals.
2. Secure one end of the positive DC input power cable to the screw on the PVDU.
3. Secure one end of the negative DC input power cable to the circuit breaker on the
PVDU.
4. Secure the other end of the DC input power cables to the output terminals in the SJB.

Figure 8-47 Installing PVDU power cables (PVDU-200A1)

A PVDU can connect to a maximum of four SJBs. Install cables based on the actual number of SJBs.

Step 2 Install cables between the PVDU and the DCDU.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 173


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

Figure 8-48 Installing cables between the PVDU and the DCDU-400AN5

Figure 8-49 Installing cables between the PVDU and the DCDU-400AS4

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 174


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

Step 3 Connect power cables between the SSU and the PVDU.
1. Connect the blue output power cable from the PVDU to the PV– port on the SSU.
2. Connect the black output power cable from the PVDU to the PV+ port on the SSU.

Figure 8-50 Installing SSU power cables

Step 4 Cover a PVC corrugated pipe over the cable parts outside the cabinet and secure the PVC
corrugated pipe to the cable hole.
----End

8.14 Installing AC Input Power Cables


8.14.1 Installing AC Input Power Cables for the DCDU
Prerequisites

 Ensure that the upstream AC input circuit breaker is OFF, and attach labels such as "No
operations allowed."
 Switch off all circuit breakers before installing power cables.

Context
 For the colors and appearances of power cables, site cables prevail.
 Consult Huawei engineers if any of the following conditions occurs:
− You need to use the cables and connectors that you have prepared.
− You need to cut short a power cable.

Procedure
Step 1 Prepare a suitable length cable based on site requirements. Install a cord end terminal or an
OT terminal on each end of the cable. For details, see A.3 Preparing Terminals.
Step 2 Install AC input power cables for the DCDU.
 Three-phase four-wire AC input

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 175


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

Figure 8-51 Installing AC input power cables for the DCDU (DCDU-400AN5)

(1) DG

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 176


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

Figure 8-52 Installing AC input power cables for the DCDU (DCDU-400AS4)

(1) DG

 Dual-live-wire or single-phase AC input

 If dual-live-wire or single-phase AC input is used, insert a short-circuit copper bar to the AC input
terminals of the DCDU.
 After installing AC input power cables, install the cover for the short-circuit copper bar.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 177


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

Figure 8-53 Installing AC input power cables (DCDU-400AN5)

(1) DG (2) Short-circuit copper bar

Figure 8-54 Installing AC input power cables (DCDU-400AS4)

(1) DG (2) Short-circuit copper bar

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 178


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

Step 3 Cover a PVC corrugated pipe over the cable parts outside the cabinet and secure the PVC
corrugated pipe to the cable hole.
----End

8.14.2 Installing AC Input Power Cables


(ACDU-63A1/ACDU-63A2)
Prerequisites

Switch off all AC upstream circuit breakers before installing AC input power cables.

Context
 The cabinet is delivered with boards, and internal power cables have been factory
installed. External power cables need to be installed onsite.
 For the colors and appearances of power cables, site cables prevail.
 Consult Huawei engineers if any of the following conditions occurs:
− You need to use the cables and connectors that you have prepared.
− You need to cut short a power cable.

Procedure
Step 1 Prepare AC input power cables.
1. Prepare suitable-length cables based on site requirements.
2. Install a cord end terminal or an OT terminal on each end of the cables. For details, see
A.3 Preparing Terminals
Step 2 Install cables between the ACDU and the DCDU.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 179


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

Figure 8-55 Installing cables between the ACDU and the DCDU-400AN5

Figure 8-56 Installing cables between the ACDU and the DCDU-400AS4

Step 3 Install AC input power cables for the ACDU.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 180


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

Figure 8-57 Installing AC input power cables for the ACDU

----End

8.14.3 Installing AC Input Power Cables (ACDU-125B1)


Prerequisites

 Ensure that the upstream AC input circuit breaker is OFF, and attach labels such as "No
operations allowed."
 Switch off all circuit breakers before installing power cables.

Context
 For the colors and appearances of power cables, site cables prevail.
 Consult Huawei engineers if any of the following conditions occurs:
− You need to use the cables and connectors that you have prepared.
− You need to cut short a power cable.

Procedure
Step 1 Prepare a suitable length cable based on site requirements. Install a cord end terminal or an
OT terminal on each end of the cable. For details, see A.3 Preparing Terminals.
Step 2 Insert a short-circuit copper bar into the AC input terminals of the DCDU.
Step 3 Adjust the labels on the DCDU AC input terminals based on the AC input system.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 181


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

Figure 8-58 Adjusting the labels on the DCDU AC input terminals based on the AC input system

Step 4 Install cables between the ACDU and the DCDU.

Figure 8-59 Installing cables between the ACDU and the DCDU-400AN5

(1) Short-circuit copper bar

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 182


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

Figure 8-60 Installing cables between the ACDU and the DCDU-400AS4

(1) Short-circuit copper bar

Step 5 Install AC input power cables.


 Dual-live-wire AC input

Figure 8-61 Installing AC input power cables

(1) Mains (2) Short-circuit clip

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 183


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

 Single-phase AC input

Figure 8-62 Installing AC input power cables

(1) Mains (2) Short-circuit clip

Step 6 Install the cover for the short-circuit copper bar.


Step 7 Route the cables according to the rules described in 2.6 Requirements for Laying Out Cables,
and bind the cables with cable ties.
Step 8 Fit the cables protruding from the cabinet with a PVC corrugated pipe. Secure the pipe to the
cable outlet.
----End

8.14.4 Installing AC Input Power Cables (ATS-63A1/ATS-63A2)


Prerequisites

 Ensure that the upstream AC input circuit breaker is OFF, and attach labels such as "No
operations allowed."
 Switch off all circuit breakers before installing power cables.

Context
 For the colors and appearances of power cables, site cables prevail.
 Consult Huawei engineers if any of the following conditions occurs:
− You need to use the cables and connectors that you have prepared.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 184


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

− You need to cut short a power cable.

Procedure
Step 1 Prepare a suitable length cable based on site requirements. Install a cord end terminal or an
OT terminal on each end of the cable. For details, see A.3 Preparing Terminals.
Step 2 Install cables between the ATS and the DCDU.

Figure 8-63 Installing cables between the ATS and the DCDU-400AN5

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 185


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

Figure 8-64 Installing cables between the ATS and the DCDU-400AS4

Step 3 Install AC input power cables for the ATS.

Figure 8-65 Installing AC input power cables for the ATS (dual DGs)

(1) DG 2 (2) DG 1

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 186


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

If mains input is available, connect the mains AC power cables to the MAINS input circuit
breaker and terminal on the ATS.

Figure 8-66 Installing AC input power cables for the ATS (mains + DG)

(1) Mains (2) DG

Step 4 Cover a PVC corrugated pipe over the cable parts outside the cabinet and secure the PVC
corrugated pipe to the cable hole.
----End

8.14.5 Installing AC Input Power Cables (ATS-125C1)


Prerequisites

 Ensure that the upstream AC input circuit breaker is OFF, and attach labels such as "No
operations allowed."
 Switch off all circuit breakers before installing power cables.

Context
 For the colors and appearances of power cables, site cables prevail.
 Consult Huawei engineers if any of the following conditions occurs:
− You need to use the cables and connectors that you have prepared.
− You need to cut short a power cable.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 187


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

Procedure
Step 1 Prepare a suitable length cable based on site requirements. Install a cord end terminal or an
OT terminal on each end of the cable. For details, see A.3 Preparing Terminals.
Step 2 Insert a short-circuit copper bar into the AC input terminals of the DCDU.
Step 3 Adjust the labels on the DCDU AC input terminals based on the AC input system.

Figure 8-67 Adjusting the labels on the DCDU AC input terminals based on the AC input system

Step 4 Install cables between the ATS and the DCDU.

Figure 8-68 Installing cables between the ATS and the DCDU-400AN5

(1) Short-circuit copper bar

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 188


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

Figure 8-69 Installing cables between the ATS and the DCDU-400AS4

(1) Short-circuit copper bar

Step 5 Install AC input power cables for the ATS.

Figure 8-70 Installing AC input power cables for the ATS (dual DGs)

(1) DG 2 (2) DG 1

If mains input is available, connect the mains AC power cables to the MAINS input circuit
breaker and terminal on the ATS.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 189


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 8 Installing Cables

Figure 8-71 Installing AC input power cables for the ATS (mains + DG)

(1) Mains (2) DG

Step 6 Install the cover for the short-circuit copper bar.


Step 7 Route the cables according to the rules described in 2.6 Requirements for Laying Out Cables,
and bind the cables with cable ties.
Step 8 Cover a PVC corrugated pipe over the cable parts outside the cabinet and secure the PVC
corrugated pipe to the cable hole.
----End

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 190


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 9 Installation Verification

9 Installation Verification

After installing the cabinet and all equipment, check the installation items, installation
environment, and cables.

Checking the Cabinet Installation

Table 9-1 Cabinet installation checklist

No. Check That Result

1 The cabinet is placed in accordance with the design □ Yes □ No


drawing.
2 The base is secured. □ Yes □ No
3 All bolts, especially the bolts used for electrical □ Yes □ No
connections, are fully tightened. Flat washers and spring
washers are all installed in correct sequence.
4 The cabinet is clean, free of dust and dirt. □ Yes □ No
5 All labels are correct, clear, and complete. □ Yes □ No

Checking the Environment

Table 9-2 Environment checklist

No. Check That Result

1 There are no unnecessary adhesive tape or cable ties on □ Yes □ No


cables.
2 There are no adhesive tapes, cable ties, paper scraps, or □ Yes □ No
packing materials around the cabinet.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 191


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 9 Installation Verification

Checking Electrical Connections

Table 9-3 Electrical connection checklist

No. Check That Result


1 All the ground cables prepared onsite contain copper core □ Yes □ No
wires and have correct diameters. No switches or fuses are
installed on the cables and no short-circuit occurs.
2 Ground cables, AC input power cables, and internal cables □ Yes □ No
are connected in accordance with the circuit diagram and
screws are fully tightened. No short-circuit occurs on power
inputs or outputs.
3 Power cables and ground cables are not coiled and extra □ Yes □ No
parts are cut off.
4 Connectors for power cables and ground cables are □ Yes □ No
soldered or crimped securely.
5 Bare cables and terminal handles are completely wrapped □ Yes □ No
with heat-shrink tubings.
6 Flat washers and spring washers are securely installed for □ Yes □ No
all OT terminals, and all OT terminals are intact and
properly connected.

Cable Checklist

Table 9-4 Cable checklist

No. Check That Result


1 All cable joints are secured properly, especially signal □ Yes □ No
cables and the cables to the bottom of the cabinet.
2 Cables are bound neatly, and cable ties are secured evenly □ Yes □ No
and properly in the same direction.
3 Power cables, protection cables, and signal cables are □ Yes □ No
bound separately.
4 Cables are routed in a way convenient for maintenance and □ Yes □ No
capacity expansion.
5 The cable tie tails on indoor cables are cut smoothly from □ Yes □ No
the root, and the cable tie tails on outdoor cables are cut
with a margin of 3 mm to 5 mm.
6 Unused ports are protected. □ Yes □ No

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 192


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

10 Power-on and Commissioning

10.1 Grid Hybrid Power Supply Solution (Lithium


Battery)
10.1.1 Preparing for Power-On
Prerequisites
Required tools including a fuse extracting unit, clamp meter, and insulation gloves are
available.

Procedure
Step 1 Reinstall battery fuses in the DCDU using a fuse extracting unit.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 193


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-1 Positions of battery fuses

(1) Battery fuses

----End

10.1.2 Connecting the Mains Supply


Prerequisites

Perform power-on commissioning only when the mains power is normal. If the mains power
is unavailable, use a mobile DG to supply AC power.

Procedure
Step 1 Check that the AC input circuit breaker on the ACDU is OFF, and turn on the upstream mains
AC switch for the ACDU.
Step 2 Check that the AC input phase voltage ranges from 85 V AC to 300 V AC using a clamp
meter.
Step 3 Switch the AC input circuit breaker on the ACDU to ON.
Step 4 Check that the busbar voltage ranges from 44.5 V DC to 57.6 V DC using a clamp meter.
----End

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 194


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

10.1.3 Connecting the Battery Supply (Lithium Battery)


Context
After AC power is switched on, the lithium battery supply is automatically connected.

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the RUN indicator on each lithium battery is steady on.
 If the RUN indicator is steady on, communication is proper.
 If the RUN indicator blinks fast, the ESM fails to communicate with the host.
 If the RUN indicator is off, check and correct the ESM cable connections. Use a
multimeter to measure the voltage at the + and – output ports of the ESM. Ensure that
the voltage is positive and in the range of 43.2 V DC to 56.4 V DC. Replace the ESM if
the cable connections are correct, the battery port voltage is in the range of 43.2 V DC to
56.4 V DC, but the indicator is still off.

When the ESM fails to communicate with the host:


1. Check whether the ESM communications cable is properly connected.
2. Check whether the ESM terminal build-out resistor is properly connected.
3. If both are proper, replace the ESM.

----End

10.1.4 Setting Parameters (Lithium Battery)


Context
After the SMU is powered on for the first time and the system automatically identifies lithium
batteries, the SMU automatically restarts.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the parameters based on the following table.

Table 10-1 Parameter settings

Item Setting

Language English
Enter Password 000001

Step 2 After Setup Wizard Init is displayed on the LCD, set the following parameters.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 195


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-2 Parameter settings

Item Setting
Time Zone Set to the local time zone.
Date and Time Set to the local date and time.
Batter Factory AGISSON
Battery Model ESM-A
The SMU may restart. Yes

Step 3 When the SMU is running properly, set the language, date, and time in the following menu
paths.

Table 10-3 Setting the language, date, and time

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters Settings Local Parameters Language - Select a desired
language.
Date and Time Time Zone Set to the local time
zone.
Date and Time Set to the local date
and time.

Step 4 Set sensor parameters.

Table 10-4 Setting sensor parameters

Main Menu Second-Level Third- Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Level Menu Value
Menu
Parameters Setup Parameter Sensor Water Sensor - Set as
Settings Config required.
Smoke Sensor - Set as
required.
Ambient Temp. - Set as
Sensor required.
Ambient Humi. - Set as
Sensor required.

Step 5 Set the dry contact alarm for the battery cabinet door status sensor.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 196


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

This step is required only if a door status sensor is installed for the battery cabinet.

Table 10-5 Setting the dry contact alarm for the battery cabinet door status sensor

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Alarm Parameters DI Dry Contact DIN4 Alm. Close Open
Settings Para. Cond.

Step 6 Set the dry contact alarm for the inverter.

Table 10-6 Setting the dry contact alarm for the inverter

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Alarm Parameters DI Dry Contact DIN5 Alm. Close Open
Settings Para. Cond.

Step 7 Set the dry contact alarm for the ACDU.

Table 10-7 Setting the dry contact alarm for the ACDU

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Alarm Parameters DI Dry Contact DIN6 Alm. Close Open
Settings Para. Cond.

Step 8 Set the address DIP switch of AIM to 000.

Set the address DIP switch of AIM to 000 if an AC meter is configured.

Figure 10-2 Setting the address DIP switch of AIM

Step 9 Set AIM parameters.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 197


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Set the parameters in this step only if an AC meter is configured.

Table 10-8 Setting AIM parameters

Main Menu Second-Level Menu Third-Level Menu Setting


Parameters settings AIM1 AC Source Mains

Step 10 Set the mains AC parameter.

Table 10-9 Setting the mains AC parameter

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu

Parameters Settings Mains AC Model 3 Phase 4 Line Set as required.

Step 11 Set the number of DGs.

Table 10-10 Setting the number of DGs

Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Setup Basic Parameters DG Number - 0
Settings Parameter

Step 12 Change the Wifi account password on the LCD.

Table 10-11 Changing Wifi account password

Main Menu Second-Level Menu Third-Level Menu Default Value Setting


Parameters Wifi settings Wifi SSID HUAWEI_SITE Change the account
settings password as required.
Wifi Password Changeme

Step 13 Set communications parameters.


 Setting communications parameters for IP networking
a. Set the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address on the LCD.

Table 10-12 IP parameters

Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Comm. Network IP Address 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter based

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 198


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Menu Value
Settings Parameters Parameters on the address assigned
by the network
administrator.
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Set this parameter based
on the address assigned
by the network
administrator.
Default 192.168.0.1 Set this parameter based
Gateway on the address assigned
by the network
administrator.
NOTE
If a WiFi module is
installed on the SMU, the
default gateway cannot be
set to 192.168.0.1;
otherwise, it will conflict
with the WiFi gateway.

b. Set IP addresses and port numbers for the active and standby NetEco servers on the
LCD.

Table 10-13 NetEco parameters

Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Comm. Network NetEco Primary 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to
Settings Parameters Parameters IP the IP address of the
active NetEco server.
NetEco Backup 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to
IP the IP address of the
standby NetEco
server.
NetEco Port 31220 Set a port number for
Number the NetEco.

 Set wireless communications parameters.


a. Check whether the default wireless communications parameters on the LCD are
consistent with the communication configurations of the carrier network that the
SIM card belongs to. If they are inconsistent, modify the parameters according to
the actual configurations of the carrier network.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 199


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-14 Checking wireless communications parameters

Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Comm. Mobile Data Carrier Operator Automatic Automatic, Others
Settings Parameters
SIMn Acc Point - A maximum of 28
Name characters, including
NOTE lowercase English letters
This parameter is
(a to z), uppercase English
displayed only letters (A to Z), digits (0
when Carrier to 9), and special
Operator is set to characters (@_#*-.).
Others.

SIMn Access -
Point No
NOTE
This parameter is
displayed only
when Carrier
Operator is set to
Others.

SIMn User Name -


NOTE
This parameter is
displayed only
when Carrier
Operator is set to
Others.

SIMn User - A maximum of 27


Password characters, including
NOTE
lowercase English letters
This parameter is
(a to z), uppercase English
displayed only letters (A to Z), digits (0
when Carrier to 9), and special
Operator is set to characters (@_#-.).
Others.
It is recommended that the
password contain at least
two types of characters
and the length exceed six
characters.

b. Set IP addresses and port numbers for the active and standby NetEco servers on the
LCD.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 200


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-15 NetEco parameters

Main Menu Second- Third- Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Level Level Menu
Menu Menu
Parameters Comm. Network NetEco Primary 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the
Settings Parameters Parameters IP IP address of the active
NetEco server
NetEco Backup 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the
IP IP address of the standby
NetEco server.
NetEco Port 31220 Set a port number for the
Number NetEco.

 Set BBU in-band networking parameters.


a. Set BBU in-band networking parameters.

Table 10-16 BBU in-band networking parameters

Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Fifth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu Menu Menu
Parameters Comm. Serial Port Northbound Port Mode Manual
Settings Parameters
Protocol Type M/S Protocol
M/S Protocol Baud Rate - 9600
Comm. Address - 3

b. Set IP addresses and port numbers for the active and standby NetEco servers on the
LCD.

Table 10-17 NetEco parameters

Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Comm. Network NetEco Primary 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter
Settings Parameters Parameters IP to the IP address of
the active NetEco
server.
NetEco Backup 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter
IP to the IP address of
the standby NetEco
server.
NetEco Port 31220 Set a port number
Number for the NetEco.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 201


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

----End

10.1.5 Connecting the Load Supply


Procedure
Step 1 Switch on all load circuit breakers one by one. During the process, measure the busbar voltage
using a clamp meter after switching on each circuit breaker. Then continue to switch on
another circuit breaker after ensuring that the busbar voltage is between 44.5 V DC and 57.6
V DC.
----End

10.2 Grid Hybrid Power Supply Solution (Lithium Battery


+ Lead-Acid Battery)
10.2.1 Connecting the Battery Supply (Lead-Acid Battery)
Prerequisites
Required tools including a fuse extracting unit, clamp meter, and insulation gloves are
available.

Procedure
Step 1 Check as follows before connecting the battery supply.
1. Flip the battery switch on the DCDU to AUTO.
2. Switch the load circuit breaker on the DCDU to OFF.
Step 2 Check that the battery string voltage is in the range of 43.2 V DC to 56.4 V DC using a clamp
meter.
Step 3 Connect the battery supply.
1. Reinstall battery fuse 2 in the DCDU using a fuse extracting unit.

Before reinstalling a fuse, switch the AC input circuit breaker on the ACDU to OFF.
Otherwise, the fuse will produce sparks during operation.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 202


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-3 Position of battery fuse 2

(1) Battery fuse 2

2. Flip the DCDU battery switch to MANUAL.


Step 4 Check that the busbar voltage is in the range of 43.2 V DC to 56.4 V DC using a clamp meter.
----End

10.2.2 Setting Parameters (Lithium Battery + Lead-Acid Battery)


Procedure
Step 1 Set the parameters based on the following table.

Table 10-18 Parameter settings

Item Setting
Language English
Enter Password 000001

Step 2 After Setup Wizard Init is displayed on the LCD, set the following parameters.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 203


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-19 Parameter settings

Item Setting
Time Zone Set to the local time zone.
Date and Time Set to the local date and time.
Batter Factory AGISSON
Battery Model FCB-A
NOTE
Set the battery model for lead-acid batteries.
There is no need to set this parameter for lithium
batteries.

The SMU may restart. Yes

Step 3 After the SMU restarts, set parameters according to the following table.

Table 10-20 Parameter settings

Item Setting

Language English
Enter Password 000001
Battery 1 Connected No
Battery 2 Connected Yes
Single-String Cap. Rated capacity of the batteries in a battery
string.
NOTE
 This parameter indicates the rated capacity of
lead-acid batteries.
 The batteries controlled by one circuit
breaker or fuse are called a battery string.

Step 4 When the SMU is running properly, set the language, date, and time in the following menu
paths.

Table 10-21 Setting the language, date, and time

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Parameters Settings Local Parameters Language - Select a desired language.


Date and Time Time Zone Set to the local time zone.
Date and Time Set to the local date and
time.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 204


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Step 5 Set hybrid scenario parameters.

Table 10-22 Setting hybrid scenario parameters

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Settin


Menu Menu Menu Value g
Parameters Setup Parameter Basic Parameters Hybrid Scenario No Yes
Settings

Step 6 Set iMix Enable to Enable.

Table 10-23 Setting the iMix Enable

Main Menu Second- Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Level Menu Menu Menu
Parameters Power Basic iMix Enable Disable Enable
Settings System Parameters

Step 7 Set the lithium battery connection mode.

Table 10-24 Setting the lithium battery connection mode

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters Li Battery Basic Parameters Battery 1 Connected Yes
Settings NOTE Battery 2 Connected No
This parameter is
displayed only when Priority Charger Disable, Enable
Battery Model is set
to ESM-A. Discharger Mode Auto, Constant Volt
Dischg
Cycle Mode Li-Ion and Acid Cycle:
Lithium batteries and
lead-acid batteries
switch between each
other to discharge based
on the configured
discharge capacity.
NOTE
This parameter is
displayed when
Discharger Mode is set
to Constant Volt Dischg.
When Discharger Mode
is set to Auto, both
lithium batteries and
lead-acid batteries
discharge.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 205


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Li-Ion Primary:
Lithium batteries
discharge preferentially.
When lithium batteries
discharge to the
configured depth of
discharge (DOD), they
switch to lead-acid
batteries for discharge.
NOTE
This parameter is
displayed when
Discharger Mode is set
to Constant Volt Dischg.
When Discharger Mode
is set to Auto, both
lithium batteries and
lead-acid batteries
discharge.

Li-Ion Standby:
Lead-acid batteries
discharge preferentially.
When lead-acid
batteries discharge to
the configured DOD,
they switch to lithium
batteries for discharge.
Cycle Factor Set based on site
NOTE
requirements.
This parameter is
displayed when
Cycle Mode is set to
Li-Ion and Acid
Cycle.

Step 8 Set lead-acid battery parameters.

Table 10-25 Setting lead-acid battery parameters

Main Menu Second- Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


Level Menu Menu
Menu
Parameters Acid Battery Basic Battery Cable Set based on site requirements.
Settings Parameters Length NOTE
 When each battery string is connected to the
Batt Cable CS
RTN+ busbar over one cable, set Cable
Area Length to half of the total length of cables
between both ends of a battery string and the
positive and negative busbars, and set Cable

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 206


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second- Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


Level Menu Menu
Menu
CSA to the cross-sectional area of the cable.
 When each battery string is connected to the
RTN+ busbar over two cables, set Cable
Length to half of the total length of a suite of
cables between both ends of a battery string
and the positive and negative busbars, and set
Cable CSA to the sum of the cross-sectional
areas of the two cables.

Step 9 Set sensor parameters.

Table 10-26 Setting sensor parameters

Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Menu Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Setup Sensor Config Water Sensor - Set as required.
Settings Parameter
Smoke Sensor - Set as required.
Ambient Temp. - Set as required.
Sensor
Ambient Humi. - Set as required.
Sensor
Batt. Temp. Sensor 1 - Set as required.

Step 10 Set the dry contact alarm for the battery cabinet door status sensor.

This step is required only if a door status sensor is installed for the battery cabinet.

Table 10-27 Setting the dry contact alarm for the battery cabinet door status sensor

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Alarm Parameters DI Dry Contact DIN4 Alm. Close Open
Settings Para. Cond.

Step 11 Set the dry contact alarm for the inverter.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 207


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-28 Setting the dry contact alarm for the inverter

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Alarm Parameters DI Dry Contact DIN5 Alm. Close Open
Settings Para. Cond.

Step 12 Set the dry contact alarm for the ACDU.

Table 10-29 Setting the dry contact alarm for the ACDU

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Alarm Parameters DI Dry Contact DIN6 Alm. Close Open
Settings Para. Cond.

Step 13 Set the address DIP switch of AIM to 000.

Set the address DIP switch of AIM to 000 if an AC meter is configured.

Figure 10-4 Setting the address DIP switch of AIM

Step 14 Set AIM parameters.

Set the parameters in this step only if an AC meter is configured.

Table 10-30 Setting AIM parameters

Main Menu Second-Level Menu Third-Level Menu Setting


Parameters settings AIM1 AC Source Mains

Step 15 Set the mains AC parameter.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 208


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-31 Setting the mains AC parameter

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu

Parameters Settings Mains AC Model 3 Phase 4 Line Set as required.

Step 16 Change the Wifi account password on the LCD.

Table 10-32 Changing Wifi account password

Main Menu Second-Level Menu Third-Level Menu Default Value Setting


Parameters Wifi settings Wifi SSID HUAWEI_SITE Change the account
settings password as required.
Wifi Password Changeme

Step 17 Set the number of DGs.

Table 10-33 Setting the number of DGs


Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting
Menu Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Setup Basic Parameters DG Number - 0
Settings Parameter

Step 18 Set communications parameters.


 Setting communications parameters for IP networking
a. Set the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address on the LCD.

Table 10-34 IP parameters

Main Second- Third- Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Level Level Menu
Menu Menu
Parameters Comm. Network IP Address 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter based on
Settings Parameters Parameters the address assigned by the
network administrator.
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Set this parameter based on
the address assigned by the
network administrator.
Default Gateway 192.168.0.1 Set this parameter based on
the address assigned by the
network administrator.
NOTE
If a WiFi module is installed on

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 209


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Second- Third- Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Level Level Menu
Menu Menu
the SMU, the default gateway
cannot be set to 192.168.0.1;
otherwise, it will conflict with
the WiFi gateway.

b. Set IP addresses and port numbers for the active and standby NetEco servers on the
LCD.

Table 10-35 NetEco parameters

Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Comm. Network NetEco Primary 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to
Settings Parameters Parameters IP the IP address of the
active NetEco server.
NetEco Backup 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to
IP the IP address of the
standby NetEco
server.
NetEco Port 31220 Set a port number for
Number the NetEco.

 Set wireless communications parameters.


a. Check whether the default wireless communications parameters on the LCD are
consistent with the communication configurations of the carrier network that the
SIM card belongs to. If they are inconsistent, modify the parameters according to
the actual configurations of the carrier network.

Table 10-36 Checking wireless communications parameters


Main Second- Third-Level Fourth- Default Setting
Menu Level Menu Menu Level Menu Value
Parameters Comm. Mobile Data Carrier Operator Automatic Automatic, Others
Settings Parameters
SIMn Acc Point - A maximum of 28
Name characters, including
NOTE lowercase English letters (a
This parameter is
to z), uppercase English
displayed only letters (A to Z), digits (0 to
when Carrier 9), and special characters
Operator is set to (@_#*-.).
Others.

SIMn Access -
Point No

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 210


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Second- Third-Level Fourth- Default Setting


Menu Level Menu Menu Level Menu Value
NOTE
This parameter is
displayed only
when Carrier
Operator is set to
Others.

SIMn User Name -


NOTE
This parameter is
displayed only
when Carrier
Operator is set to
Others.

SIMn User - A maximum of 27


Password characters, including
NOTE lowercase English letters (a
This parameter is
to z), uppercase English
displayed only letters (A to Z), digits (0 to
when Carrier 9), and special characters
Operator is set to (@_#-.).
Others.
It is recommended that the
password contain at least
two types of characters and
the length exceed six
characters.

b. Set IP addresses and port numbers for the active and standby NetEco servers on the
LCD.

Table 10-37 NetEco parameters

Main Menu Second- Third- Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Level Level Menu
Menu Menu
Parameters Comm. Network NetEco Primary 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the
Settings Parameters Parameters IP IP address of the active
NetEco server
NetEco Backup 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the
IP IP address of the standby
NetEco server.
NetEco Port 31220 Set a port number for the
Number NetEco.

 Set BBU in-band networking parameters.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 211


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-38 BBU in-band networking parameters

Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Fifth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu Menu Menu
Parameters Comm. Serial Port Northbound Port Mode Manual
Settings Parameters
Protocol Type M/S Protocol
M/S Protocol Baud Rate - 9600
Comm. Address - 3

----End

10.2.3 Connecting the Mains Supply


Prerequisites

Perform power-on commissioning only when the mains power is normal. If the mains power
is unavailable, use a mobile DG to supply AC power.

Procedure
Step 1 Check that the AC input circuit breaker on the ACDU is OFF, and turn on the upstream mains
AC switch for the ACDU.
Step 2 Check that the AC input phase voltage ranges from 85 V AC to 300 V AC using a clamp
meter.
Step 3 Switch the AC input circuit breaker on the ACDU to ON.
Step 4 Check that the busbar voltage ranges from 44.5 V DC to 57.6 V DC using a clamp meter.
----End

10.2.4 Connecting the Battery Supply (Lithium Battery)


Prerequisites
Required tools including a fuse extracting unit, clamp meter, and insulation gloves are
available.

Procedure
Step 1 Reinstall battery fuse 1 in the DCDU using a fuse extracting unit.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 212


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-5 Position of battery fuse 1

(1) Battery fuse 1

Step 2 Check whether the RUN indicator on the lithium battery is steady on.
 If the RUN indicator is steady on, communication is normal.
 If the RUN indicator blinks fast, the lithium battery fails to communicate with the host.
 If the RUN indicator is off, check and correct the battery cable connections. Use a
multimeter to measure the voltage at the + and – output ports of the lithium battery.
Ensure that the voltage is positive and in the range of 43.2 V DC to 56.4 V DC. Replace
the lithium battery if the cable connections are correct, the battery port voltage is in the
range of 43.2 V DC to 56.4 V DC, but the indicator is still off.

If the lithium battery fails to communicate with the host:


1. Check whether the battery communications cable is properly connected.
2. Check whether the terminal build-out resistor of the battery is properly connected.
3. If both are normal, replace the battery.

----End

10.2.5 Connecting the Load Supply


Procedure
Step 1 Switch on all load circuit breakers one by one. During the process, measure the busbar voltage
using a clamp meter after switching on each circuit breaker. Then continue to switch on
another circuit breaker after ensuring that the busbar voltage is between 44.5 V DC and 57.6
V DC.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 213


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

----End

10.3 Grid + Backup DG Hybrid Power Supply Solution


(Lithium Battery)
10.3.1 Preparing for Power-On
Prerequisites
Required tools including a fuse extracting unit, clamp meter, and insulation gloves are
available.

Procedure
Step 1 Reinstall battery fuses in the DCDU using a fuse extracting unit.

Figure 10-6 Positions of battery fuses

(1) Battery fuses

----End

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 214


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

10.3.2 Connecting the Mains Supply


Procedure
Step 1 Check that the mains AC input circuit breaker on the ATS is OFF, and turn on the upstream
mains AC switch for the ATS.
Step 2 Check that the input voltage of the mains AC input circuit breaker on the ATS ranges from 85
V AC to 300 V AC.
Step 3 Switch the mains AC input circuit breaker on the ATS to ON.
----End

10.3.3 Connecting the Battery Supply (Lithium Battery)


Context
After AC power is switched on, the lithium battery supply is automatically connected.

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the RUN indicator on each lithium battery is steady on.
 If the RUN indicator is steady on, communication is proper.
 If the RUN indicator blinks fast, the ESM fails to communicate with the host.
 If the RUN indicator is off, check and correct the ESM cable connections. Use a
multimeter to measure the voltage at the + and – output ports of the ESM. Ensure that
the voltage is positive and in the range of 43.2 V DC to 56.4 V DC. Replace the ESM if
the cable connections are correct, the battery port voltage is in the range of 43.2 V DC to
56.4 V DC, but the indicator is still off.

When the ESM fails to communicate with the host:


1. Check whether the ESM communications cable is properly connected.
2. Check whether the ESM terminal build-out resistor is properly connected.
3. If both are proper, replace the ESM.

----End

10.3.4 Setting Parameters


Context
After the SMU is powered on for the first time and the system automatically identifies lithium
batteries, the SMU automatically restarts.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the parameters based on the following table.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 215


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-39 Parameter settings

Item Setting
Language English
Enter Password 000001

Step 2 After Setup Wizard Init is displayed on the LCD, set the following parameters.

Table 10-40 Parameter settings

Item Setting

Time Zone Set to the local time zone.


Date and Time Set to the local date and time.
Batter Factory AGISSON
Battery Model ESM-A
The SMU may restart. Yes

Step 3 When the SMU is running properly, set the language, date, and time in the following menu
paths.

Table 10-41 Setting the language, date, and time

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Parameters Settings Local Parameters Language - Select a desired


language.
Date and Time Time Zone Set to the local time
zone.
Date and Time Set to the local date
and time.

Step 4 Set sensor parameters.

Table 10-42 Setting sensor parameters

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Setup Parameter Sensor Config Water Sensor - Set as
Settings required.
Smoke Sensor - Set as
required.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 216


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Ambient Temp. - Set as
Sensor required.
Ambient Humi. - Set as
Sensor required.

Step 5 Set the dry contact alarm for the battery cabinet door status sensor.

This step is required only if a door status sensor is installed for the battery cabinet.

Table 10-43 Setting the dry contact alarm for the battery cabinet door status sensor

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Alarm Parameters DI Dry Contact DIN4 Alm. Close Open
Settings Para. Cond.

Step 6 Set the dry contact alarm for the inverter.

Table 10-44 Setting the dry contact alarm for the inverter

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value

Parameters Alarm Parameters DI Dry Contact DIN5 Alm. Close Open


Settings Para. Cond.

Step 7 Set the dry contact alarm for the ACDU.

Table 10-45 Setting the dry contact alarm for the ACDU
Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting
Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Alarm Parameters DI Dry Contact DIN6 Alm. Close Open
Settings Para. Cond.

Step 8 Change the Wifi account password on the LCD.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 217


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-46 Changing Wifi account password

Main Menu Second-Level Menu Third-Level Menu Default Value Setting


Parameters Wifi settings Wifi SSID HUAWEI_SITE Change the account
settings password as required.
Wifi Password Changeme

Step 9 Set the mains AC parameter.

Table 10-47 Setting the mains AC parameter

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu

Parameters Settings Mains AC Model 3 Phase 4 Line Set as required.

Step 10 Set the ATS working scenario.

Table 10-48 Setting the ATS working scenario

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu

Parameters Settings ATS 1 Work Scenario Mains+DG Mains+DG

Step 11 Set the number of DGs and DG scheduling mode.

Table 10-49 Setting the number of DGs and DG scheduling mode


Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting
Menu Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Setup Parameter Basic Parameters DG Number 0 1
Settings
EPS-D EPS-D Group D.G. Schedule Cycle Mode Tradition Mode
Mode

Step 12 Set parameters for the reused DG.

Table 10-50 Setting parameters for the reused DG

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value

Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW Set based on site


Settings Power requirements.
Max Power 80.0% Set based on site
Ratio requirements.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 218


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value

Over Volt Prot 120.0% Set based on site


requirements.
Under Volt Prot 80.0% Set based on site
requirements.
Batt Undervolt 10.0 V Set based on site
Thro requirements.
Routine Maint 9999 h Set based on site
requirements.
Timed Maint Per 500 h Set based on site
requirements.

Step 13 Set communications parameters.


 Setting communications parameters for IP networking
a. Set the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address on the LCD.

Table 10-51 IP parameters

Main Second- Third- Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Level Level Menu
Menu Menu
Parameters Comm. Network IP Address 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter based on
Settings Parameters Parameters the address assigned by the
network administrator.
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Set this parameter based on
the address assigned by the
network administrator.
Default Gateway 192.168.0.1 Set this parameter based on
the address assigned by the
network administrator.
NOTE
If a WiFi module is installed on
the SMU, the default gateway
cannot be set to 192.168.0.1;
otherwise, it will conflict with
the WiFi gateway.

b. Set IP addresses and port numbers for the active and standby NetEco servers on the
LCD.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 219


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-52 NetEco parameters

Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Comm. Network NetEco Primary 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to
Settings Parameters Parameters IP the IP address of the
active NetEco server.
NetEco Backup 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to
IP the IP address of the
standby NetEco
server.
NetEco Port 31220 Set a port number for
Number the NetEco.

 Set wireless communications parameters.


a. Check whether the default wireless communications parameters on the LCD are
consistent with the communication configurations of the carrier network that the
SIM card belongs to. If they are inconsistent, modify the parameters according to
the actual configurations of the carrier network.

Table 10-53 Checking wireless communications parameters

Main Second- Third-Level Fourth- Default Value Setting


Menu Level Menu Menu Level
Menu
Parameters Comm. Mobile Data Carrier Automatic Automatic, Others
Settings Parameters Operator
SIMn Acc - A maximum of 28
Point Name characters, including
NOTE lowercase English letters (a
This
to z), uppercase English
parameter is letters (A to Z), digits (0 to
displayed 9), and special characters
only when (@_#*-.).
Carrier
Operator is
set to
Others.

SIMn -
Access
Point No
NOTE
This
parameter is
displayed
only when
Carrier
Operator is
set to
Others.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 220


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Second- Third-Level Fourth- Default Value Setting


Menu Level Menu Menu Level
Menu
SIMn User -
Name
NOTE
This
parameter is
displayed
only when
Carrier
Operator is
set to
Others.

SIMn User - A maximum of 27


Password characters, including
NOTE lowercase English letters (a
This
to z), uppercase English
parameter is letters (A to Z), digits (0 to
displayed 9), and special characters
only when (@_#-.).
Carrier
Operator is It is recommended that the
set to password contain at least
Others. two types of characters and
the length exceed six
characters.

b. Set IP addresses and port numbers for the active and standby NetEco servers on the
LCD.

Table 10-54 NetEco parameters

Main Menu Second- Third- Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Level Level Menu
Menu Menu
Parameters Comm. Network NetEco Primary 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the
Settings Parameters Parameters IP IP address of the active
NetEco server
NetEco Backup 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the
IP IP address of the standby
NetEco server.
NetEco Port 31220 Set a port number for the
Number NetEco.

 Set BBU in-band networking parameters.


a. Set BBU in-band networking parameters.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 221


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-55 BBU in-band networking parameters

Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Fifth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu Menu Menu
Parameters Comm. Serial Port Northbound Port Mode Manual
Settings Parameters
Protocol Type M/S Protocol
M/S Protocol Baud Rate - 9600
Comm. Address - 3

b. Set IP addresses and port numbers for the active and standby NetEco servers on the
LCD.

Table 10-56 NetEco parameters

Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Comm. Network NetEco Primary 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter
Settings Parameters Parameters IP to the IP address of
the active NetEco
server.
NetEco Backup 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter
IP to the IP address of
the standby NetEco
server.
NetEco Port 31220 Set a port number
Number for the NetEco.

----End

10.3.5 Connecting the DG Supply


Prerequisites

Never allow sparks, flames, and inflammable objects to be close to a DG because this may
cause fire or explosions.

Check according to the following table before powering on and commissioning the DG:

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 222


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-57 Checking before power-on

Item Expected Result


Appearance  No engine oil leaks.
 No fuel leaks.
 No coolant leaks.
 No component is damaged or lost.
 No fastener is loose, lost, or damaged.
 No component is cracked, worn out, or damaged, and no connector is
damaged or corroded.
 The EMERGENCY STOP button is in the self-lock state, and the load
circuit breaker is in a proper position.
 No hose is cracked, worn out, damaged, or stuck.
 No water or impurities exist in the fuel filter. Remove water and
impurities if there is any.
Fuel, engine Levels of fuel, engine oil, and engine coolant are within the normal range.
oil, and
coolant
Battery The battery voltage is greater than 12 V DC.
voltage

Procedure
Step 1 Check that all DG switches and circuit breakers are OFF.
Step 2 Flip the power switch on the DG battery charger to ON.
Step 3 Manually start the DG by referring to the DG manual.
Step 4 Check that the AC output voltage of the DG ranges from 207 V AC to 253 V AC by using a
clamp meter.
Step 5 If the DG works properly, switch the DG AC output circuit breaker to ON.
Step 6 Switch the DG input circuit breaker on the ATS to ON.
Step 7 Check that the Run indicators on rectifiers are steady on.
Step 8 Check that the voltage between the –48 V busbar and the RTN(+) busbar ranges from –43.2 V
DC to –56.4 V DC.
----End

10.3.6 Starting a DG Self-Check


Context
 There is no battery alarm on the Monitoring, and battery power supply is normal.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 223


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

 If the mains power is used, ensure that the mains AC input circuit breaker on the ATS is
OFF.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the DG to work in automatic mode.
Step 2 Start a DG self-check.

Table 10-58 Starting a DG self-check

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Running Control EPS-D DG Self Check Confirm Self Check Yes

The auto check process is as follows:


1. About 2 minutes after starting DG 1, the Monitoring checks the DG running status to determine
whether the DG has started.
2. About 2 minutes after shutting down DG 1, the Monitoring checks the DG running status to
determine whether the DG has shut down.
After the auto check is complete, the SMU displays the results on the screen:
 Control DG Number (0/1)
 DG 1 Start Result (Success/Fail)
 DG 1 Stop Result (Success/Fail)
A single-DG self-check takes about 4 minutes

Step 3 Verify that the self-check result is consistent with the actual number of DGs and the DGs
work properly. If the DG self-check fails, refer to the DG manual for troubleshooting and DG
cable connection checking.
----End

10.3.7 Connecting the Load Supply


Procedure
Step 1 Switch on all load circuit breakers one by one. During the process, measure the busbar voltage
using a clamp meter after switching on each circuit breaker. Then continue to switch on
another circuit breaker after ensuring that the busbar voltage is between 44.5 V DC and 57.6
V DC.
----End

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 224


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

10.4 Grid + Backup DG Hybrid Power Supply Solution


(Lithium Battery + Lead-Acid Battery)
10.4.1 Connecting the Battery Supply (Lead-Acid Battery)
Prerequisites
Required tools including a fuse extracting unit, clamp meter, and insulation gloves are
available.

Procedure
Step 1 Check as follows before connecting the battery supply.
1. Flip the battery switch on the DCDU to AUTO.
2. Switch the load circuit breaker on the DCDU to OFF.
Step 2 Check that the battery string voltage is in the range of 43.2 V DC to 56.4 V DC using a clamp
meter.
Step 3 Connect the battery supply.
1. Reinstall battery fuse 2 in the DCDU using a fuse extracting unit.

Before reinstalling a fuse, switch the AC input circuit breaker on the ACDU to OFF.
Otherwise, the fuse will produce sparks during operation.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 225


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-7 Position of battery fuse 2

(1) Battery fuse 2

2. Flip the DCDU battery switch to MANUAL.


Step 4 Check that the busbar voltage is in the range of 43.2 V DC to 56.4 V DC using a clamp meter.
----End

10.4.2 Setting Parameters (Lithium Battery + Lead-Acid Battery)


Procedure
Step 1 Set the parameters based on the following table.

Table 10-59 Parameter settings

Item Setting
Language English
Enter Password 000001

Step 2 After Setup Wizard Init is displayed on the LCD, set the following parameters.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 226


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-60 Parameter settings

Item Setting
Time Zone Set to the local time zone.
Date and Time Set to the local date and time.
Batter Factory AGISSON
Battery Model FCB-A
NOTE
Set the battery model for lead-acid batteries.
There is no need to set this parameter for lithium
batteries.

The SMU may restart. Yes

Step 3 After the SMU restarts, set parameters according to the following table.

Table 10-61 Parameter settings

Item Setting

Language English
Enter Password 000001
Battery 1 Connected No
Battery 2 Connected Yes
Single-String Cap. Rated capacity of the batteries in a battery
string.
NOTE
 This parameter indicates the rated capacity of
lead-acid batteries.
 The batteries controlled by one circuit
breaker or fuse are called a battery string.

Step 4 When the SMU is running properly, set the language, date, and time in the following menu
paths.

Table 10-62 Setting the language, date, and time

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Parameters Settings Local Parameters Language - Select a desired


language.
Date and Time Time Zone Set to the local time
zone.
Date and Time Set to the local date

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 227


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu
and time.

Step 5 Set hybrid scenario parameters.

Table 10-63 Setting hybrid scenario parameters

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Settin


Menu Menu Menu Value g
Parameters Setup Parameter Basic Parameters Hybrid Scenario No Yes
Settings

Step 6 Set iMix Enable to Enable.

Table 10-64 Setting the iMix Enable

Main Menu Second-Lev Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


el Menu Menu Menu
Parameters Power Basic iMix Enable Disable Enable
Settings System Parameters

Step 7 Set the lithium battery connection mode.

Table 10-65 Setting the lithium battery connection mode

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters Li Battery Basic Parameters Battery 1 Connected Yes
Settings NOTE Battery 2 Connected No
This parameter is
displayed only when Priority Charger Disable, Enable
Battery Model is set
to ESM-A. Discharger Mode Auto, Constant Volt
Dischg
Cycle Mode Li-Ion and Acid Cycle:
Lithium batteries and
lead-acid batteries
switch between each
other to discharge based
on the configured
discharge capacity.
NOTE
This parameter is
displayed when

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 228


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Discharger Mode is set
to Constant Volt Dischg.
When Discharger Mode
is set to Auto, both
lithium batteries and
lead-acid batteries
discharge.

Li-Ion Primary:
Lithium batteries
discharge preferentially.
When lithium batteries
discharge to the
configured depth of
discharge (DOD), they
switch to lead-acid
batteries for discharge.
NOTE
This parameter is
displayed when
Discharger Mode is set
to Constant Volt Dischg.
When Discharger Mode
is set to Auto, both
lithium batteries and
lead-acid batteries
discharge.

Li-Ion Standby:
Lead-acid batteries
discharge preferentially.
When lead-acid
batteries discharge to
the configured DOD,
they switch to lithium
batteries for discharge.
Cycle Factor Set based on site
NOTE requirements.
This parameter is
displayed when
Cycle Mode is set to
Li-Ion and Acid
Cycle.

Step 8 Set lead-acid battery parameters.

Table 10-66 Setting lead-acid battery parameters

Main Menu Second-Lev Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


el Menu Menu Menu
Parameters Acid Battery Basic Battery Cable Set based on site requirements.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 229


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Lev Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


el Menu Menu Menu
Settings Parameters Length NOTE
 When each battery string is connected to the
Batt Cable CS RTN+ busbar over one cable, set Cable
Area Length to half of the total length of cables
between both ends of a battery string and the
positive and negative busbars, and set Cable
CSA to the cross-sectional area of the cable.
 When each battery string is connected to the
RTN+ busbar over two cables, set Cable
Length to half of the total length of a suite of
cables between both ends of a battery string
and the positive and negative busbars, and set
Cable CSA to the sum of the cross-sectional
areas of the two cables.

Step 9 Set sensor parameters.

Table 10-67 Setting sensor parameters

Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Menu Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Setup Sensor Config Water Sensor - Set as required.
Settings Parameter
Smoke Sensor - Set as required.
Ambient Temp. - Set as required.
Sensor
Ambient Humi. - Set as required.
Sensor
Batt. Temp. Sensor 1 - Set as required.

Step 10 Set the dry contact alarm for the battery cabinet door status sensor.

This step is required only if a door status sensor is installed for the battery cabinet.

Table 10-68 Setting the dry contact alarm for the battery cabinet door status sensor

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Alarm Parameters DI Dry Contact DIN4 Alm. Close Open
Settings Para. Cond.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 230


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Step 11 Set the dry contact alarm for the inverter.

Table 10-69 Setting the dry contact alarm for the inverter

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Alarm Parameters DI Dry Contact DIN5 Alm. Close Open
Settings Para. Cond.

Step 12 Set the dry contact alarm for the ACDU.

Table 10-70 Setting the dry contact alarm for the ACDU

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Alarm Parameters DI Dry Contact DIN6 Alm. Close Open
Settings Para. Cond.

Step 13 Set the address DIP switch of AIM to 000.

Set the address DIP switch of AIM to 000 if an AC meter is configured.

Figure 10-8 Setting the address DIP switch of AIM

Step 14 Set AIM parameters.

Set the parameters in this step only if an AC meter is configured.

Table 10-71 Setting AIM parameters

Main Menu Second-Level Menu Third-Level Menu Setting


Parameters settings AIM1 AC Source Mains

Step 15 Set the mains AC parameter.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 231


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-72 Setting the mains AC parameter

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu

Parameters Settings Mains AC Model 3 Phase 4 Line Set as required.

Step 16 Change the Wifi account password on the LCD.

Table 10-73 Changing Wifi account password

Main Menu Second-Level Menu Third-Level Menu Default Value Setting


Parameters Wifi settings Wifi SSID HUAWEI_SITE Change the account
settings password as required.
Wifi Password Changeme

Step 17 Set the ATS working scenario.

Table 10-74 Setting the ATS working scenario

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu

Parameters Settings ATS 1 Work Scenario Mains+DG Mains+DG

Step 18 Set the number of DGs and DG scheduling mode.

Table 10-75 Setting the number of DGs and DG scheduling mode


Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting
Menu Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Setup Parameter Basic Parameters DG Number 0 1
Settings
EPS-D EPS-D Group D.G. Schedule Cycle Mode Tradition Mode
Mode

Step 19 Set parameters for the reused DG.

Table 10-76 Setting parameters for the reused DG

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value

Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW Set based on site


Settings Power requirements.
Max Power 80.0% Set based on site
Ratio requirements.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 232


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value

Over Volt Prot 120.0% Set based on site


requirements.
Under Volt Prot 80.0% Set based on site
requirements.
Batt Undervolt 10.0 V Set based on site
Thro requirements.
Routine Maint 9999 h Set based on site
requirements.
Timed Maint Per 500 h Set based on site
requirements.

Step 20 Set communications parameters.


 Setting communications parameters for IP networking
a. Set the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address on the LCD.

Table 10-77 IP parameters

Main Second-L Third-Le Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu evel vel Menu Menu
Menu
Parameters Comm. Network IP Address 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter based on
Settings Parameters Parameters the address assigned by the
network administrator.
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Set this parameter based on
the address assigned by the
network administrator.
Default Gateway 192.168.0.1 Set this parameter based on
the address assigned by the
network administrator.
NOTE
If a WiFi module is installed on
the SMU, the default gateway
cannot be set to 192.168.0.1;
otherwise, it will conflict with
the WiFi gateway.

b. Set IP addresses and port numbers for the active and standby NetEco servers on the
LCD.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 233


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-78 NetEco parameters

Main Second- Third-Le Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Level vel Menu Value
Menu Menu
Parameters Comm. Network NetEco Primary 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the IP
Settings Parameter Parameter IP address of the active NetEco
s s server.
NetEco Backup IP 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the IP
address of the standby NetEco
server.
NetEco Port 31220 Set a port number for the
Number NetEco.

 Set wireless communications parameters.


a. Check whether the default wireless communications parameters on the LCD are
consistent with the communication configurations of the carrier network that the
SIM card belongs to. If they are inconsistent, modify the parameters according to
the actual configurations of the carrier network.

Table 10-79 Checking wireless communications parameters

Main Second-Lev Third-Level Fourth-Lev Default Value Setting


Menu el Menu Menu el Menu
Parameters Comm. Mobile Data Carrier Automatic Automatic, Others
Settings Parameters Operator
SIMn Acc - A maximum of 28
Point Name characters, including
NOTE lowercase English letters (a
This
to z), uppercase English
parameter is letters (A to Z), digits (0 to
displayed 9), and special characters
only when (@_#*-.).
Carrier
Operator is
set to
Others.

SIMn -
Access
Point No
NOTE
This
parameter is
displayed
only when
Carrier
Operator is
set to
Others.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 234


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Second-Lev Third-Level Fourth-Lev Default Value Setting


Menu el Menu Menu el Menu
SIMn User -
Name
NOTE
This
parameter is
displayed
only when
Carrier
Operator is
set to
Others.

SIMn User - A maximum of 27


Password characters, including
NOTE lowercase English letters (a
This
to z), uppercase English
parameter is letters (A to Z), digits (0 to
displayed 9), and special characters
only when (@_#-.).
Carrier
Operator is It is recommended that the
set to password contain at least
Others. two types of characters and
the length exceed six
characters.

b. Set IP addresses and port numbers for the active and standby NetEco servers on the
LCD.

Table 10-80 NetEco parameters

Main Menu Second-Le Third-Leve Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


vel Menu l Menu Menu
Parameters Comm. Network NetEco Primary 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the
Settings Parameters Parameters IP IP address of the active
NetEco server
NetEco Backup 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the
IP IP address of the standby
NetEco server.
NetEco Port 31220 Set a port number for the
Number NetEco.

 Set BBU in-band networking parameters.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 235


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-81 BBU in-band networking parameters

Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Fifth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu Menu Menu
Parameters Comm. Serial Port Northbound Port Mode Manual
Settings Parameters
Protocol Type M/S Protocol
M/S Protocol Baud Rate - 9600
Comm. Address - 3

----End

10.4.3 Connecting the Mains Supply


Procedure
Step 1 Check that the mains AC input circuit breaker on the ATS is OFF, and turn on the upstream
mains AC switch for the ATS.
Step 2 Check that the input voltage of the mains AC input circuit breaker on the ATS ranges from 85
V AC to 300 V AC.
Step 3 Switch the mains AC input circuit breaker on the ATS to ON.
----End

10.4.4 Connecting the DG Supply


Prerequisites

Never allow sparks, flames, and inflammable objects to be close to a DG because this may
cause fire or explosions.

Check according to the following table before powering on and commissioning the DG:

Table 10-82 Checking before power-on

Item Expected Result

Appearance  No engine oil leaks.


 No fuel leaks.
 No coolant leaks.
 No component is damaged or lost.
 No fastener is loose, lost, or damaged.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 236


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Item Expected Result


 No component is cracked, worn out, or damaged, and no connector is
damaged or corroded.
 The EMERGENCY STOP button is in the self-lock state, and the load
circuit breaker is in a proper position.
 No hose is cracked, worn out, damaged, or stuck.
 No water or impurities exist in the fuel filter. Remove water and
impurities if there is any.
Fuel, engine Levels of fuel, engine oil, and engine coolant are within the normal range.
oil, and
coolant
Battery The battery voltage is greater than 12 V DC.
voltage

Procedure
Step 1 Check that all DG switches and circuit breakers are OFF.
Step 2 Flip the power switch on the DG battery charger to ON.
Step 3 Manually start the DG by referring to the DG manual.
Step 4 Check that the AC output voltage of the DG ranges from 207 V AC to 253 V AC by using a
clamp meter.
Step 5 If the DG works properly, switch the DG AC output circuit breaker to ON.
Step 6 Switch the DG input circuit breaker on the ATS to ON.
Step 7 Check that the Run indicators on rectifiers are steady on.
Step 8 Check that the voltage between the –48 V busbar and the RTN(+) busbar ranges from –43.2 V
DC to –56.4 V DC.
----End

10.4.5 Starting a DG Self-Check


Context
 There is no battery alarm on the Monitoring, and battery power supply is normal.
 If the mains power is used, ensure that the mains AC input circuit breaker on the ATS is
OFF.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the DG to work in automatic mode.
Step 2 Start a DG self-check.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 237


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-83 Starting a DG self-check

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Running Control EPS-D DG Self Check Confirm Self Check Yes

The auto check process is as follows:


1. About 2 minutes after starting DG 1, the Monitoring checks the DG running status to determine
whether the DG has started.
2. About 2 minutes after shutting down DG 1, the Monitoring checks the DG running status to
determine whether the DG has shut down.
After the auto check is complete, the SMU displays the results on the screen:
 Control DG Number (0/1)
 DG 1 Start Result (Success/Fail)
 DG 1 Stop Result (Success/Fail)
A single-DG self-check takes about 4 minutes

Step 3 Verify that the self-check result is consistent with the actual number of DGs and the DGs
work properly. If the DG self-check fails, refer to the DG manual for troubleshooting and DG
cable connection checking.
----End

10.4.6 Connecting the Battery Supply (Lithium Battery)


Prerequisites
Required tools including a fuse extracting unit, clamp meter, and insulation gloves are
available.

Procedure
Step 1 Reinstall battery fuse 1 in the DCDU using a fuse extracting unit.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 238


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-9 Position of battery fuse 1

(1) Battery fuse 1

Step 2 Check whether the RUN indicator on the lithium battery is steady on.
 If the RUN indicator is steady on, communication is normal.
 If the RUN indicator blinks fast, the lithium battery fails to communicate with the host.
 If the RUN indicator is off, check and correct the battery cable connections. Use a
multimeter to measure the voltage at the + and – output ports of the lithium battery.
Ensure that the voltage is positive and in the range of 43.2 V DC to 56.4 V DC. Replace
the lithium battery if the cable connections are correct, the battery port voltage is in the
range of 43.2 V DC to 56.4 V DC, but the indicator is still off.

If the lithium battery fails to communicate with the host:


1. Check whether the battery communications cable is properly connected.
2. Check whether the terminal build-out resistor of the battery is properly connected.
3. If both are normal, replace the battery.

----End

10.4.7 Connecting the Load Supply


Procedure
Step 1 Switch on all load circuit breakers one by one. During the process, measure the busbar voltage
using a clamp meter after switching on each circuit breaker. Then continue to switch on
another circuit breaker after ensuring that the busbar voltage is between 44.5 V DC and 57.6
V DC.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 239


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

----End

10.5 Solar Hybrid Power Supply Solution


10.5.1 Connecting the Battery Supply (Lead-Acid Battery)
Prerequisites
Required tools including a fuse extracting unit, clamp meter, and insulation gloves are
available.

Procedure
Step 1 Check as follows before connecting the battery supply.
1. Flip the battery switch on the DCDU to AUTO.
2. Switch the load circuit breaker on the DCDU to OFF.
Step 2 Check that the battery string voltage is in the range of 43.2 V DC to 56.4 V DC using a clamp
meter.
Step 3 Connect the battery supply.
1. Reinstall battery fuse 2 in the DCDU using a fuse extracting unit.

Before reinstalling a fuse, switch the AC input circuit breaker on the ACDU to OFF.
Otherwise, the fuse will produce sparks during operation.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 240


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-10 Position of battery fuse 2

(1) Battery fuse 2

2. Flip the DCDU battery switch to MANUAL.


Step 4 Check that the busbar voltage is in the range of 43.2 V DC to 56.4 V DC using a clamp meter.
----End

10.5.2 Setting Parameters (Lithium Battery + Lead-Acid Battery)


Procedure
Step 1 Set the parameters based on the following table.

Table 10-84 Parameter settings

Item Setting
Language English
Enter Password 000001

Step 2 After Setup Wizard Init is displayed on the LCD, set the following parameters.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 241


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-85 Parameter settings

Item Setting
Time Zone Set to the local time zone.
Date and Time Set to the local date and time.
Batter Factory AGISSON
Battery Model FCB-A
NOTE
Set the battery model for lead-acid batteries.
There is no need to set this parameter for lithium
batteries.

The SMU may restart. Yes

Step 3 After the SMU restarts, set parameters according to the following table.

Table 10-86 Parameter settings

Item Setting

Language English
Enter Password 000001
Battery 1 Connected No
Battery 2 Connected Yes
Single-String Cap. Rated capacity of the batteries in a battery
string.
NOTE
 This parameter indicates the rated capacity of
lead-acid batteries.
 The batteries controlled by one circuit
breaker or fuse are called a battery string.

Step 4 When the SMU is running properly, set the language, date, and time in the following menu
paths.

Table 10-87 Setting the language, date, and time

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Parameters Settings Local Parameters Language - Select a desired


language.
Date and Time Time Zone Set to the local time
zone.
Date and Time Set to the local date

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 242


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu
and time.

Step 5 Set hybrid scenario parameters.

Table 10-88 Setting hybrid scenario parameters

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Settin


Menu Menu Menu Value g
Parameters Setup Parameter Basic Parameters Hybrid Scenario No Yes
Settings

Step 6 Set lithium battery parameters.

Table 10-89 Setting lithium battery parameters

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters Settings Li Battery Basic Parameters Battery 1 Yes
NOTE
Connected
This parameter is Battery 2 No
displayed only when
Battery Model is set Connected
to ESM-A.
Discharger DOD 99%

Step 7 Set lead-acid battery parameters.

Table 10-90 Setting lead-acid battery parameters

Main Menu Second-Lev Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


el Menu Menu Menu
Parameters Acid Battery Basic Battery Cable Set based on site requirements.
Settings Parameters Length NOTE
 When each battery string is connected to the
Batt Cable CS
RTN+ busbar over one cable, set Cable
Area Length to half of the total length of cables
between both ends of a battery string and the
positive and negative busbars, and set Cable
CSA to the cross-sectional area of the cable.
 When each battery string is connected to the
RTN+ busbar over two cables, set Cable
Length to half of the total length of a suite of
cables between both ends of a battery string
and the positive and negative busbars, and set
Cable CSA to the sum of the cross-sectional
areas of the two cables.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 243


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Step 8 Set sensor parameters.

Table 10-91 Setting sensor parameters

Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Menu Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Setup Sensor Config Water Sensor - Set as required.
Settings Parameter
Smoke Sensor - Set as required.
Ambient Temp. - Set as required.
Sensor
Ambient Humi. - Set as required.
Sensor
Batt. Temp. Sensor 1 - Set as required.

Step 9 Set the PV module dry contact alarm.

Table 10-92 Setting the dry contact alarm for the battery cabinet door status sensor

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Alarm Parameters DI Dry Contact DIN2 Alm. Close Open
Settings Para. Cond.

Step 10 Set the dry contact alarm for the battery cabinet door status sensor.

This step is required only if a door status sensor is installed for the battery cabinet.

Table 10-93 Setting the dry contact alarm for the battery cabinet door status sensor

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Alarm Parameters DI Dry Contact DIN4 Alm. Close Open
Settings Para. Cond.

Step 11 Set the dry contact alarm for the inverter.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 244


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-94 Setting the dry contact alarm for the inverter

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Alarm Parameters DI Dry Contact DIN5 Alm. Close Open
Settings Para. Cond.

Step 12 Change the Wifi account password on the LCD.

Table 10-95 Changing Wifi account password

Main Menu Second-Level Menu Third-Level Menu Default Value Setting


Parameters Wifi settings Wifi SSID HUAWEI_SITE Change the account
settings password as required.
Wifi Password Changeme

Step 13 Set the number of DGs.

Table 10-96 Setting the number of DGs

Main Second-Leve Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu l Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Setup Basic Parameters DG Number - 0
Settings Parameter

Step 14 Set communications parameters.


 Setting communications parameters for IP networking
a. Set the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address on the LCD.

Table 10-97 IP parameters

Main Second-L Third-Le Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu evel vel Menu Menu
Menu
Parameters Comm. Network IP Address 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter based on
Settings Parameters Parameters the address assigned by the
network administrator.
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Set this parameter based on
the address assigned by the
network administrator.
Default Gateway 192.168.0.1 Set this parameter based on
the address assigned by the
network administrator.
NOTE

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 245


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Second-L Third-Le Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu evel vel Menu Menu
Menu
If a WiFi module is installed on
the SMU, the default gateway
cannot be set to 192.168.0.1;
otherwise, it will conflict with
the WiFi gateway.

b. Set IP addresses and port numbers for the active and standby NetEco servers on the
LCD.

Table 10-98 NetEco parameters

Main Second- Third-Le Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Level vel Menu Value
Menu Menu
Parameters Comm. Network NetEco Primary 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the IP
Settings Parameter Parameter IP address of the active NetEco
s s server.
NetEco Backup IP 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the IP
address of the standby NetEco
server.
NetEco Port 31220 Set a port number for the
Number NetEco.

 Set wireless communications parameters.


a. Check whether the default wireless communications parameters on the LCD are
consistent with the communication configurations of the carrier network that the
SIM card belongs to. If they are inconsistent, modify the parameters according to
the actual configurations of the carrier network.

Table 10-99 Checking wireless communications parameters

Main Second-Lev Third-Level Fourth-Lev Default Value Setting


Menu el Menu Menu el Menu
Parameters Comm. Mobile Data Carrier Automatic Automatic, Others
Settings Parameters Operator
SIMn Acc - A maximum of 28
Point Name characters, including
NOTE
lowercase English letters (a
This
to z), uppercase English
parameter is letters (A to Z), digits (0 to
displayed 9), and special characters
only when (@_#*-.).
Carrier
Operator is
set to

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 246


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Second-Lev Third-Level Fourth-Lev Default Value Setting


Menu el Menu Menu el Menu
Others.

SIMn -
Access
Point No
NOTE
This
parameter is
displayed
only when
Carrier
Operator is
set to
Others.

SIMn User -
Name
NOTE
This
parameter is
displayed
only when
Carrier
Operator is
set to
Others.

SIMn User - A maximum of 27


Password characters, including
NOTE lowercase English letters (a
This
to z), uppercase English
parameter is letters (A to Z), digits (0 to
displayed 9), and special characters
only when (@_#-.).
Carrier
Operator is It is recommended that the
set to password contain at least
Others. two types of characters and
the length exceed six
characters.

b. Set IP addresses and port numbers for the active and standby NetEco servers on the
LCD.

Table 10-100 NetEco parameters

Main Menu Second-Le Third-Leve Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


vel Menu l Menu Menu
Parameters Comm. Network NetEco Primary 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the
Settings Parameters Parameters IP IP address of the active
NetEco server

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 247


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Le Third-Leve Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


vel Menu l Menu Menu
NetEco Backup 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the
IP IP address of the standby
NetEco server.
NetEco Port 31220 Set a port number for the
Number NetEco.

 Set BBU in-band networking parameters.


a. Set BBU in-band networking parameters.

Table 10-101 BBU in-band networking parameters

Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Fifth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu Menu Menu
Parameters Comm. Serial Port Northbound Port Mode Manual
Settings Parameters
Protocol Type M/S Protocol
M/S Protocol Baud Rate - 9600
Comm. Address - 3

b. Set IP addresses and port numbers for the active and standby NetEco servers on the
LCD.

Table 10-102 NetEco parameters

Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Comm. Network NetEco Primary 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter
Settings Parameters Parameters IP to the IP address of
the active NetEco
server.
NetEco Backup 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter
IP to the IP address of
the standby NetEco
server.
NetEco Port 31220 Set a port number
Number for the NetEco.

----End

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 248


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

10.5.3 Connecting the PV Module Supply


Prerequisites
You can power on and commission PV modules only when sun exposure is sufficient.

Procedure
Step 1 Check that the PV input voltage ranges from 70 V DC to 150 V DC using a clamp meter.
Step 2 Switch the PV input circuit breaker to ON.
Step 3 Check the connections of PV module power cables. If the Run indicator (green) on the front
panel of the solar supply unit (SSU) is on, the cables are connected correctly. If the Run
indicator (green) is off, the positive and negative power cables may be reversely connected
and need to be corrected.
----End

10.5.4 Connecting the Battery Supply (Lithium Battery)


Prerequisites
Required tools including a fuse extracting unit, clamp meter, and insulation gloves are
available.

Procedure
Step 1 Reinstall battery fuse 1 in the DCDU using a fuse extracting unit.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 249


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-11 Position of battery fuse 1

(1) Battery fuse 1

Step 2 Check whether the RUN indicator on the lithium battery is steady on.
 If the RUN indicator is steady on, communication is normal.
 If the RUN indicator blinks fast, the lithium battery fails to communicate with the host.
 If the RUN indicator is off, check and correct the battery cable connections. Use a
multimeter to measure the voltage at the + and – output ports of the lithium battery.
Ensure that the voltage is positive and in the range of 43.2 V DC to 56.4 V DC. Replace
the lithium battery if the cable connections are correct, the battery port voltage is in the
range of 43.2 V DC to 56.4 V DC, but the indicator is still off.

If the lithium battery fails to communicate with the host:


1. Check whether the battery communications cable is properly connected.
2. Check whether the terminal build-out resistor of the battery is properly connected.
3. If both are normal, replace the battery.

----End

10.5.5 Connecting the Load Supply


Procedure
Step 1 Switch on all load circuit breakers one by one. During the process, measure the busbar voltage
using a clamp meter after switching on each circuit breaker. Then continue to switch on
another circuit breaker after ensuring that the busbar voltage is between 44.5 V DC and 57.6
V DC.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 250


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

----End

10.6 Solar-Diesel Hybrid Power Supply Solution


10.6.1 Preparing for Power-On
Prerequisites
Required tools including a fuse extracting unit, clamp meter, and insulation gloves are
available.

Procedure
Step 1 Reinstall battery fuses in the DCDU using a fuse extracting unit.

Figure 10-12 Positions of battery fuses

(1) Battery fuses

----End

10.6.2 Manually Connecting the DG Supply


Prerequisites

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 251


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Never allow sparks, flames, and inflammable objects to be close to a DG because this may
cause fire or explosions.

Check according to the following table before powering on and commissioning the DG.

Check Expected Result


Item

Appearanc  No engine oil leaks.


e  No fuel leaks.
 No coolant leaks.
 No component is damaged or lost.
 No fastener is loose, lost, or damaged.
 No component is cracked, worn out, or damaged and no connector is
damaged or corroded.
 The EMERGENCY STOP button is in the self-lock state, and the load
circuit breaker is in a proper position.
 No hose is cracked, worn out, damaged, or stuck.
Fuel, lube Levels of fuel, lube oil, and engine coolant are within the normal range.
oil, and
coolant
Battery The battery voltage is greater than 12 V DC.
voltage

Procedure (EPM100-M2B, EPM120-M2D, EPM140-M2B, EPM140-M2C,


EPM160-M2B, EPM160-M2C, EPM160-M2D, and EPM200-M2B)
Step 1 Exhaust air from fuel pipes.
 Exhausting air from fuel pipes (EPM100-M2B, EPM120-M2D, EPM160-M2C, and
EPM160-M2D)
a. Loosen the air exhaust screw on the fuel filter.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 252


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-13 Air exhaust screw

(1) Fuel filter


b. Repeatedly pinch the hand feed pump on the fuel transfer pump until the fuel flows
through the air exhaust screw has no bubbles.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 253


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-14 Hand feed pump

(1) Hand feed pump

c. Tighten the air exhaust screw on the fuel filter.


 Exhausting air from fuel pipes (EPM140-M2B, EPM140-M2C, and EPM160-M2B)
a. Loosen the air exhaust screw on the fuel filter.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 254


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-15 Air exhaust screw

b. Press the hand feed pump up and down until the fuel flowing out of the air exhaust
screw has no bubbles, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 255


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-16 Exhausting air from fuel pipes

(1) Hand feed pump

c. Tighten the air exhaust screw on the fuel filter.


 Exhausting air from fuel pipes (EPM200-M2B)
a. Loose the air exhaust screw from the fuel filter and fuel injection pump.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 256


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-17 Air exhaust screw

(1) Fuel filter

b. Press the hand feed pump up and down until the fuel flows through the air exhaust
screw has no bubbles.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 257


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-18 Exhausting air from fuel pipes

(1) Hand feed pump

c. Tighten the air exhaust screw on the fuel filter.


Step 2 Start the DG manually.
1. Rotate the EMERGENCY button until it is ejected.
2. Check that the DG AC output circuit breaker is OFF.
3. Turn on the power switch for the DG battery charger.
4. Set the GMU to manual mode, and then press the RESET button on the GMU panel to
clear alarms. When Gen-Set is Ready, press the START button to manually start the
DG.

Figure 10-19 Starting the DG manually

Step 3 Check the DG output voltage, as shown in the following figure.


1. Press I/O on the GMU panel.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 258


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

2. Open the door of the GMB and check that the DG output voltage is in the range of 207 V
AC to 253 V AC using a clamp meter.

Figure 10-20 Checking the DG output voltage (EPM100-M2B)

Figure 10-21 Checking the DG output voltage (EPM120-M2D, EPM160-M2C, and


EPM160-M2D)

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 259


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-22 Checking the DG output voltage (EPM140-M2B, EPM140-M2C, EPM160-M2B,


and EPM200-M2B)

Step 4 After checking that the DG can start properly, set the DG to work in automatic mode on the
GMU.

Figure 10-23 Setting the DG working mode

Step 5 Switch the DG AC output circuit breaker to ON.

If a third-party DG is used onsite, manually start the DG according to the DG manual.

----End

Procedure (EPM100-M2E, EPM100-M2H, EPM115-M2A, and EPM140-M2D)


Step 1 Prepare for starting the DG.
1. Rotate the EMERGENCY button until it is ejected.
2. Check that the DG AC output circuit breaker is OFF.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 260


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

3. Turn on the power switch for the DG battery charger.


4. Set the GMU to work in manual mode.

Figure 10-24 Starting the DG manually

Step 2 Exhaust air from fuel pipes.


1. When you start the DG for the first time, set Prestart Time/PreFuel Time on the GMU
to 120s so that the DG automatically exhausts air from fuel pipes during startup. Path:
Settings > Engine Setting > Prestart Time/PreFuel Time

 In GMU software V322 and earlier versions, Prestart Time is displayed. In the V330 version,
PreFuel Time is displayed.
 Path for viewing the GMU software version: Main Menu > Product Info > Software.
 The initial GMU password is 1111.
2. Press START on the GMU panel to start the DG.
3. After the DG normally starts, set Prestart Time/PreFuel Time to 15s.
Step 3 Check the DG output voltage.
1. Press I/O on the GMU panel.
2. Open the door of the GMB and check that the DG output voltage is in the correct voltage
range using a clamp meter.
− EPM100-M2E, EPM100-M2H, and EPM140-M2D output voltage range: 207–253
V AC
− EPM115-M2A output voltage range: 99–121 V AC

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 261


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-25 Checking the DG output voltage (EPM100-M2E, EPM100-M2H, and


EPM140-M2D)

Figure 10-26 Checking the DG output voltage (EPM115-M2A)

Step 4 If the DG works properly, switch the DG AC output circuit breaker to ON.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 262


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

If a third-party DG is used onsite, manually start the DG according to the DG manual.

----End

10.6.3 Connecting the Battery Supply (Lithium Battery)


Context
After AC power is switched on, the lithium battery supply is automatically connected.

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the RUN indicator on each lithium battery is steady on.
 If the RUN indicator is steady on, communication is proper.
 If the RUN indicator blinks fast, the ESM fails to communicate with the host.
 If the RUN indicator is off, check and correct the ESM cable connections. Use a
multimeter to measure the voltage at the + and – output ports of the ESM. Ensure that
the voltage is positive and in the range of 43.2 V DC to 56.4 V DC. Replace the ESM if
the cable connections are correct, the battery port voltage is in the range of 43.2 V DC to
56.4 V DC, but the indicator is still off.

When the ESM fails to communicate with the host:


1. Check whether the ESM communications cable is properly connected.
2. Check whether the ESM terminal build-out resistor is properly connected.
3. If both are proper, replace the ESM.

----End

10.6.4 Setting Parameters (Lithium Battery)


Context
After the SMU is powered on for the first time and the system automatically identifies lithium
batteries, the SMU automatically restarts.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the parameters based on the following table.

Table 10-103 Parameter settings

Item Setting

Language English
Enter Password 000001

Step 2 After Setup Wizard Init is displayed on the LCD, set the following parameters.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 263


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-104 Parameter settings

Item Setting
Time Zone Set to the local time zone.
Date and Time Set to the local date and time.
Batter Factory AGISSON
Battery Model ESM-A
The SMU may restart. Yes

Step 3 When the SMU is running properly, set the language, date, and time in the following menu
paths.

Table 10-105 Setting the language, date, and time

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters Settings Local Parameters Language - Select a desired
language.
Date and Time Time Zone Set to the local time
zone.
Date and Time Set to the local date
and time.

Step 4 Set sensor parameters.

Table 10-106 Setting sensor parameters


Main Second- Third-Lev Fourth-Level Menu Default Value Setting
Menu Level el Menu
Menu
Paramet Setup Sensor Water Sensor - Set as required.
ers Parameter Config
Settings Smoke Sensor - Set as required.
Ambient Temp. Sensor - Set as required.
Ambient Humi. Sensor - Set as required.

Step 5 Set PV module dry contact alarm parameters.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 264


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-107 Setting PV module dry contact alarm parameters

Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu Menu
Parameters Alarm Parameters DI Dry Contact DIN2 Alm. Cond. Close Open
Settings Para.

Step 6 Set the dry contact alarm for the battery cabinet door status sensor.

This step is required only if a door status sensor is installed for the battery cabinet.

Table 10-108 Setting the dry contact alarm for the battery cabinet door status sensor

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Alarm Parameters DI Dry Contact DIN4 Alm. Close Open
Settings Para. Cond.

Step 7 Set the dry contact alarm for the inverter.

Table 10-109 Setting the dry contact alarm for the inverter

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Alarm Parameters DI Dry Contact DIN5 Alm. Close Open
Settings Para. Cond.

Step 8 Change the Wifi account password on the LCD.

Table 10-110 Changing Wifi account password

Main Menu Second-Level Menu Third-Level Menu Default Value Setting


Parameters Wifi settings Wifi SSID HUAWEI_SITE Change the account
settings password as required.
Wifi Password Changeme

Step 9 Set the address DIP switch of AIM to 000.

Set the address DIP switch of AIM to 000 if an AC meter is configured.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 265


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-27 Setting the address DIP switch of AIM

Step 10 Set AIM parameters.

Set the parameters in this step only if an AC meter is configured.

Table 10-111 Setting AIM parameters

Main Menu Second-Level Menu Third-Level Menu Setting


Parameters settings AIM1 AC Source DG

Step 11 Set the other energy input type.

If the PVDU-200A1 is deployed, set the other energy input type to solar power.

Table 10-112 Setting the other energy input type

Main Menu Second-Leve Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


l Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Power System Basic Parameters Other Power Type - Solar Power
Settings

Step 12 Set the number of DGs.

Table 10-113 Setting the number of DGs

Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Setup Parameter Basic Parameters DG Number 1 1
Settings

Step 13 Set the AC parameter for the DG.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 266


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-114 Setting the AC parameter for the DG

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 AC Power 3Ph4Wire Set as required.
Settings Supply Mode

Step 14 Switch the GMU power circuit breaker to ON.


Step 15 Set DG parameters.
1. Set the EPM100-M2B parameters.

Table 10-115 EPM100-M2B parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 10 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.83 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 58.0 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 5.2 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Time
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

2. Set the EPM100-M2E parameters.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 267


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-116 EPM100-M2E parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 10 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1250 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Time
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

3. Set the EPM100-M2H parameters.

Table 10-117 EPM100-M2H parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5kW 10kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999h 1250h
Time Maint Per 500h 4320h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 268


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50m 0.58m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00m 1.80m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00m 0.81m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0cm 57.7cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0cm 2.7cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0cm 3.0cm
Alarm
Level Chg 10.0Min 10.0Min
Time
Level Filt Time 30.0Min 30.0Min

4. Set the EPM115-M2A parameters.

Table 10-118 EPM115-M2A parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 11.5 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.57 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.83 m
Width

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 269


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 56.2 cm


Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 5.2 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

5. Set the EPM120-M2D parameters.

Table 10-119 EPM120-M2D parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 12 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.57 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 2.20 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 56.2 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 5.2 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 270


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

6. Set the EPM140-M2B parameters.

Table 10-120 EPM140-M2B parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 14 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

7. Set the EPM140-M2C parameters.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 271


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-121 EPM140-M2C parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 14 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1250 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No No
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

8. Set the EPM140-M2D parameters.

Table 10-122 EPM140-M2D parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 14 kW


Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1250 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 272


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

9. Set the EPM160-M2B parameters.

Table 10-123 EPM160-M2B parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 16 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 273


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%


Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

10. Set the EPM160-M2C parameters.

Table 10-124 EPM160-M2C parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 16 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.57 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 2.20 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 56.2 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 5.2 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 274


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

11. Set the EPM160-M2D parameters.

Table 10-125 EPM160-M2D parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 16 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.57 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 2.20 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 56.2 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 5.2 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

12. Set the EPM200-M2B parameters.

Table 10-126 EPM200-M2B parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 20 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 275


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 2.20 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

Step 16 Set parameters for the reused DG.

Table 10-127 Setting parameters for the reused DG

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW Set based on site
Settings Power requirements.
Max Power 80.0% Set based on site
Ratio requirements.
Over Volt Prot 120.0% Set based on site
requirements.
Under Volt Prot 80.0% Set based on site
requirements.
Batt Undervolt 10.0 V Set based on site
Thro requirements.
Routine Maint 9999 h Set based on site
requirements.
Timed Maint Per 500 h Set based on site
requirements.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 276


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Step 17 Set communications parameters.


 Setting communications parameters for IP networking
a. Set the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address on the LCD.

Table 10-128 IP parameters

Main Second-L Third-Le Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu evel vel Menu Menu
Menu
Parameters Comm. Network IP Address 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter based on
Settings Parameters Parameters the address assigned by the
network administrator.
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Set this parameter based on
the address assigned by the
network administrator.
Default Gateway 192.168.0.1 Set this parameter based on
the address assigned by the
network administrator.
NOTE
If a WiFi module is installed on
the SMU, the default gateway
cannot be set to 192.168.0.1;
otherwise, it will conflict with
the WiFi gateway.

b. Set IP addresses and port numbers for the active and standby NetEco servers on the
LCD.

Table 10-129 NetEco parameters

Main Second- Third-Le Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Level vel Menu Value
Menu Menu
Parameters Comm. Network NetEco Primary 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the IP
Settings Parameter Parameter IP address of the active NetEco
s s server.
NetEco Backup IP 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the IP
address of the standby NetEco
server.
NetEco Port 31220 Set a port number for the
Number NetEco.

 Set wireless communications parameters.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 277


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

a. Check whether the default wireless communications parameters on the LCD are
consistent with the communication configurations of the carrier network that the
SIM card belongs to. If they are inconsistent, modify the parameters according to
the actual configurations of the carrier network.

Table 10-130 Checking wireless communications parameters

Main Second-Lev Third-Level Fourth-Lev Default Value Setting


Menu el Menu Menu el Menu
Parameters Comm. Mobile Data Carrier Automatic Automatic, Others
Settings Parameters Operator
SIMn Acc - A maximum of 28
Point Name characters, including
NOTE
lowercase English letters (a
This
to z), uppercase English
parameter is letters (A to Z), digits (0 to
displayed 9), and special characters
only when (@_#*-.).
Carrier
Operator is
set to
Others.

SIMn -
Access
Point No
NOTE
This
parameter is
displayed
only when
Carrier
Operator is
set to
Others.

SIMn User -
Name
NOTE
This
parameter is
displayed
only when
Carrier
Operator is
set to
Others.

SIMn User - A maximum of 27


Password characters, including
NOTE
lowercase English letters (a
This
to z), uppercase English
parameter is letters (A to Z), digits (0 to
displayed 9), and special characters
only when (@_#-.).
Carrier
Operator is It is recommended that the

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 278


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Second-Lev Third-Level Fourth-Lev Default Value Setting


Menu el Menu Menu el Menu
set to password contain at least
Others. two types of characters and
the length exceed six
characters.

b. Set IP addresses and port numbers for the active and standby NetEco servers on the
LCD.

Table 10-131 NetEco parameters

Main Menu Second-Le Third-Leve Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


vel Menu l Menu Menu

Parameters Comm. Network NetEco Primary 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the
Settings Parameters Parameters IP IP address of the active
NetEco server
NetEco Backup 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the
IP IP address of the standby
NetEco server.
NetEco Port 31220 Set a port number for the
Number NetEco.

 Set BBU in-band networking parameters.


a. Set BBU in-band networking parameters.

Table 10-132 BBU in-band networking parameters

Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Fifth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu Menu Menu
Parameters Comm. Serial Port Northbound Port Mode Manual
Settings Parameters
Protocol Type M/S Protocol
M/S Protocol Baud Rate - 9600
Comm. Address - 3

b. Set IP addresses and port numbers for the active and standby NetEco servers on the
LCD.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 279


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-133 NetEco parameters

Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Comm. Network NetEco Primary 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter
Settings Parameters Parameters IP to the IP address of
the active NetEco
server.
NetEco Backup 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter
IP to the IP address of
the standby NetEco
server.
NetEco Port 31220 Set a port number
Number for the NetEco.

----End

10.6.5 Starting a DG Self-Check


Context
 There is no battery alarm on the Monitoring, and battery power supply is normal.
 If the mains power is used, ensure that the mains AC input circuit breaker on the ATS is
OFF.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the DG to work in automatic mode on the GMU.

Figure 10-28 Setting the DG working mode

Step 2 Start a DG self-check.

Table 10-134 Starting a DG self-check

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Running Control EPS-D DG Self Check Confirm Self Check Yes

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 280


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

The auto check process is as follows:


1. About 2 minutes after starting DG 1, the Monitoring checks the DG running status to determine
whether the DG has started.
2. About 2 minutes after shutting down DG 1, the Monitoring checks the DG running status to
determine whether the DG has shut down.
After the auto check is complete, the SMU displays the results on the screen:
 Control DG Number (0/1)
 DG 1 Start Result (Success/Fail)
 DG 1 Stop Result (Success/Fail)
A single-DG self-check takes about 4 minutes

Step 3 Verify that the self-check result is consistent with the actual number of DGs and the DGs
work properly. If the DG self-check fails, refer to the DG manual for troubleshooting and DG
cable connection checking.
----End

10.6.6 Connecting the PV Module Supply


Prerequisites
You can power on and commission PV modules only when sun exposure is sufficient.

Procedure
Step 1 Check that the PV input voltage ranges from 70 V DC to 150 V DC using a clamp meter.
Step 2 Switch the PV input circuit breaker to ON.
Step 3 Check the connections of PV module power cables. If the Run indicator (green) on the front
panel of the solar supply unit (SSU) is on, the cables are connected correctly. If the Run
indicator (green) is off, the positive and negative power cables may be reversely connected
and need to be corrected.

After the PV power supply is connected, the SMU detects that the SSU will restart.

----End

10.6.7 Connecting the Load Supply


Procedure
Step 1 Switch on all load circuit breakers one by one. During the process, measure the busbar voltage
using a clamp meter after switching on each circuit breaker. Then continue to switch on
another circuit breaker after ensuring that the busbar voltage is between 44.5 V DC and 57.6
V DC.
----End

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 281


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

10.7 Solar-Grid Hybrid Power Supply Solution


10.7.1 Preparing for Power-On
Prerequisites
Required tools including a fuse extracting unit, clamp meter, and insulation gloves are
available.

Procedure
Step 1 Reinstall battery fuses in the DCDU using a fuse extracting unit.

Figure 10-29 Positions of battery fuses

(1) Battery fuses

----End

10.7.2 Connecting the Mains Supply


Prerequisites

Perform power-on commissioning only when the mains power is normal. If the mains power
is unavailable, use a mobile DG to supply AC power.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 282


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Procedure
Step 1 Check that the AC input circuit breaker on the ACDU is OFF, and turn on the upstream mains
AC switch for the ACDU.
Step 2 Check that the AC input phase voltage ranges from 85 V AC to 300 V AC using a clamp
meter.
Step 3 Switch the AC input circuit breaker on the ACDU to ON.
Step 4 Check that the busbar voltage ranges from 44.5 V DC to 57.6 V DC using a clamp meter.
----End

10.7.3 Connecting the Battery Supply (Lithium Battery)


Context
After AC power is switched on, the lithium battery supply is automatically connected.

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the RUN indicator on each lithium battery is steady on.
 If the RUN indicator is steady on, communication is proper.
 If the RUN indicator blinks fast, the ESM fails to communicate with the host.
 If the RUN indicator is off, check and correct the ESM cable connections. Use a
multimeter to measure the voltage at the + and – output ports of the ESM. Ensure that
the voltage is positive and in the range of 43.2 V DC to 56.4 V DC. Replace the ESM if
the cable connections are correct, the battery port voltage is in the range of 43.2 V DC to
56.4 V DC, but the indicator is still off.

When the ESM fails to communicate with the host:


1. Check whether the ESM communications cable is properly connected.
2. Check whether the ESM terminal build-out resistor is properly connected.
3. If both are proper, replace the ESM.

----End

10.7.4 Setting Parameters (Lithium Battery)


Context
After the SMU is powered on for the first time and the system automatically identifies lithium
batteries, the SMU automatically restarts.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the parameters based on the following table.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 283


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-135 Parameter settings

Item Setting
Language English
Enter Password 000001

Step 2 After Setup Wizard Init is displayed on the LCD, set the following parameters.

Table 10-136 Parameter settings

Item Setting

Time Zone Set to the local time zone.


Date and Time Set to the local date and time.
Batter Factory AGISSON
Battery Model ESM-A
The SMU may restart. Yes

Step 3 When the SMU is running properly, set the language, date, and time in the following menu
paths.

Table 10-137 Setting the language, date, and time

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Parameters Settings Local Parameters Language - Select a desired


language.
Date and Time Time Zone Set to the local time
zone.
Date and Time Set to the local date
and time.

Step 4 Set sensor parameters.

Table 10-138 Setting sensor parameters

Main Second- Third-Lev Fourth-Level Menu Default Value Setting


Menu Level el Menu
Menu
Paramet Setup Sensor Water Sensor - Set as required.
ers Parameter Config
Smoke Sensor - Set as required.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 284


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Second- Third-Lev Fourth-Level Menu Default Value Setting


Menu Level el Menu
Menu
Settings Ambient Temp. Sensor - Set as required.
Ambient Humi. Sensor - Set as required.

Step 5 Set PV module dry contact alarm parameters.

Table 10-139 Setting PV module dry contact alarm parameters

Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu Menu
Parameters Alarm Parameters DI Dry Contact DIN2 Alm. Cond. Close Open
Settings Para.

Step 6 Set the dry contact alarm for the battery cabinet door status sensor.

This step is required only if a door status sensor is installed for the battery cabinet.

Table 10-140 Setting the dry contact alarm for the battery cabinet door status sensor

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Alarm Parameters DI Dry Contact DIN4 Alm. Close Open
Settings Para. Cond.

Step 7 Set the dry contact alarm for the inverter.

Table 10-141 Setting the dry contact alarm for the inverter

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value

Parameters Alarm Parameters DI Dry Contact DIN5 Alm. Close Open


Settings Para. Cond.

Step 8 Set the dry contact alarm for the ACDU.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 285


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-142 Setting the dry contact alarm for the ACDU

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Alarm Parameters DI Dry Contact DIN6 Alm. Close Open
Settings Para. Cond.

Step 9 Change the Wifi account password on the LCD.

Table 10-143 Changing Wifi account password

Main Menu Second-Level Menu Third-Level Menu Default Value Setting


Parameters Wifi settings Wifi SSID HUAWEI_SITE Change the account
settings password as required.
Wifi Password Changeme

Step 10 Set the address DIP switch of AIM to 000.

Set the address DIP switch of AIM to 000 if an AC meter is configured.

Figure 10-30 Setting the address DIP switch of AIM

Step 11 Set AIM parameters.

Set the parameters in this step only if an AC meter is configured.

Table 10-144 Setting AIM parameters

Main Menu Second-Level Menu Third-Level Menu Setting

Parameters settings AIM1 AC Source Mains

Step 12 Set the mains AC parameter.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 286


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-145 Setting the mains AC parameter

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu

Parameters Settings Mains AC Model 3 Phase 4 Line Set as required.

Step 13 Set the other energy input type.

If the PVDU-200A1 is deployed, set the other energy input type to solar power.

Table 10-146 Setting the other energy input type

Main Menu Second-L Third-Lev Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


evel el Menu Menu
Menu
Parameters Power Basic Other Power - Solar Power
Settings System Parameters Type

Step 14 Set the number of DGs.

Table 10-147 Setting the number of DGs

Main Second-Leve Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu l Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Setup Basic Parameters DG Number - 0
Settings Parameter

Step 15 Set communications parameters.


 Setting communications parameters for IP networking
a. Set the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address on the LCD.

Table 10-148 IP parameters

Main Second-L Third-Le Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu evel vel Menu Menu
Menu
Parameters Comm. Network IP Address 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter based on
Settings Parameters Parameters the address assigned by the
network administrator.
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Set this parameter based on
the address assigned by the
network administrator.
Default Gateway 192.168.0.1 Set this parameter based on
the address assigned by the

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 287


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Second-L Third-Le Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu evel vel Menu Menu
Menu
network administrator.
NOTE
If a WiFi module is installed on
the SMU, the default gateway
cannot be set to 192.168.0.1;
otherwise, it will conflict with
the WiFi gateway.

b. Set IP addresses and port numbers for the active and standby NetEco servers on the
LCD.

Table 10-149 NetEco parameters

Main Second- Third-Le Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Level vel Menu Value
Menu Menu
Parameters Comm. Network NetEco Primary 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the IP
Settings Parameter Parameter IP address of the active NetEco
s s server.
NetEco Backup IP 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the IP
address of the standby NetEco
server.
NetEco Port 31220 Set a port number for the
Number NetEco.

 Set wireless communications parameters.


a. Check whether the default wireless communications parameters on the LCD are
consistent with the communication configurations of the carrier network that the
SIM card belongs to. If they are inconsistent, modify the parameters according to
the actual configurations of the carrier network.

Table 10-150 Checking wireless communications parameters

Main Second-Lev Third-Level Fourth-Lev Default Value Setting


Menu el Menu Menu el Menu
Parameters Comm. Mobile Data Carrier Automatic Automatic, Others
Settings Parameters Operator
SIMn Acc - A maximum of 28
Point Name characters, including
NOTE lowercase English letters (a
This
to z), uppercase English
parameter is letters (A to Z), digits (0 to
displayed 9), and special characters
only when

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 288


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Second-Lev Third-Level Fourth-Lev Default Value Setting


Menu el Menu Menu el Menu
Carrier (@_#*-.).
Operator is
set to
Others.

SIMn -
Access
Point No
NOTE
This
parameter is
displayed
only when
Carrier
Operator is
set to
Others.

SIMn User -
Name
NOTE
This
parameter is
displayed
only when
Carrier
Operator is
set to
Others.

SIMn User - A maximum of 27


Password characters, including
NOTE lowercase English letters (a
This
to z), uppercase English
parameter is letters (A to Z), digits (0 to
displayed 9), and special characters
only when (@_#-.).
Carrier
Operator is It is recommended that the
set to password contain at least
Others. two types of characters and
the length exceed six
characters.

b. Set IP addresses and port numbers for the active and standby NetEco servers on the
LCD.

Table 10-151 NetEco parameters

Main Menu Second-Le Third-Leve Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


vel Menu l Menu Menu
Parameters Comm. Network NetEco Primary 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the
Settings Parameters Parameters IP IP address of the active

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 289


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Le Third-Leve Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


vel Menu l Menu Menu
NetEco server
NetEco Backup 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the
IP IP address of the standby
NetEco server.
NetEco Port 31220 Set a port number for the
Number NetEco.

 Set BBU in-band networking parameters.


a. Set BBU in-band networking parameters.

Table 10-152 BBU in-band networking parameters

Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Fifth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu Menu Menu
Parameters Comm. Serial Port Northbound Port Mode Manual
Settings Parameters
Protocol Type M/S Protocol
M/S Protocol Baud Rate - 9600
Comm. Address - 3

b. Set IP addresses and port numbers for the active and standby NetEco servers on the
LCD.

Table 10-153 NetEco parameters

Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Comm. Network NetEco Primary 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter
Settings Parameters Parameters IP to the IP address of
the active NetEco
server.
NetEco Backup 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter
IP to the IP address of
the standby NetEco
server.
NetEco Port 31220 Set a port number
Number for the NetEco.

----End

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 290


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

10.7.5 Connecting the PV Module Supply


Prerequisites
You can power on and commission PV modules only when sun exposure is sufficient.

Procedure
Step 1 Check that the PV input voltage ranges from 70 V DC to 150 V DC using a clamp meter.
Step 2 Switch the PV input circuit breaker to ON.
Step 3 Check the connections of PV module power cables. If the Run indicator (green) on the front
panel of the solar supply unit (SSU) is on, the cables are connected correctly. If the Run
indicator (green) is off, the positive and negative power cables may be reversely connected
and need to be corrected.

After the PV power supply is connected, the SMU detects that the SSU will restart.

----End

10.7.6 Connecting the Load Supply


Procedure
Step 1 Switch on all load circuit breakers one by one. During the process, measure the busbar voltage
using a clamp meter after switching on each circuit breaker. Then continue to switch on
another circuit breaker after ensuring that the busbar voltage is between 44.5 V DC and 57.6
V DC.
----End

10.8 Solar-Grid-Diesel Hybrid Power Supply Solution


10.8.1 Preparing for Power-On
Prerequisites
Required tools including a fuse extracting unit, clamp meter, and insulation gloves are
available.

Procedure
Step 1 Reinstall battery fuses in the DCDU using a fuse extracting unit.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 291


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-31 Positions of battery fuses

(1) Battery fuses

----End

10.8.2 Connecting the Mains Supply


Procedure
Step 1 Check that the mains AC input circuit breaker on the ATS is OFF, and turn on the upstream
mains AC switch for the ATS.
Step 2 Check that the input voltage of the mains AC input circuit breaker on the ATS ranges from 85
V AC to 300 V AC.
Step 3 Switch the mains AC input circuit breaker on the ATS to ON.
Step 4 Check that the DG stops and the mains starts to supply power.
----End

10.8.3 Connecting the Battery Supply (Lithium Battery)


Context
After AC power is switched on, the lithium battery supply is automatically connected.

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the RUN indicator on each lithium battery is steady on.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 292


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

 If the RUN indicator is steady on, communication is proper.


 If the RUN indicator blinks fast, the ESM fails to communicate with the host.
 If the RUN indicator is off, check and correct the ESM cable connections. Use a
multimeter to measure the voltage at the + and – output ports of the ESM. Ensure that
the voltage is positive and in the range of 43.2 V DC to 56.4 V DC. Replace the ESM if
the cable connections are correct, the battery port voltage is in the range of 43.2 V DC to
56.4 V DC, but the indicator is still off.

When the ESM fails to communicate with the host:


1. Check whether the ESM communications cable is properly connected.
2. Check whether the ESM terminal build-out resistor is properly connected.
3. If both are proper, replace the ESM.

----End

10.8.4 Setting Parameters (Lithium Battery)


Context
After the SMU is powered on for the first time and the system automatically identifies lithium
batteries, the SMU automatically restarts.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the parameters based on the following table.

Table 10-154 Parameter settings


Item Setting

Language English
Enter Password 000001

Step 2 After Setup Wizard Init is displayed on the LCD, set the following parameters.

Table 10-155 Parameter settings

Item Setting
Time Zone Set to the local time zone.
Date and Time Set to the local date and time.
Batter Factory AGISSON
Battery Model ESM-A
The SMU may restart. Yes

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 293


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Step 3 When the SMU is running properly, set the language, date, and time in the following menu
paths.

Table 10-156 Setting the language, date, and time

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Parameters Settings Local Parameters Language - Select a desired


language.
Date and Time Time Zone Set to the local time
zone.
Date and Time Set to the local date
and time.

Step 4 Set sensor parameters.

Table 10-157 Setting sensor parameters


Main Second- Third-Lev Fourth-Level Menu Default Value Setting
Menu Level el Menu
Menu
Paramet Setup Sensor Water Sensor - Set as required.
ers Parameter Config
Settings Smoke Sensor - Set as required.
Ambient Temp. Sensor - Set as required.
Ambient Humi. Sensor - Set as required.

Step 5 Set PV module dry contact alarm parameters.

Table 10-158 Setting PV module dry contact alarm parameters

Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu Menu
Parameters Alarm Parameters DI Dry Contact DIN2 Alm. Cond. Close Open
Settings Para.

Step 6 Set the dry contact alarm for the battery cabinet door status sensor.

This step is required only if a door status sensor is installed for the battery cabinet.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 294


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-159 Setting the dry contact alarm for the battery cabinet door status sensor

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Alarm Parameters DI Dry Contact DIN4 Alm. Close Open
Settings Para. Cond.

Step 7 Set the dry contact alarm for the inverter.

Table 10-160 Setting the dry contact alarm for the inverter

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Alarm Parameters DI Dry Contact DIN5 Alm. Close Open
Settings Para. Cond.

Step 8 Set the dry contact alarm for the ACDU.

Table 10-161 Setting the dry contact alarm for the ACDU

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Alarm Parameters DI Dry Contact DIN6 Alm. Close Open
Settings Para. Cond.

Step 9 Change the Wifi account password on the LCD.

Table 10-162 Changing Wifi account password

Main Menu Second-Level Menu Third-Level Menu Default Value Setting


Parameters Wifi settings Wifi SSID HUAWEI_SITE Change the account
settings password as required.
Wifi Password Changeme

Step 10 Set the ATS working scenario.

Table 10-163 Setting the ATS working scenario

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu

Parameters Settings ATS 1 Work Scenario Mains+DG Mains+DG

Step 11 Set the mains AC parameter.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 295


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-164 Setting the mains AC parameter

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu

Parameters Settings Mains AC Model 3 Phase 4 Line Set as required.

Step 12 Set the other energy input type.

If the PVDU-200A1 is deployed, set the other energy input type to solar power.

Table 10-165 Setting the other energy input type

Main Menu Second-Lev Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


el Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Power Basic Parameters Other Power - Solar Power
Settings System Type

Step 13 Set the number of DGs.

Table 10-166 Setting the number of DGs


Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting
Menu Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameter Setup Parameter Basic Parameters DG Number 1 1
s Settings

Step 14 Switch the GMU power circuit breaker to ON.


Step 15 Set DG parameters.
1. Set the EPM100-M2B parameters.

Table 10-167 EPM100-M2B parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 10 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 296


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.83 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 58.0 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 5.2 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Time
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

2. Set the EPM100-M2E parameters.

Table 10-168 EPM100-M2E parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 10 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1250 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 297


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm


Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Time
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

3. Set the EPM100-M2H parameters.

Table 10-169 EPM100-M2H parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5kW 10kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999h 1250h
Time Maint Per 500h 4320h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50m 0.58m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00m 1.80m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00m 0.81m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0cm 57.7cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0cm 2.7cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0cm 3.0cm
Alarm
Level Chg 10.0Min 10.0Min
Time

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 298


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Level Filt Time 30.0Min 30.0Min

4. Set the EPM115-M2A parameters.

Table 10-170 EPM115-M2A parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 11.5 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.57 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.83 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 56.2 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 5.2 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

5. Set the EPM120-M2D parameters.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 299


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-171 EPM120-M2D parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 12 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.57 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 2.20 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 56.2 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 5.2 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

6. Set the EPM140-M2B parameters.

Table 10-172 EPM140-M2B parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 14 kW


Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 300


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

7. Set the EPM140-M2C parameters.

Table 10-173 EPM140-M2C parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 14 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1250 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No No
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 301


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%


Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

8. Set the EPM140-M2D parameters.

Table 10-174 EPM140-M2D parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 14 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1250 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 302


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

9. Set the EPM160-M2B parameters.

Table 10-175 EPM160-M2B parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 16 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

10. Set the EPM160-M2C parameters.

Table 10-176 EPM160-M2C parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 16 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 303


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.57 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 2.20 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 56.2 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 5.2 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

11. Set the EPM160-M2D parameters.

Table 10-177 EPM160-M2D parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 16 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.57 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 2.20 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 304


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 56.2 cm


Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 5.2 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

12. Set the EPM200-M2B parameters.

Table 10-178 EPM200-M2B parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 20 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 2.20 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 305


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

Step 16 Set parameters for the reused DG.

Table 10-179 Setting parameters for the reused DG

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW Set based on site
Settings Power requirements.
Max Power 80.0% Set based on site
Ratio requirements.
Over Volt Prot 120.0% Set based on site
requirements.
Under Volt Prot 80.0% Set based on site
requirements.
Batt Undervolt 10.0 V Set based on site
Thro requirements.
Routine Maint 9999 h Set based on site
requirements.
Timed Maint Per 500 h Set based on site
requirements.

Step 17 Set communications parameters.


 Setting communications parameters for IP networking
a. Set the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address on the LCD.

Table 10-180 IP parameters

Main Second-L Third-Le Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu evel vel Menu Menu
Menu
Parameters Comm. Network IP Address 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter based on
Settings Parameters Parameters the address assigned by the
network administrator.
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Set this parameter based on
the address assigned by the
network administrator.
Default Gateway 192.168.0.1 Set this parameter based on
the address assigned by the

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 306


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Second-L Third-Le Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu evel vel Menu Menu
Menu
network administrator.
NOTE
If a WiFi module is installed on
the SMU, the default gateway
cannot be set to 192.168.0.1;
otherwise, it will conflict with
the WiFi gateway.

b. Set IP addresses and port numbers for the active and standby NetEco servers on the
LCD.

Table 10-181 NetEco parameters

Main Second- Third-Le Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Level vel Menu Value
Menu Menu
Parameters Comm. Network NetEco Primary 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the IP
Settings Parameter Parameter IP address of the active NetEco
s s server.
NetEco Backup IP 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the IP
address of the standby NetEco
server.
NetEco Port 31220 Set a port number for the
Number NetEco.

 Set wireless communications parameters.


a. Check whether the default wireless communications parameters on the LCD are
consistent with the communication configurations of the carrier network that the
SIM card belongs to. If they are inconsistent, modify the parameters according to
the actual configurations of the carrier network.

Table 10-182 Checking wireless communications parameters

Main Second-Lev Third-Level Fourth-Lev Default Value Setting


Menu el Menu Menu el Menu
Parameters Comm. Mobile Data Carrier Automatic Automatic, Others
Settings Parameters Operator
SIMn Acc - A maximum of 28
Point Name characters, including
NOTE lowercase English letters (a
This
to z), uppercase English
parameter is letters (A to Z), digits (0 to
displayed 9), and special characters
only when

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 307


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Second-Lev Third-Level Fourth-Lev Default Value Setting


Menu el Menu Menu el Menu
Carrier (@_#*-.).
Operator is
set to
Others.

SIMn -
Access
Point No
NOTE
This
parameter is
displayed
only when
Carrier
Operator is
set to
Others.

SIMn User -
Name
NOTE
This
parameter is
displayed
only when
Carrier
Operator is
set to
Others.

SIMn User - A maximum of 27


Password characters, including
NOTE lowercase English letters (a
This
to z), uppercase English
parameter is letters (A to Z), digits (0 to
displayed 9), and special characters
only when (@_#-.).
Carrier
Operator is It is recommended that the
set to password contain at least
Others. two types of characters and
the length exceed six
characters.

b. Set IP addresses and port numbers for the active and standby NetEco servers on the
LCD.

Table 10-183 NetEco parameters

Main Menu Second-Le Third-Leve Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


vel Menu l Menu Menu
Parameters Comm. Network NetEco Primary 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the
Settings Parameters Parameters IP IP address of the active

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 308


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Le Third-Leve Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


vel Menu l Menu Menu
NetEco server
NetEco Backup 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the
IP IP address of the standby
NetEco server.
NetEco Port 31220 Set a port number for the
Number NetEco.

 Set BBU in-band networking parameters.


a. Set BBU in-band networking parameters.

Table 10-184 BBU in-band networking parameters

Main Second-Lev Third-Level Fourth-Lev Fifth-Level Setting


Menu el Menu Menu el Menu Menu
Paramete Comm. Serial Port Northbound Port Mode Manual
rs Parameters
Settings Protocol M/S Protocol
Type
M/S Protocol Baud Rate - 9600
Comm. - 3
Address

b. Set IP addresses and port numbers for the active and standby NetEco servers on the
LCD.

Table 10-185 NetEco parameters

Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Comm. Network NetEco Primary 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter
Settings Parameters Parameters IP to the IP address of
the active NetEco
server.
NetEco Backup 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter
IP to the IP address of
the standby NetEco
server.
NetEco Port 31220 Set a port number
Number for the NetEco.

----End

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 309


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

10.8.5 Manually Connecting the DG Supply


Prerequisites

Never allow sparks, flames, and inflammable objects to be close to a DG because this may
cause fire or explosions.

Check according to the following table before powering on and commissioning the DG.

Check Expected Result


Item
Appearanc  No engine oil leaks.
e  No fuel leaks.
 No coolant leaks.
 No component is damaged or lost.
 No fastener is loose, lost, or damaged.
 No component is cracked, worn out, or damaged and no connector is
damaged or corroded.
 The EMERGENCY STOP button is in the self-lock state, and the load
circuit breaker is in a proper position.
 No hose is cracked, worn out, damaged, or stuck.
Fuel, lube Levels of fuel, lube oil, and engine coolant are within the normal range.
oil, and
coolant
Battery The battery voltage is greater than 12 V DC.
voltage

Procedure (EPM100-M2B, EPM120-M2D, EPM140-M2B, EPM140-M2C,


EPM160-M2B, EPM160-M2C, EPM160-M2D, and EPM200-M2B)
Step 1 Exhaust air from fuel pipes.
 Exhausting air from fuel pipes (EPM100-M2B, EPM120-M2D, EPM160-M2C, and
EPM160-M2D)
a. Loosen the air exhaust screw on the fuel filter.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 310


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-32 Air exhaust screw

(1) Fuel filter

b. Repeatedly pinch the hand feed pump on the fuel transfer pump until the fuel flows
through the air exhaust screw has no bubbles.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 311


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-33 Hand feed pump

(1) Hand feed pump

c. Tighten the air exhaust screw on the fuel filter.


 Exhausting air from fuel pipes (EPM140-M2B, EPM140-M2C, and EPM160-M2B)
a. Loosen the air exhaust screw on the fuel filter.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 312


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-34 Air exhaust screw

b. Press the hand feed pump up and down until the fuel flowing out of the air exhaust
screw has no bubbles, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 313


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-35 Exhausting air from fuel pipes

(1) Hand feed pump

c. Tighten the air exhaust screw on the fuel filter.


 Exhausting air from fuel pipes (EPM200-M2B)
a. Loose the air exhaust screw from the fuel filter and fuel injection pump.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 314


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-36 Air exhaust screw

(1) Fuel filter

b. Press the hand feed pump up and down until the fuel flows through the air exhaust
screw has no bubbles.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 315


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-37 Exhausting air from fuel pipes

(1) Hand feed pump

c. Tighten the air exhaust screw on the fuel filter.


Step 2 Start the DG manually.
1. Rotate the EMERGENCY button until it is ejected.
2. Check that the DG AC output circuit breaker is OFF.
3. Turn on the power switch for the DG battery charger.
4. Set the GMU to manual mode, and then press the RESET button on the GMU panel to
clear alarms. When Gen-Set is Ready, press the START button to manually start the
DG.

Figure 10-38 Starting the DG manually

Step 3 Check the DG output voltage, as shown in the following figure.


1. Press I/O on the GMU panel.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 316


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

2. Open the door of the GMB and check that the DG output voltage is in the range of 207 V
AC to 253 V AC using a clamp meter.

Figure 10-39 Checking the DG output voltage (EPM100-M2B)

Figure 10-40 Checking the DG output voltage (EPM120-M2D, EPM160-M2C, and


EPM160-M2D)

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 317


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-41 Checking the DG output voltage (EPM140-M2B, EPM140-M2C, EPM160-M2B,


and EPM200-M2B)

Step 4 After checking that the DG can start properly, set the DG to work in automatic mode on the
GMU.

Figure 10-42 Setting the DG working mode

Step 5 Switch the DG AC output circuit breaker to ON.


Step 6 Switch the DG input circuit breaker on the ATS to ON.

If a third-party DG is used onsite, manually start the DG according to the DG manual.

----End

Procedure (EPM100-M2E, EPM120-M2H, EPM115-M2A, and EPM140-M2D)


Step 1 Prepare for starting the DG.
1. Rotate the EMERGENCY button until it is ejected.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 318


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

2. Check that the DG AC output circuit breaker is OFF.


3. Turn on the power switch for the DG battery charger.
4. Set the GMU to work in manual mode.

Figure 10-43 Starting the DG manually

Step 2 Exhaust air from fuel pipes.


1. When you start the DG for the first time, set Prestart Time/PreFuel Time on the GMU
to 120s so that the DG automatically exhausts air from fuel pipes during startup. Path:
Settings > Engine Setting > Prestart Time/PreFuel Time

 In GMU software V322 and earlier versions, Prestart Time is displayed. In the V330 version,
PreFuel Time is displayed.
 Path for viewing the GMU software version: Main Menu > Product Info > Software.
 The initial GMU password is 1111.
2. Press START on the GMU panel to start the DG.
3. After the DG normally starts, set Prestart Time/PreFuel Time to 15s.
Step 3 Check the DG output voltage.
1. Press I/O on the GMU panel.
2. Open the door of the GMB and check that the DG output voltage is in the correct voltage
range using a clamp meter.
− EPM100-M2E, EPM100-M2H, and EPM140-M2D output voltage range: 207–253
V AC
− EPM115-M2A output voltage range: 99–121 V AC

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 319


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-44 Checking the DG output voltage (EPM100-M2E, EPM100-M2H, and


EPM140-M2D)

Figure 10-45 Checking the DG output voltage (EPM115-M2A)

Step 4 If the DG works properly, switch the DG AC output circuit breaker to ON.
Step 5 Switch the DG input circuit breaker on the ATS to ON.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 320


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

If a third-party DG is used onsite, manually start the DG according to the DG manual.

----End

10.8.6 Starting a DG Self-Check


Context
 There is no battery alarm on the Monitoring, and battery power supply is normal.
 If the mains power is used, ensure that the mains AC input circuit breaker on the ATS is
OFF.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the DG to work in automatic mode on the GMU.

Figure 10-46 Setting the DG working mode

Step 2 Start a DG self-check.

Table 10-186 Starting a DG self-check

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Running Control EPS-D DG Self Check Confirm Self Check Yes

The auto check process is as follows:


1. About 2 minutes after starting DG 1, the Monitoring checks the DG running status to determine
whether the DG has started.
2. About 2 minutes after shutting down DG 1, the Monitoring checks the DG running status to
determine whether the DG has shut down.
After the auto check is complete, the SMU displays the results on the screen:
 Control DG Number (0/1)
 DG 1 Start Result (Success/Fail)
 DG 1 Stop Result (Success/Fail)
A single-DG self-check takes about 4 minutes

Step 3 Verify that the self-check result is consistent with the actual number of DGs and the DGs
work properly. If the DG self-check fails, refer to the DG manual for troubleshooting and DG
cable connection checking.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 321


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

----End

10.8.7 Connecting the PV Module Supply


Prerequisites
You can power on and commission PV modules only when sun exposure is sufficient.

Procedure
Step 1 Check that the PV input voltage ranges from 70 V DC to 150 V DC using a clamp meter.
Step 2 Switch the PV input circuit breaker to ON.
Step 3 Check the connections of PV module power cables. If the Run indicator (green) on the front
panel of the solar supply unit (SSU) is on, the cables are connected correctly. If the Run
indicator (green) is off, the positive and negative power cables may be reversely connected
and need to be corrected.

After the PV power supply is connected, the SMU detects that the SSU will restart.

----End

10.8.8 Connecting the Load Supply


Procedure
Step 1 Switch on all load circuit breakers one by one. During the process, measure the busbar voltage
using a clamp meter after switching on each circuit breaker. Then continue to switch on
another circuit breaker after ensuring that the busbar voltage is between 44.5 V DC and 57.6
V DC.
----End

10.9 Single-DG Hybrid Power Supply Solution


(Lithium-ion Battery)
10.9.1 Preparing for Power-On
Prerequisites
Required tools including a fuse extracting unit, clamp meter, and insulation gloves are
available.

Procedure
Step 1 Reinstall battery fuses in the DCDU using a fuse extracting unit.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 322


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-47 Positions of battery fuses

(1) Battery fuses

----End

10.9.2 Manually Connecting the DG Supply


Prerequisites

Never allow sparks, flames, and inflammable objects to be close to a DG because this may
cause fire or explosions.

Check according to the following table before powering on and commissioning the DG.

Check Expected Result


Item
Appearanc  No engine oil leaks.
e  No fuel leaks.
 No coolant leaks.
 No component is damaged or lost.
 No fastener is loose, lost, or damaged.
 No component is cracked, worn out, or damaged and no connector is
damaged or corroded.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 323


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Check Expected Result


Item
 The EMERGENCY STOP button is in the self-lock state, and the load
circuit breaker is in a proper position.
 No hose is cracked, worn out, damaged, or stuck.
Fuel, lube Levels of fuel, lube oil, and engine coolant are within the normal range.
oil, and
coolant
Battery The battery voltage is greater than 12 V DC.
voltage

Procedure (EPM100-M2B, EPM120-M2D, EPM140-M2B, EPM140-M2C,


EPM160-M2B, EPM160-M2C, EPM160-M2D, and EPM200-M2B)
Step 1 Exhaust air from fuel pipes.
 Exhausting air from fuel pipes (EPM100-M2B, EPM120-M2D, EPM160-M2C, and
EPM160-M2D)
a. Loosen the air exhaust screw on the fuel filter.

Figure 10-48 Air exhaust screw

(1) Fuel filter

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 324


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

b. Repeatedly pinch the hand feed pump on the fuel transfer pump until the fuel flows
through the air exhaust screw has no bubbles.

Figure 10-49 Hand feed pump

(1) Hand feed pump

c. Tighten the air exhaust screw on the fuel filter.


 Exhausting air from fuel pipes (EPM140-M2B, EPM140-M2C, and EPM160-M2B)
a. Loosen the air exhaust screw on the fuel filter.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 325


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-50 Air exhaust screw

b. Press the hand feed pump up and down until the fuel flowing out of the air exhaust
screw has no bubbles, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 326


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-51 Exhausting air from fuel pipes

(1) Hand feed pump

c. Tighten the air exhaust screw on the fuel filter.


 Exhausting air from fuel pipes (EPM200-M2B)
a. Loose the air exhaust screw from the fuel filter and fuel injection pump.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 327


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-52 Air exhaust screw

(1) Fuel filter

b. Press the hand feed pump up and down until the fuel flows through the air exhaust
screw has no bubbles.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 328


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-53 Exhausting air from fuel pipes

(1) Hand feed pump

c. Tighten the air exhaust screw on the fuel filter.


Step 2 Start the DG manually.
1. Rotate the EMERGENCY button until it is ejected.
2. Check that the DG AC output circuit breaker is OFF.
3. Turn on the power switch for the DG battery charger.
4. Set the GMU to manual mode, and then press the RESET button on the GMU panel to
clear alarms. When Gen-Set is Ready, press the START button to manually start the
DG.

Figure 10-54 Starting the DG manually

Step 3 Check the DG output voltage, as shown in the following figure.


1. Press I/O on the GMU panel.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 329


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

2. Open the door of the GMB and check that the DG output voltage is in the range of 207 V
AC to 253 V AC using a clamp meter.

Figure 10-55 Checking the DG output voltage (EPM100-M2B)

Figure 10-56 Checking the DG output voltage (EPM120-M2D, EPM160-M2C, and


EPM160-M2D)

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 330


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-57 Checking the DG output voltage (EPM140-M2B, EPM140-M2C, EPM160-M2B,


and EPM200-M2B)

Step 4 After checking that the DG can start properly, set the DG to work in automatic mode on the
GMU.

Figure 10-58 Setting the DG working mode

Step 5 Switch the DG AC output circuit breaker to ON.

If a third-party DG is used onsite, manually start the DG according to the DG manual.

----End

Procedure (EPM100-M2E, EPM100-M2H, EPM115-M2A, and EPM140-M2D)


Step 1 Prepare for starting the DG.
1. Rotate the EMERGENCY button until it is ejected.
2. Check that the DG AC output circuit breaker is OFF.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 331


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

3. Turn on the power switch for the DG battery charger.


4. Set the GMU to work in manual mode.

Figure 10-59 Starting the DG manually

Step 2 Exhaust air from fuel pipes.


1. When you start the DG for the first time, set Prestart Time/PreFuel Time on the GMU
to 120s so that the DG automatically exhausts air from fuel pipes during startup. Path:
Settings > Engine Setting > Prestart Time/PreFuel Time

 In GMU software V322 and earlier versions, Prestart Time is displayed. In the V330 version,
PreFuel Time is displayed.
 Path for viewing the GMU software version: Main Menu > Product Info > Software.
 The initial GMU password is 1111.
2. Press START on the GMU panel to start the DG.
3. After the DG normally starts, set Prestart Time/PreFuel Time to 15s.
Step 3 Check the DG output voltage.
1. Press I/O on the GMU panel.
2. Open the door of the GMB and check that the DG output voltage is in the correct voltage
range using a clamp meter.
− EPM100-M2E, EPM100-M2H, and EPM140-M2D output voltage range: 207–253
V AC
− EPM115-M2A output voltage range: 99–121 V AC

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 332


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-60 Checking the DG output voltage (EPM100-M2E, EPM100-M2H, and


EPM140-M2D)

Figure 10-61 Checking the DG output voltage (EPM115-M2A)

Step 4 If the DG works properly, switch the DG AC output circuit breaker to ON.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 333


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

If a third-party DG is used onsite, manually start the DG according to the DG manual.

----End

10.9.3 Connecting the Battery Supply (Lithium Battery)


Context
After AC power is switched on, the lithium battery supply is automatically connected.

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the RUN indicator on each lithium battery is steady on.
 If the RUN indicator is steady on, communication is proper.
 If the RUN indicator blinks fast, the ESM fails to communicate with the host.
 If the RUN indicator is off, check and correct the ESM cable connections. Use a
multimeter to measure the voltage at the + and – output ports of the ESM. Ensure that
the voltage is positive and in the range of 43.2 V DC to 56.4 V DC. Replace the ESM if
the cable connections are correct, the battery port voltage is in the range of 43.2 V DC to
56.4 V DC, but the indicator is still off.

When the ESM fails to communicate with the host:


1. Check whether the ESM communications cable is properly connected.
2. Check whether the ESM terminal build-out resistor is properly connected.
3. If both are proper, replace the ESM.

----End

10.9.4 Setting Parameters (Lithium Battery)


Context
After the SMU is powered on for the first time and the system automatically identifies lithium
batteries, the SMU automatically restarts.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the parameters based on the following table.

Table 10-187 Parameter settings

Item Setting

Language English
Enter Password 000001

Step 2 After Setup Wizard Init is displayed on the LCD, set the following parameters.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 334


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-188 Parameter settings

Item Setting
Time Zone Set to the local time zone.
Date and Time Set to the local date and time.
Batter Factory AGISSON
Battery Model ESM-A
The SMU may restart. Yes

Step 3 When the SMU is running properly, set the language, date, and time in the following menu
paths.

Table 10-189 Setting the language, date, and time

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters Settings Local Parameters Language - Select a desired
language.
Date and Time Time Zone Set to the local time
zone.
Date and Time Set to the local date
and time.

Step 4 Set sensor parameters.

Table 10-190 Setting sensor parameters


Main Second- Third-Lev Fourth-Level Menu Default Value Setting
Menu Level el Menu
Menu
Paramet Setup Sensor Water Sensor - Set as required.
ers Parameter Config
Settings Smoke Sensor - Set as required.
Ambient Temp. Sensor - Set as required.
Ambient Humi. Sensor - Set as required.

Step 5 Set the dry contact alarm for the battery cabinet door status sensor.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 335


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

This step is required only if a door status sensor is installed for the battery cabinet.

Table 10-191 Setting the dry contact alarm for the battery cabinet door status sensor

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Alarm Parameters DI Dry Contact DIN4 Alm. Close Open
Settings Para. Cond.

Step 6 Set the dry contact alarm for the inverter.

Table 10-192 Setting the dry contact alarm for the inverter

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Alarm Parameters DI Dry Contact DIN5 Alm. Close Open
Settings Para. Cond.

Step 7 Change the Wifi account password on the LCD.

Table 10-193 Changing Wifi account password

Main Menu Second-Level Menu Third-Level Menu Default Value Setting


Parameters Wifi settings Wifi SSID HUAWEI_SITE Change the account
settings password as required.
Wifi Password Changeme

Step 8 Set the address DIP switch of AIM to 000.

Set the address DIP switch of AIM to 000 if an AC meter is configured.

Figure 10-62 Setting the address DIP switch of AIM

Step 9 Set AIM parameters.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 336


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Set the parameters in this step only if an AC meter is configured.

Table 10-194 Setting AIM parameters

Main Menu Second-Level Menu Third-Level Menu Setting


Parameters settings AIM1 AC Source Mains

Step 10 Set the AC parameter for the DG.

Table 10-195 Setting the AC parameter for the DG

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 AC Power 3Ph4Wire Set as required.
Settings Supply Mode

Step 11 Set the number of DGs.

Table 10-196 Setting the number of DGs

Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameter Setup Parameter Basic Parameters DG Number 1 1
s Settings

Step 12 Switch the GMU power circuit breaker to ON.


Step 13 Set DG parameters.
1. Set the EPM100-M2B parameters.

Table 10-197 EPM100-M2B parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 10 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 337


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.83 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 58.0 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 5.2 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Time
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

2. Set the EPM100-M2E parameters.

Table 10-198 EPM100-M2E parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 10 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1250 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 338


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm


Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Time
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

3. Set the EPM100-M2H parameters.

Table 10-199 EPM100-M2H parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5kW 10kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999h 1250h
Time Maint Per 500h 4320h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50m 0.58m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00m 1.80m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00m 0.81m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0cm 57.7cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0cm 2.7cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0cm 3.0cm
Alarm
Level Chg 10.0Min 10.0Min
Time

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 339


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Level Filt Time 30.0Min 30.0Min

4. Set the EPM115-M2A parameters.

Table 10-200 EPM115-M2A parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 11.5 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.57 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.83 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 56.2 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 5.2 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

5. Set the EPM120-M2D parameters.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 340


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-201 EPM120-M2D parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 12 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.57 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 2.20 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 56.2 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 5.2 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

6. Set the EPM140-M2B parameters.

Table 10-202 EPM140-M2B parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 14 kW


Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 341


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

7. Set the EPM140-M2C parameters.

Table 10-203 EPM140-M2C parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 14 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1250 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No No
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 342


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%


Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

8. Set the EPM140-M2D parameters.

Table 10-204 EPM140-M2D parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 14 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1250 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 343


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

9. Set the EPM160-M2B parameters.

Table 10-205 EPM160-M2B parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 16 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

10. Set the EPM160-M2C parameters.

Table 10-206 EPM160-M2C parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 16 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 344


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.57 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 2.20 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 56.2 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 5.2 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

11. Set the EPM160-M2D parameters.

Table 10-207 EPM160-M2D parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 16 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.57 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 2.20 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 345


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 56.2 cm


Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 5.2 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

12. Set the EPM200-M2B parameters.

Table 10-208 EPM200-M2B parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 20 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 2.20 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 346


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

Step 14 Set parameters for the reused DG.

Table 10-209 Setting parameters for the reused DG

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW Set based on site
Settings Power requirements.
Max Power 80.0% Set based on site
Ratio requirements.
Over Volt Prot 120.0% Set based on site
requirements.
Under Volt Prot 80.0% Set based on site
requirements.
Batt Undervolt 10.0 V Set based on site
Thro requirements.
Routine Maint 9999 h Set based on site
requirements.
Timed Maint Per 500 h Set based on site
requirements.

Step 15 Set communications parameters.


 Setting communications parameters for IP networking
a. Set the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address on the LCD.

Table 10-210 IP parameters

Main Second-L Third-Le Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu evel vel Menu Menu
Menu
Parameters Comm. Network IP Address 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter based on
Settings Parameters Parameters the address assigned by the
network administrator.
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Set this parameter based on
the address assigned by the
network administrator.
Default Gateway 192.168.0.1 Set this parameter based on
the address assigned by the

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 347


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Second-L Third-Le Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu evel vel Menu Menu
Menu
network administrator.
NOTE
If a WiFi module is installed on
the SMU, the default gateway
cannot be set to 192.168.0.1;
otherwise, it will conflict with
the WiFi gateway.

b. Set IP addresses and port numbers for the active and standby NetEco servers on the
LCD.

Table 10-211 NetEco parameters

Main Second- Third-Le Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Level vel Menu Value
Menu Menu
Parameters Comm. Network NetEco Primary 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the IP
Settings Parameter Parameter IP address of the active NetEco
s s server.
NetEco Backup IP 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the IP
address of the standby NetEco
server.
NetEco Port 31220 Set a port number for the
Number NetEco.

 Set wireless communications parameters.


a. Check whether the default wireless communications parameters on the LCD are
consistent with the communication configurations of the carrier network that the
SIM card belongs to. If they are inconsistent, modify the parameters according to
the actual configurations of the carrier network.

Table 10-212 Checking wireless communications parameters

Main Second-Lev Third-Level Fourth-Lev Default Value Setting


Menu el Menu Menu el Menu
Parameters Comm. Mobile Data Carrier Automatic Automatic, Others
Settings Parameters Operator
SIMn Acc - A maximum of 28
Point Name characters, including
NOTE lowercase English letters (a
This
to z), uppercase English
parameter is letters (A to Z), digits (0 to
displayed 9), and special characters
only when

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 348


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Second-Lev Third-Level Fourth-Lev Default Value Setting


Menu el Menu Menu el Menu
Carrier (@_#*-.).
Operator is
set to
Others.

SIMn -
Access
Point No
NOTE
This
parameter is
displayed
only when
Carrier
Operator is
set to
Others.

SIMn User -
Name
NOTE
This
parameter is
displayed
only when
Carrier
Operator is
set to
Others.

SIMn User - A maximum of 27


Password characters, including
NOTE lowercase English letters (a
This
to z), uppercase English
parameter is letters (A to Z), digits (0 to
displayed 9), and special characters
only when (@_#-.).
Carrier
Operator is It is recommended that the
set to password contain at least
Others. two types of characters and
the length exceed six
characters.

b. Set IP addresses and port numbers for the active and standby NetEco servers on the
LCD.

Table 10-213 NetEco parameters

Main Menu Second-Le Third-Leve Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


vel Menu l Menu Menu
Parameters Comm. Network NetEco Primary 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the
Settings Parameters Parameters IP IP address of the active

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 349


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Le Third-Leve Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


vel Menu l Menu Menu
NetEco server
NetEco Backup 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the
IP IP address of the standby
NetEco server.
NetEco Port 31220 Set a port number for the
Number NetEco.

 Set BBU in-band networking parameters.


a. Set BBU in-band networking parameters.

Table 10-214 BBU in-band networking parameters

Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Fifth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu Menu Menu
Parameters Comm. Serial Port Northbound Port Mode Manual
Settings Parameters
Protocol Type M/S Protocol
M/S Protocol Baud Rate - 9600
Comm. Address - 3

b. Set IP addresses and port numbers for the active and standby NetEco servers on the
LCD.

Table 10-215 NetEco parameters

Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Comm. Network NetEco Primary 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter
Settings Parameters Parameters IP to the IP address of
the active NetEco
server.
NetEco Backup 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter
IP to the IP address of
the standby NetEco
server.
NetEco Port 31220 Set a port number
Number for the NetEco.

----End

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 350


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

10.9.5 Starting a DG Self-Check


Context
 There is no battery alarm on the Monitoring, and battery power supply is normal.
 If the mains power is used, ensure that the mains AC input circuit breaker on the ATS is
OFF.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the DG to work in automatic mode on the GMU.

Figure 10-63 Setting the DG working mode

Step 2 Start a DG self-check.

Table 10-216 Starting a DG self-check

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Running Control EPS-D DG Self Check Confirm Self Check Yes

The auto check process is as follows:


1. About 2 minutes after starting DG 1, the Monitoring checks the DG running status to determine
whether the DG has started.
2. About 2 minutes after shutting down DG 1, the Monitoring checks the DG running status to
determine whether the DG has shut down.
After the auto check is complete, the SMU displays the results on the screen:
 Control DG Number (0/1)
 DG 1 Start Result (Success/Fail)
 DG 1 Stop Result (Success/Fail)
A single-DG self-check takes about 4 minutes

Step 3 Verify that the self-check result is consistent with the actual number of DGs and the DGs
work properly. If the DG self-check fails, refer to the DG manual for troubleshooting and DG
cable connection checking.
----End

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 351


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

10.9.6 Connecting the Load Supply


Procedure
Step 1 Switch on all load circuit breakers one by one. During the process, measure the busbar voltage
using a clamp meter after switching on each circuit breaker. Then continue to switch on
another circuit breaker after ensuring that the busbar voltage is between 44.5 V DC and 57.6
V DC.
----End

10.10 Single-DG Hybrid Power Supply Solution (Lithium


Battery + Lead-Acid Battery)
10.10.1 Connecting the Battery Supply (Lead-Acid Battery)
Prerequisites
Required tools including a fuse extracting unit, clamp meter, and insulation gloves are
available.

Procedure
Step 1 Check as follows before connecting the battery supply.
1. Flip the battery switch on the DCDU to AUTO.
2. Switch the load circuit breaker on the DCDU to OFF.
Step 2 Check that the battery string voltage is in the range of 43.2 V DC to 56.4 V DC using a clamp
meter.
Step 3 Connect the battery supply.
1. Reinstall battery fuse 2 in the DCDU using a fuse extracting unit.

Before reinstalling a fuse, switch the AC input circuit breaker on the ACDU to OFF.
Otherwise, the fuse will produce sparks during operation.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 352


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-64 Position of battery fuse 2

(1) Battery fuse 2

2. Flip the DCDU battery switch to MANUAL.


Step 4 Check that the busbar voltage is in the range of 43.2 V DC to 56.4 V DC using a clamp meter.
----End

10.10.2 Setting Parameters (Lithium Battery + Lead-Acid Battery)


Procedure
Step 1 Set the parameters based on the following table.

Table 10-217 Parameter settings

Item Setting
Language English
Enter Password 000001

Step 2 After Setup Wizard Init is displayed on the LCD, set the following parameters.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 353


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-218 Parameter settings

Item Setting
Time Zone Set to the local time zone.
Date and Time Set to the local date and time.
Batter Factory AGISSON
Battery Model FCB-A
NOTE
Set the battery model for lead-acid batteries.
There is no need to set this parameter for lithium
batteries.

The SMU may restart. Yes

Step 3 After the SMU restarts, set parameters according to the following table.

Table 10-219 Parameter settings

Item Setting

Language English
Enter Password 000001
Battery 1 Connected No
Battery 2 Connected Yes
Single-String Cap. Rated capacity of the batteries in a battery
string.
NOTE
 This parameter indicates the rated capacity of
lead-acid batteries.
 The batteries controlled by one circuit
breaker or fuse are called a battery string.

Step 4 When the SMU is running properly, set the language, date, and time in the following menu
paths.

Table 10-220 Setting the language, date, and time

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Parameters Settings Local Parameters Language - Select a desired


language.
Date and Time Time Zone Set to the local time
zone.
Date and Time Set to the local date

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 354


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu
and time.

Step 5 Set hybrid scenario parameters.

Table 10-221 Setting hybrid scenario parameters

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Settin


Menu Menu Menu Value g
Parameters Setup Parameter Basic Parameters Hybrid Scenario No Yes
Settings

Step 6 Set iMix Enable to Enable.

Table 10-222 Setting the iMix Enable

Main Menu Second-Lev Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


el Menu Menu Menu
Parameters Power Basic iMix Enable Disable Enable
Settings System Parameters

Step 7 Set the lithium battery connection mode.

Table 10-223 Setting the lithium battery connection mode

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters Li Battery Basic Parameters Battery 1 Connected Yes
Settings NOTE Battery 2 Connected No
This parameter is
displayed only when Priority Charger Disable, Enable
Battery Model is set
to ESM-A. Discharger Mode Auto, Constant Volt
Dischg
Cycle Mode Li-Ion and Acid Cycle:
Lithium batteries and
lead-acid batteries
switch between each
other to discharge based
on the configured
discharge capacity.
NOTE
This parameter is
displayed when

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 355


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Discharger Mode is set
to Constant Volt Dischg.
When Discharger Mode
is set to Auto, both
lithium batteries and
lead-acid batteries
discharge.

Li-Ion Primary:
Lithium batteries
discharge preferentially.
When lithium batteries
discharge to the
configured depth of
discharge (DOD), they
switch to lead-acid
batteries for discharge.
NOTE
This parameter is
displayed when
Discharger Mode is set
to Constant Volt Dischg.
When Discharger Mode
is set to Auto, both
lithium batteries and
lead-acid batteries
discharge.

Li-Ion Standby:
Lead-acid batteries
discharge preferentially.
When lead-acid
batteries discharge to
the configured DOD,
they switch to lithium
batteries for discharge.
Cycle Factor Set based on site
NOTE requirements.
This parameter is
displayed when
Cycle Mode is set to
Li-Ion and Acid
Cycle.

Step 8 Set lead-acid battery parameters.

Table 10-224 Setting lead-acid battery parameters

Main Menu Second-Lev Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


el Menu Menu Menu
Parameters Acid Battery Basic Battery Cable Set based on site requirements.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 356


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Lev Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


el Menu Menu Menu
Settings Parameters Length NOTE
 When each battery string is connected to the
Batt Cable CS RTN+ busbar over one cable, set Cable
Area Length to half of the total length of cables
between both ends of a battery string and the
positive and negative busbars, and set Cable
CSA to the cross-sectional area of the cable.
 When each battery string is connected to the
RTN+ busbar over two cables, set Cable
Length to half of the total length of a suite of
cables between both ends of a battery string
and the positive and negative busbars, and set
Cable CSA to the sum of the cross-sectional
areas of the two cables.

Step 9 Set sensor parameters.

Table 10-225 Setting sensor parameters

Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Menu Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Setup Sensor Config Water Sensor - Set as required.
Settings Parameter
Smoke Sensor - Set as required.
Ambient Temp. - Set as required.
Sensor
Ambient Humi. - Set as required.
Sensor
Batt. Temp. Sensor 1 - Set as required.

Step 10 Set the dry contact alarm for the battery cabinet door status sensor.

This step is required only if a door status sensor is installed for the battery cabinet.

Table 10-226 Setting the dry contact alarm for the battery cabinet door status sensor

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Alarm Parameters DI Dry Contact DIN4 Alm. Close Open
Settings Para. Cond.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 357


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Step 11 Set the dry contact alarm for the inverter.

Table 10-227 Setting the dry contact alarm for the inverter

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Alarm Parameters DI Dry Contact DIN5 Alm. Close Open
Settings Para. Cond.

Step 12 Change the Wifi account password on the LCD.

Table 10-228 Changing Wifi account password

Main Menu Second-Level Menu Third-Level Menu Default Value Setting


Parameters Wifi settings Wifi SSID HUAWEI_SITE Change the account
settings password as required.
Wifi Password Changeme

Step 13 Set the address DIP switch of AIM to 000.

Set the address DIP switch of AIM to 000 if an AC meter is configured.

Figure 10-65 Setting the address DIP switch of AIM

Step 14 Set AIM parameters.

Set the parameters in this step only if an AC meter is configured.

Table 10-229 Setting AIM parameters

Main Menu Second-Level Menu Third-Level Menu Setting


Parameters settings AIM1 AC Source DG

Step 15 Set the number of DGs.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 358


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-230 Setting the number of DGs

Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameter Setup Parameter Basic Parameters DG Number 1 1
s Settings

Step 16 Set the AC parameter for the DG.

Table 10-231 Setting the AC parameter for the DG

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 AC Power 3Ph4Wire Set as required.
Settings Supply Mode

Step 17 Switch the GMU power circuit breaker to ON.


Step 18 Set DG parameters.
1. Set the EPM100-M2B parameters.

Table 10-232 EPM100-M2B parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 10 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.83 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 58.0 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 5.2 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 359


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%


Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Time
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

2. Set the EPM100-M2E parameters.

Table 10-233 EPM100-M2E parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 10 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1250 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Time
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 360


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

3. Set the EPM100-M2H parameters.

Table 10-234 EPM100-M2H parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5kW 10kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999h 1250h
Time Maint Per 500h 4320h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50m 0.58m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00m 1.80m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00m 0.81m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0cm 57.7cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0cm 2.7cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0cm 3.0cm
Alarm
Level Chg 10.0Min 10.0Min
Time
Level Filt Time 30.0Min 30.0Min

4. Set the EPM115-M2A parameters.

Table 10-235 EPM115-M2A parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 11.5 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 361


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Auto Add Oil No Yes


Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.57 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.83 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 56.2 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 5.2 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

5. Set the EPM120-M2D parameters.

Table 10-236 EPM120-M2D parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 12 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.57 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 2.20 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 362


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 56.2 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 5.2 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

6. Set the EPM140-M2B parameters.

Table 10-237 EPM140-M2B parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 14 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 363


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min


Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

7. Set the EPM140-M2C parameters.

Table 10-238 EPM140-M2C parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 14 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1250 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No No
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

8. Set the EPM140-M2D parameters.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 364


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-239 EPM140-M2D parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 14 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1250 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

9. Set the EPM160-M2B parameters.

Table 10-240 EPM160-M2B parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 16 kW


Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 365


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

10. Set the EPM160-M2C parameters.

Table 10-241 EPM160-M2C parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 16 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.57 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 2.20 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 56.2 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 5.2 cm

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 366


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%


Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

11. Set the EPM160-M2D parameters.

Table 10-242 EPM160-M2D parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 16 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.57 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 2.20 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 56.2 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 5.2 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 367


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

12. Set the EPM200-M2B parameters.

Table 10-243 EPM200-M2B parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 20 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 2.20 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

Step 19 Set parameters for the reused DG.

Table 10-244 Setting parameters for the reused DG

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW Set based on site
Settings Power requirements.
Max Power 80.0% Set based on site
Ratio requirements.
Over Volt Prot 120.0% Set based on site
requirements.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 368


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value

Under Volt Prot 80.0% Set based on site


requirements.
Batt Undervolt 10.0 V Set based on site
Thro requirements.
Routine Maint 9999 h Set based on site
requirements.
Timed Maint Per 500 h Set based on site
requirements.

Step 20 Set communications parameters.


 Setting communications parameters for IP networking
a. Set the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address on the LCD.

Table 10-245 IP parameters

Main Second-L Third-Le Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu evel vel Menu Menu
Menu
Parameters Comm. Network IP Address 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter based on
Settings Parameters Parameters the address assigned by the
network administrator.
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Set this parameter based on
the address assigned by the
network administrator.
Default Gateway 192.168.0.1 Set this parameter based on
the address assigned by the
network administrator.
NOTE
If a WiFi module is installed on
the SMU, the default gateway
cannot be set to 192.168.0.1;
otherwise, it will conflict with
the WiFi gateway.

b. Set IP addresses and port numbers for the active and standby NetEco servers on the
LCD.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 369


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-246 NetEco parameters

Main Second- Third-Le Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Level vel Menu Value
Menu Menu
Parameters Comm. Network NetEco Primary 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the IP
Settings Parameter Parameter IP address of the active NetEco
s s server.
NetEco Backup IP 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the IP
address of the standby NetEco
server.
NetEco Port 31220 Set a port number for the
Number NetEco.

 Set wireless communications parameters.


a. Check whether the default wireless communications parameters on the LCD are
consistent with the communication configurations of the carrier network that the
SIM card belongs to. If they are inconsistent, modify the parameters according to
the actual configurations of the carrier network.

Table 10-247 Checking wireless communications parameters

Main Second-Lev Third-Level Fourth-Le Default Value Setting


Menu el Menu Menu vel Menu
Parameters Comm. Mobile Data Carrier Automatic Automatic, Others
Settings Parameters Operator
SIMn Acc - A maximum of 28
Point Name characters, including
NOTE lowercase English letters (a
This
to z), uppercase English
parameter letters (A to Z), digits (0 to
is displayed 9), and special characters
only when (@_#*-.).
Carrier
Operator
is set to
Others.

SIMn -
Access
Point No
NOTE
This
parameter
is displayed
only when
Carrier
Operator
is set to
Others.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 370


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Second-Lev Third-Level Fourth-Le Default Value Setting


Menu el Menu Menu vel Menu
SIMn User -
Name
NOTE
This
parameter
is displayed
only when
Carrier
Operator
is set to
Others.

SIMn User - A maximum of 27


Password characters, including
NOTE lowercase English letters (a
This
to z), uppercase English
parameter letters (A to Z), digits (0 to
is displayed 9), and special characters
only when (@_#-.).
Carrier
Operator It is recommended that the
is set to password contain at least
Others. two types of characters and
the length exceed six
characters.

b. Set IP addresses and port numbers for the active and standby NetEco servers on the
LCD.

Table 10-248 NetEco parameters

Main Menu Second-Le Third-Leve Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


vel Menu l Menu Menu
Parameters Comm. Network NetEco Primary 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the
Settings Parameters Parameters IP IP address of the active
NetEco server
NetEco Backup 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the
IP IP address of the standby
NetEco server.
NetEco Port 31220 Set a port number for the
Number NetEco.

 Set BBU in-band networking parameters.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 371


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-249 BBU in-band networking parameters

Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Fifth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu Menu Menu
Parameters Comm. Serial Port Northbound Port Mode Manual
Settings Parameters
Protocol Type M/S Protocol
M/S Protocol Baud Rate - 9600
Comm. Address - 3

----End

10.10.3 Manually Connecting the DG Supply


Prerequisites

Never allow sparks, flames, and inflammable objects to be close to a DG because this may
cause fire or explosions.

Check according to the following table before powering on and commissioning the DG.

Check Expected Result


Item
Appearanc  No engine oil leaks.
e  No fuel leaks.
 No coolant leaks.
 No component is damaged or lost.
 No fastener is loose, lost, or damaged.
 No component is cracked, worn out, or damaged and no connector is
damaged or corroded.
 The EMERGENCY STOP button is in the self-lock state, and the load
circuit breaker is in a proper position.
 No hose is cracked, worn out, damaged, or stuck.
Fuel, lube Levels of fuel, lube oil, and engine coolant are within the normal range.
oil, and
coolant
Battery The battery voltage is greater than 12 V DC.
voltage

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 372


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Procedure (EPM100-M2B, EPM120-M2D, EPM140-M2B, EPM140-M2C,


EPM160-M2B, EPM160-M2C, EPM160-M2D, and EPM200-M2B)
Step 1 Exhaust air from fuel pipes.
 Exhausting air from fuel pipes (EPM100-M2B, EPM120-M2D, EPM160-M2C, and
EPM160-M2D)
a. Loosen the air exhaust screw on the fuel filter.

Figure 10-66 Air exhaust screw

(1) Fuel filter

b. Repeatedly pinch the hand feed pump on the fuel transfer pump until the fuel flows
through the air exhaust screw has no bubbles.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 373


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-67 Hand feed pump

(1) Hand feed pump

c. Tighten the air exhaust screw on the fuel filter.


 Exhausting air from fuel pipes (EPM140-M2B, EPM140-M2C, and EPM160-M2B)
a. Loosen the air exhaust screw on the fuel filter.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 374


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-68 Air exhaust screw

b. Press the hand feed pump up and down until the fuel flowing out of the air exhaust
screw has no bubbles, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 375


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-69 Exhausting air from fuel pipes

(1) Hand feed pump

c. Tighten the air exhaust screw on the fuel filter.


 Exhausting air from fuel pipes (EPM200-M2B)
a. Loose the air exhaust screw from the fuel filter and fuel injection pump.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 376


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-70 Air exhaust screw

(1) Fuel filter

b. Press the hand feed pump up and down until the fuel flows through the air exhaust
screw has no bubbles.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 377


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-71 Exhausting air from fuel pipes

(1) Hand feed pump

c. Tighten the air exhaust screw on the fuel filter.


Step 2 Start the DG manually.
1. Rotate the EMERGENCY button until it is ejected.
2. Check that the DG AC output circuit breaker is OFF.
3. Turn on the power switch for the DG battery charger.
4. Set the GMU to manual mode, and then press the RESET button on the GMU panel to
clear alarms. When Gen-Set is Ready, press the START button to manually start the
DG.

Figure 10-72 Starting the DG manually

Step 3 Check the DG output voltage, as shown in the following figure.


1. Press I/O on the GMU panel.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 378


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

2. Open the door of the GMB and check that the DG output voltage is in the range of 207 V
AC to 253 V AC using a clamp meter.

Figure 10-73 Checking the DG output voltage (EPM100-M2B)

Figure 10-74 Checking the DG output voltage (EPM120-M2D, EPM160-M2C, and


EPM160-M2D)

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 379


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-75 Checking the DG output voltage (EPM140-M2B, EPM140-M2C, EPM160-M2B,


and EPM200-M2B)

Step 4 After checking that the DG can start properly, set the DG to work in automatic mode on the
GMU.

Figure 10-76 Setting the DG working mode

Step 5 Switch the DG AC output circuit breaker to ON.

If a third-party DG is used onsite, manually start the DG according to the DG manual.

----End

Procedure (EPM100-M2E, EPM100-M2H, EPM115-M2A, and EPM140-M2D)


Step 1 Prepare for starting the DG.
1. Rotate the EMERGENCY button until it is ejected.
2. Check that the DG AC output circuit breaker is OFF.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 380


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

3. Turn on the power switch for the DG battery charger.


4. Set the GMU to work in manual mode.

Figure 10-77 Starting the DG manually

Step 2 Exhaust air from fuel pipes.


1. When you start the DG for the first time, set Prestart Time/PreFuel Time on the GMU
to 120s so that the DG automatically exhausts air from fuel pipes during startup. Path:
Settings > Engine Setting > Prestart Time/PreFuel Time

 In GMU software V322 and earlier versions, Prestart Time is displayed. In the V330 version,
PreFuel Time is displayed.
 Path for viewing the GMU software version: Main Menu > Product Info > Software.
 The initial GMU password is 1111.
2. Press START on the GMU panel to start the DG.
3. After the DG normally starts, set Prestart Time/PreFuel Time to 15s.
Step 3 Check the DG output voltage.
1. Press I/O on the GMU panel.
2. Open the door of the GMB and check that the DG output voltage is in the correct voltage
range using a clamp meter.
− EPM100-M2E, EPM100-M2H, and EPM140-M2D output voltage range: 207–253
V AC
− EPM115-M2A output voltage range: 99–121 V AC

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 381


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-78 Checking the DG output voltage (EPM100-M2E, EPM100-M2H, and


EPM140-M2D)

Figure 10-79 Checking the DG output voltage (EPM115-M2A)

Step 4 If the DG works properly, switch the DG AC output circuit breaker to ON.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 382


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

If a third-party DG is used onsite, manually start the DG according to the DG manual.

----End

10.10.4 Starting a DG Self-Check


Context
 There is no battery alarm on the Monitoring, and battery power supply is normal.
 If the mains power is used, ensure that the mains AC input circuit breaker on the ATS is
OFF.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the DG to work in automatic mode on the GMU.

Figure 10-80 Setting the DG working mode

Step 2 Start a DG self-check.

Table 10-250 Starting a DG self-check

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Running Control EPS-D DG Self Check Confirm Self Check Yes

The auto check process is as follows:


1. About 2 minutes after starting DG 1, the Monitoring checks the DG running status to determine
whether the DG has started.
2. About 2 minutes after shutting down DG 1, the Monitoring checks the DG running status to
determine whether the DG has shut down.
After the auto check is complete, the SMU displays the results on the screen:
 Control DG Number (0/1)
 DG 1 Start Result (Success/Fail)
 DG 1 Stop Result (Success/Fail)
A single-DG self-check takes about 4 minutes

Step 3 Verify that the self-check result is consistent with the actual number of DGs and the DGs
work properly. If the DG self-check fails, refer to the DG manual for troubleshooting and DG
cable connection checking.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 383


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

----End

10.10.5 Connecting the Battery Supply (Lithium Battery)


Prerequisites
Required tools including a fuse extracting unit, clamp meter, and insulation gloves are
available.

Procedure
Step 1 Reinstall battery fuse 1 in the DCDU using a fuse extracting unit.

Figure 10-81 Position of battery fuse 1

(1) Battery fuse 1

Step 2 Check whether the RUN indicator on the lithium battery is steady on.
 If the RUN indicator is steady on, communication is normal.
 If the RUN indicator blinks fast, the lithium battery fails to communicate with the host.
 If the RUN indicator is off, check and correct the battery cable connections. Use a
multimeter to measure the voltage at the + and – output ports of the lithium battery.
Ensure that the voltage is positive and in the range of 43.2 V DC to 56.4 V DC. Replace
the lithium battery if the cable connections are correct, the battery port voltage is in the
range of 43.2 V DC to 56.4 V DC, but the indicator is still off.

If the lithium battery fails to communicate with the host:

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 384


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

1. Check whether the battery communications cable is properly connected.


2. Check whether the terminal build-out resistor of the battery is properly connected.
3. If both are normal, replace the battery.

----End

10.10.6 Connecting the Load Supply


Procedure
Step 1 Switch on all load circuit breakers one by one. During the process, measure the busbar voltage
using a clamp meter after switching on each circuit breaker. Then continue to switch on
another circuit breaker after ensuring that the busbar voltage is between 44.5 V DC and 57.6
V DC.
----End

10.11 Dual-DG Hybrid Power Supply Solution


(Lithium-ion Battery)
10.11.1 Preparing for Power-On
Prerequisites
Required tools including a fuse extracting unit, clamp meter, and insulation gloves are
available.

Procedure
Step 1 Reinstall battery fuses in the DCDU using a fuse extracting unit.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 385


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-82 Positions of battery fuses

(1) Battery fuses

----End

10.11.2 Manually Connecting the DG Supply


Prerequisites

Never allow sparks, flames, and inflammable objects to be close to a DG because this may
cause fire or explosions.

Check according to the following table before powering on and commissioning the DG.

Check Expected Result


Item
Appearanc  No engine oil leaks.
e  No fuel leaks.
 No coolant leaks.
 No component is damaged or lost.
 No fastener is loose, lost, or damaged.
 No component is cracked, worn out, or damaged and no connector is
damaged or corroded.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 386


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Check Expected Result


Item
 The EMERGENCY STOP button is in the self-lock state, and the load
circuit breaker is in a proper position.
 No hose is cracked, worn out, damaged, or stuck.
Fuel, lube Levels of fuel, lube oil, and engine coolant are within the normal range.
oil, and
coolant
Battery The battery voltage is greater than 12 V DC.
voltage

Procedure (EPM100-M2B, EPM120-M2D, EPM140-M2B, EPM140-M2C,


EPM160-M2B, EPM160-M2C, EPM160-M2D, and EPM200-M2B)
Step 1 Exhaust air from fuel pipes.
 Exhausting air from fuel pipes (EPM100-M2B, EPM120-M2D, EPM160-M2C, and
EPM160-M2D)
a. Loosen the air exhaust screw on the fuel filter.

Figure 10-83 Air exhaust screw

(1) Fuel filter

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 387


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

b. Repeatedly pinch the hand feed pump on the fuel transfer pump until the fuel flows
through the air exhaust screw has no bubbles.

Figure 10-84 Hand feed pump

(1) Hand feed pump

c. Tighten the air exhaust screw on the fuel filter.


 Exhausting air from fuel pipes (EPM140-M2B, EPM140-M2C, and EPM160-M2B)
a. Loosen the air exhaust screw on the fuel filter.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 388


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-85 Air exhaust screw

b. Press the hand feed pump up and down until the fuel flowing out of the air exhaust
screw has no bubbles, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 389


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-86 Exhausting air from fuel pipes

(1) Hand feed pump

c. Tighten the air exhaust screw on the fuel filter.


 Exhausting air from fuel pipes (EPM200-M2B)
a. Loose the air exhaust screw from the fuel filter and fuel injection pump.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 390


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-87 Air exhaust screw

(1) Fuel filter

b. Press the hand feed pump up and down until the fuel flows through the air exhaust
screw has no bubbles.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 391


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-88 Exhausting air from fuel pipes

(1) Hand feed pump

c. Tighten the air exhaust screw on the fuel filter.


Step 2 Start the DG manually.
1. Rotate the EMERGENCY button until it is ejected.
2. Check that the DG AC output circuit breaker is OFF.
3. Turn on the power switch for the DG battery charger.
4. Set the GMU to manual mode, and then press the RESET button on the GMU panel to
clear alarms. When Gen-Set is Ready, press the START button to manually start the
DG.

Figure 10-89 Starting the DG manually

Step 3 Check the DG output voltage, as shown in the following figure.


1. Press I/O on the GMU panel.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 392


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

2. Open the door of the GMB and check that the DG output voltage is in the range of 207 V
AC to 253 V AC using a clamp meter.

Figure 10-90 Checking the DG output voltage (EPM100-M2B)

Figure 10-91 Checking the DG output voltage (EPM120-M2D, EPM160-M2C, and


EPM160-M2D)

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 393


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-92 Checking the DG output voltage (EPM140-M2B, EPM140-M2C, EPM160-M2B,


and EPM200-M2B)

Step 4 After checking that the DG can start properly, set the DG to work in automatic mode on the
GMU.

Figure 10-93 Setting the DG working mode

Step 5 Switch the DG AC output circuit breaker to ON.


Step 6 Switch the DG input circuit breaker on the ATS to ON.

If a third-party DG is used onsite, manually start the DG according to the DG manual.

----End

Procedure (EPM100-M2E, EPM120-M2H, EPM115-M2A, and EPM140-M2D)


Step 1 Prepare for starting the DG.
1. Rotate the EMERGENCY button until it is ejected.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 394


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

2. Check that the DG AC output circuit breaker is OFF.


3. Turn on the power switch for the DG battery charger.
4. Set the GMU to work in manual mode.

Figure 10-94 Starting the DG manually

Step 2 Exhaust air from fuel pipes.


1. When you start the DG for the first time, set Prestart Time/PreFuel Time on the GMU
to 120s so that the DG automatically exhausts air from fuel pipes during startup. Path:
Settings > Engine Setting > Prestart Time/PreFuel Time

 In GMU software V322 and earlier versions, Prestart Time is displayed. In the V330 version,
PreFuel Time is displayed.
 Path for viewing the GMU software version: Main Menu > Product Info > Software.
 The initial GMU password is 1111.
2. Press START on the GMU panel to start the DG.
3. After the DG normally starts, set Prestart Time/PreFuel Time to 15s.
Step 3 Check the DG output voltage.
1. Press I/O on the GMU panel.
2. Open the door of the GMB and check that the DG output voltage is in the correct voltage
range using a clamp meter.
− EPM100-M2E, EPM100-M2H, and EPM140-M2D output voltage range: 207–253
V AC
− EPM115-M2A output voltage range: 99–121 V AC

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 395


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-95 Checking the DG output voltage (EPM100-M2E, EPM100-M2H, and


EPM140-M2D)

Figure 10-96 Checking the DG output voltage (EPM115-M2A)

Step 4 If the DG works properly, switch the DG AC output circuit breaker to ON.
Step 5 Switch the DG input circuit breaker on the ATS to ON.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 396


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

If a third-party DG is used onsite, manually start the DG according to the DG manual.

----End

10.11.3 Connecting the Battery Supply (Lithium Battery)


Context
After AC power is switched on, the lithium battery supply is automatically connected.

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the RUN indicator on each lithium battery is steady on.
 If the RUN indicator is steady on, communication is proper.
 If the RUN indicator blinks fast, the ESM fails to communicate with the host.
 If the RUN indicator is off, check and correct the ESM cable connections. Use a
multimeter to measure the voltage at the + and – output ports of the ESM. Ensure that
the voltage is positive and in the range of 43.2 V DC to 56.4 V DC. Replace the ESM if
the cable connections are correct, the battery port voltage is in the range of 43.2 V DC to
56.4 V DC, but the indicator is still off.

When the ESM fails to communicate with the host:


1. Check whether the ESM communications cable is properly connected.
2. Check whether the ESM terminal build-out resistor is properly connected.
3. If both are proper, replace the ESM.

----End

10.11.4 Setting Parameters (Lithium Battery)


Context
After the SMU is powered on for the first time and the system automatically identifies lithium
batteries, the SMU automatically restarts.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the parameters based on the following table.

Table 10-251 Parameter settings

Item Setting

Language English
Enter Password 000001

Step 2 After Setup Wizard Init is displayed on the LCD, set the following parameters.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 397


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-252 Parameter settings

Item Setting
Time Zone Set to the local time zone.
Date and Time Set to the local date and time.
Batter Factory AGISSON
Battery Model ESM-A
The SMU may restart. Yes

Step 3 When the SMU is running properly, set the language, date, and time in the following menu
paths.

Table 10-253 Setting the language, date, and time

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters Settings Local Parameters Language - Select a desired
language.
Date and Time Time Zone Set to the local time
zone.
Date and Time Set to the local date
and time.

Step 4 Set sensor parameters.

Table 10-254 Setting sensor parameters


Main Second- Third-Lev Fourth-Level Menu Default Value Setting
Menu Level el Menu
Menu
Paramet Setup Sensor Water Sensor - Set as required.
ers Parameter Config
Settings Smoke Sensor - Set as required.
Ambient Temp. Sensor - Set as required.
Ambient Humi. Sensor - Set as required.

Step 5 Set the dry contact alarm for the battery cabinet door status sensor.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 398


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

This step is required only if a door status sensor is installed for the battery cabinet.

Table 10-255 Setting the dry contact alarm for the battery cabinet door status sensor

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Alarm Parameters DI Dry Contact DIN4 Alm. Close Open
Settings Para. Cond.

Step 6 Set the dry contact alarm for the inverter.

Table 10-256 Setting the dry contact alarm for the inverter

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Alarm Parameters DI Dry Contact DIN5 Alm. Close Open
Settings Para. Cond.

Step 7 Change the Wifi account password on the LCD.

Table 10-257 Changing Wifi account password

Main Menu Second-Level Menu Third-Level Menu Default Value Setting


Parameters Wifi settings Wifi SSID HUAWEI_SITE Change the account
settings password as required.
Wifi Password Changeme

Step 8 Set the ATS working scenario.

Table 10-258 Setting the ATS working scenario

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu

Parameters Settings ATS 1 Work Scenario Mains+DG DG1+DG2

Step 9 Set the AC parameter for the DG.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 399


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-259 Setting the AC parameter for the DG

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 AC Power 3Ph4Wire Set as required.
Settings Supply Mode

Step 10 Set the number of DGs.

Table 10-260 Setting the number of DGs

Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Menu Value
Paramet Setup Parameter Basic Parameters DG Number 0 2
ers
Settings Tank Number 1 1-2
NOTE
This parameter is
displayed only
when DG Number
is set to 2.

Step 11 Set the DG configuration mode.

Table 10-261 Setting the DG configuration mode


Main Second-Level Menu Third-Level Menu Default Value Setting
Menu
Setting EPS-D Group Para D.G. Cfg Mode Active/Standby Set as required.
Wizard

Step 12 Switch the GMU power circuit breaker to ON.


Step 13 Set DG parameters.
1. Set the EPM100-M2B parameters.

Table 10-262 EPM100-M2B parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 10 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 400


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Auto Add Oil No Yes


Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.83 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 58.0 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 5.2 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Time
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

2. Set the EPM100-M2E parameters.

Table 10-263 EPM100-M2E parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 10 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1250 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 401


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Time
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

3. Set the EPM100-M2H parameters.

Table 10-264 EPM100-M2H parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5kW 10kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999h 1250h
Time Maint Per 500h 4320h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50m 0.58m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00m 1.80m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00m 0.81m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0cm 57.7cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0cm 2.7cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 402


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Level Chg 3.0cm 3.0cm
Alarm
Level Chg 10.0Min 10.0Min
Time
Level Filt Time 30.0Min 30.0Min

4. Set the EPM115-M2A parameters.

Table 10-265 EPM115-M2A parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 11.5 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.57 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.83 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 56.2 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 5.2 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

5. Set the EPM120-M2D parameters.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 403


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-266 EPM120-M2D parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 12 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.57 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 2.20 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 56.2 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 5.2 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

6. Set the EPM140-M2B parameters.

Table 10-267 EPM140-M2B parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 14 kW


Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 404


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

7. Set the EPM140-M2C parameters.

Table 10-268 EPM140-M2C parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 14 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1250 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No No
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 405


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%


Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

8. Set the EPM140-M2D parameters.

Table 10-269 EPM140-M2D parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 14 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1250 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 406


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

9. Set the EPM160-M2B parameters.

Table 10-270 EPM160-M2B parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 16 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

10. Set the EPM160-M2C parameters.

Table 10-271 EPM160-M2C parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 16 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 407


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.57 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 2.20 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 56.2 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 5.2 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

11. Set the EPM160-M2D parameters.

Table 10-272 EPM160-M2D parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 16 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.57 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 2.20 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 408


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 56.2 cm


Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 5.2 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

12. Set the EPM200-M2B parameters.

Table 10-273 EPM200-M2B parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 20 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 2.20 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 409


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

Step 14 Set parameters for the reused DG.

Table 10-274 Setting parameters for the reused DG

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW Set based on site
Settings Power requirements.
Max Power 80.0% Set based on site
Ratio requirements.
Over Volt Prot 120.0% Set based on site
requirements.
Under Volt Prot 80.0% Set based on site
requirements.
Batt Undervolt 10.0 V Set based on site
Thro requirements.
Routine Maint 9999 h Set based on site
requirements.
Timed Maint Per 500 h Set based on site
requirements.

Step 15 Set communications parameters.


 Setting communications parameters for IP networking
a. Set the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address on the LCD.

Table 10-275 IP parameters

Main Second-L Third-Le Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu evel vel Menu Menu
Menu
Parameters Comm. Network IP Address 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter based on
Settings Parameters Parameters the address assigned by the
network administrator.
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Set this parameter based on
the address assigned by the
network administrator.
Default Gateway 192.168.0.1 Set this parameter based on
the address assigned by the

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 410


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Second-L Third-Le Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu evel vel Menu Menu
Menu
network administrator.
NOTE
If a WiFi module is installed on
the SMU, the default gateway
cannot be set to 192.168.0.1;
otherwise, it will conflict with
the WiFi gateway.

b. Set IP addresses and port numbers for the active and standby NetEco servers on the
LCD.

Table 10-276 NetEco parameters

Main Second- Third-Le Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Level vel Menu Value
Menu Menu
Parameters Comm. Network NetEco Primary 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the IP
Settings Parameter Parameter IP address of the active NetEco
s s server.
NetEco Backup IP 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the IP
address of the standby NetEco
server.
NetEco Port 31220 Set a port number for the
Number NetEco.

 Set wireless communications parameters.


a. Check whether the default wireless communications parameters on the LCD are
consistent with the communication configurations of the carrier network that the
SIM card belongs to. If they are inconsistent, modify the parameters according to
the actual configurations of the carrier network.

Table 10-277 Checking wireless communications parameters

Main Second-Lev Third-Level Fourth-Lev Default Value Setting


Menu el Menu Menu el Menu
Parameters Comm. Mobile Data Carrier Automatic Automatic, Others
Settings Parameters Operator
SIMn Acc - A maximum of 28
Point Name characters, including
NOTE lowercase English letters (a
This
to z), uppercase English
parameter is letters (A to Z), digits (0 to
displayed 9), and special characters
only when

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 411


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Second-Lev Third-Level Fourth-Lev Default Value Setting


Menu el Menu Menu el Menu
Carrier (@_#*-.).
Operator is
set to
Others.

SIMn -
Access
Point No
NOTE
This
parameter is
displayed
only when
Carrier
Operator is
set to
Others.

SIMn User -
Name
NOTE
This
parameter is
displayed
only when
Carrier
Operator is
set to
Others.

SIMn User - A maximum of 27


Password characters, including
NOTE lowercase English letters (a
This
to z), uppercase English
parameter is letters (A to Z), digits (0 to
displayed 9), and special characters
only when (@_#-.).
Carrier
Operator is It is recommended that the
set to password contain at least
Others. two types of characters and
the length exceed six
characters.

b. Set IP addresses and port numbers for the active and standby NetEco servers on the
LCD.

Table 10-278 NetEco parameters

Main Menu Second-Le Third-Leve Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


vel Menu l Menu Menu
Parameters Comm. Network NetEco Primary 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the
Settings Parameters Parameters IP IP address of the active

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 412


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Le Third-Leve Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


vel Menu l Menu Menu
NetEco server
NetEco Backup 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the
IP IP address of the standby
NetEco server.
NetEco Port 31220 Set a port number for the
Number NetEco.

 Set BBU in-band networking parameters.


a. Set BBU in-band networking parameters.

Table 10-279 BBU in-band networking parameters

Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Fifth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu Menu Menu
Parameters Comm. Serial Port Northbound Port Mode Manual
Settings Parameters
Protocol Type M/S Protocol
M/S Protocol Baud Rate - 9600
Comm. Address - 3

b. Set IP addresses and port numbers for the active and standby NetEco servers on the
LCD.

Table 10-280 NetEco parameters

Main Second-Lev Third-Leve Fourth-Leve Default Setting


Menu el Menu l Menu l Menu Value
Paramete Comm. Network NetEco 192.168.0.1 Set this
rs Parameters Parameters Primary IP 0 parameter to
Settings the IP address
of the active
NetEco server.
NetEco 192.168.0.1 Set this
Backup IP 0 parameter to
the IP address
of the standby
NetEco server.
NetEco Port 31220 Set a port
Number number for the
NetEco.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 413


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

----End

10.11.5 Starting a DG Self-Check


Context
 There is no battery alarm on the Monitoring, and battery power supply is normal.
 If the mains power is used, ensure that the mains AC input circuit breaker on the ATS is
OFF.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the DG to work in automatic mode on the GMU.

Figure 10-97 Setting the DG working mode

Step 2 Start a DG self-check.

Table 10-281 Starting a DG self-check

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Running Control EPS-D DG Self Check Confirm Self Check Yes

A maximum of two DGs can be connected. The auto check process is as follows:
1. About 2 minutes after starting DG 1, the monitoring unit checks the DG running status to determine
whether the DG has started.
2. About 2 minutes after shutting down DG 1, the monitoring unit checks the DG running status to
determine whether the DG has shut down.
3. About 2 minutes after starting DG 1, the monitoring unit checks the DG running status to determine
whether the DG has started.
4. About 2 minutes after shutting down DG 2, the monitoring unit checks the DG running status to
determine whether the DG has shut down.
After the auto check is complete, the SMU displays the results on the screen:
 Control DG Number (0/1/2)
 DG 1 Start Result (Success/Fail)
 DG 1 Stop Result (Success/Fail)
 DG 2 Start Result (Success/Fail)
 DG 2 Stop Result (Success/Fail)
A single-DG self-check takes about 4 minutes, and a dual-DG self-check takes more than 8 minutes.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 414


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Step 3 Verify that the self-check result is consistent with the actual number of DGs and the DGs
work properly. If the DG self-check fails, refer to the DG manual for troubleshooting and DG
cable connection checking.
----End

10.11.6 Connecting the Load Supply


Procedure
Step 1 Switch on all load circuit breakers one by one. During the process, measure the busbar voltage
using a clamp meter after switching on each circuit breaker. Then continue to switch on
another circuit breaker after ensuring that the busbar voltage is between 44.5 V DC and 57.6
V DC.
----End

10.12 Dual-DG Hybrid Power Supply Solution (Lithium


Battery + Lead-Acid Battery)
10.12.1 Connecting the Battery Supply (Lead-Acid Battery)
Prerequisites
Required tools including a fuse extracting unit, clamp meter, and insulation gloves are
available.

Procedure
Step 1 Check as follows before connecting the battery supply.
1. Flip the battery switch on the DCDU to AUTO.
2. Switch the load circuit breaker on the DCDU to OFF.
Step 2 Check that the battery string voltage is in the range of 43.2 V DC to 56.4 V DC using a clamp
meter.
Step 3 Connect the battery supply.
1. Reinstall battery fuse 2 in the DCDU using a fuse extracting unit.

Before reinstalling a fuse, switch the AC input circuit breaker on the ACDU to OFF.
Otherwise, the fuse will produce sparks during operation.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 415


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-98 Position of battery fuse 2

(1) Battery fuse 2

2. Flip the DCDU battery switch to MANUAL.


Step 4 Check that the busbar voltage is in the range of 43.2 V DC to 56.4 V DC using a clamp meter.
----End

10.12.2 Setting Parameters (Lithium Battery + Lead-Acid Battery)


Procedure
Step 1 Set the parameters based on the following table.

Table 10-282 Parameter settings

Item Setting
Language English
Enter Password 000001

Step 2 After Setup Wizard Init is displayed on the LCD, set the following parameters.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 416


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-283 Parameter settings

Item Setting
Time Zone Set to the local time zone.
Date and Time Set to the local date and time.
Batter Factory AGISSON
Battery Model FCB-A
NOTE
Set the battery model for lead-acid batteries.
There is no need to set this parameter for lithium
batteries.

The SMU may restart. Yes

Step 3 After the SMU restarts, set parameters according to the following table.

Table 10-284 Parameter settings

Item Setting

Language English
Enter Password 000001
Battery 1 Connected No
Battery 2 Connected Yes
Single-String Cap. Rated capacity of the batteries in a battery
string.
NOTE
 This parameter indicates the rated capacity of
lead-acid batteries.
 The batteries controlled by one circuit
breaker or fuse are called a battery string.

Step 4 When the SMU is running properly, set the language, date, and time in the following menu
paths.

Table 10-285 Setting the language, date, and time

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Parameters Settings Local Parameters Language - Select a desired


language.
Date and Time Time Zone Set to the local time
zone.
Date and Time Set to the local date

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 417


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu
and time.

Step 5 Set hybrid scenario parameters.

Table 10-286 Setting hybrid scenario parameters

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Settin


Menu Menu Menu Value g
Parameters Setup Parameter Basic Parameters Hybrid Scenario No Yes
Settings

Step 6 Set iMix Enable to Enable.

Table 10-287 Setting the iMix Enable

Main Menu Second-Lev Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


el Menu Menu Menu
Parameters Power Basic iMix Enable Disable Enable
Settings System Parameters

Step 7 Set the lithium battery connection mode.

Table 10-288 Setting the lithium battery connection mode

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters Li Battery Basic Parameters Battery 1 Connected Yes
Settings NOTE Battery 2 Connected No
This parameter is
displayed only when Priority Charger Disable, Enable
Battery Model is set
to ESM-A. Discharger Mode Auto, Constant Volt
Dischg
Cycle Mode Li-Ion and Acid Cycle:
Lithium batteries and
lead-acid batteries
switch between each
other to discharge based
on the configured
discharge capacity.
NOTE
This parameter is
displayed when

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 418


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Discharger Mode is set
to Constant Volt Dischg.
When Discharger Mode
is set to Auto, both
lithium batteries and
lead-acid batteries
discharge.

Li-Ion Primary:
Lithium batteries
discharge preferentially.
When lithium batteries
discharge to the
configured depth of
discharge (DOD), they
switch to lead-acid
batteries for discharge.
NOTE
This parameter is
displayed when
Discharger Mode is set
to Constant Volt Dischg.
When Discharger Mode
is set to Auto, both
lithium batteries and
lead-acid batteries
discharge.

Li-Ion Standby:
Lead-acid batteries
discharge preferentially.
When lead-acid
batteries discharge to
the configured DOD,
they switch to lithium
batteries for discharge.
Cycle Factor Set based on site
NOTE requirements.
This parameter is
displayed when
Cycle Mode is set to
Li-Ion and Acid
Cycle.

Step 8 Set lead-acid battery parameters.

Table 10-289 Setting lead-acid battery parameters

Main Menu Second-Lev Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


el Menu Menu Menu
Parameters Acid Battery Basic Battery Cable Set based on site requirements.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 419


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Lev Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


el Menu Menu Menu
Settings Parameters Length NOTE
 When each battery string is connected to the
Batt Cable CS RTN+ busbar over one cable, set Cable
Area Length to half of the total length of cables
between both ends of a battery string and the
positive and negative busbars, and set Cable
CSA to the cross-sectional area of the cable.
 When each battery string is connected to the
RTN+ busbar over two cables, set Cable
Length to half of the total length of a suite of
cables between both ends of a battery string
and the positive and negative busbars, and set
Cable CSA to the sum of the cross-sectional
areas of the two cables.

Step 9 Set sensor parameters.

Table 10-290 Setting sensor parameters

Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Menu Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Setup Sensor Config Water Sensor - Set as required.
Settings Parameter
Smoke Sensor - Set as required.
Ambient Temp. - Set as required.
Sensor
Ambient Humi. - Set as required.
Sensor
Batt. Temp. Sensor 1 - Set as required.

Step 10 Set the dry contact alarm for the battery cabinet door status sensor.

This step is required only if a door status sensor is installed for the battery cabinet.

Table 10-291 Setting the dry contact alarm for the battery cabinet door status sensor

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Alarm Parameters DI Dry Contact DIN4 Alm. Close Open
Settings Para. Cond.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 420


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Step 11 Set the dry contact alarm for the inverter.

Table 10-292 Setting the dry contact alarm for the inverter

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Alarm Parameters DI Dry Contact DIN5 Alm. Close Open
Settings Para. Cond.

Step 12 Change the Wifi account password on the LCD.

Table 10-293 Changing Wifi account password

Main Menu Second-Level Menu Third-Level Menu Default Value Setting


Parameters Wifi settings Wifi SSID HUAWEI_SITE Change the account
settings password as required.
Wifi Password Changeme

Step 13 Set the ATS working scenario.

Table 10-294 Setting the ATS working scenario

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu

Parameters Settings ATS 1 Work Scenario Mains+DG DG1+DG2

Step 14 Set the AC parameter for the DG.

Table 10-295 Setting the AC parameter for the DG

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 AC Power 3Ph4Wire Set as required.
Settings Supply Mode

Step 15 Set the number of DGs.

Table 10-296 Setting the number of DGs

Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Menu Value
Paramet Setup Parameter Basic Parameters DG Number 0 2
ers
Settings Tank Number 1 1-2

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 421


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Menu Value
NOTE
This parameter is
displayed only
when DG Number
is set to 2.

Step 16 Set the DG configuration mode.

Table 10-297 Setting the DG configuration mode

Main Second-Level Menu Third-Level Menu Default Value Setting


Menu
Setting EPS-D Group Para D.G. Cfg Mode Active/Standby Set as required.
Wizard

Step 17 Switch the GMU power circuit breaker to ON.


Step 18 Set DG parameters.
1. Set the EPM100-M2B parameters.

Table 10-298 EPM100-M2B parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 10 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.83 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 58.0 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 5.2 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 422


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%


Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Time
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

2. Set the EPM100-M2E parameters.

Table 10-299 EPM100-M2E parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 10 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1250 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Time
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 423


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

3. Set the EPM100-M2H parameters.

Table 10-300 EPM100-M2H parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5kW 10kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999h 1250h
Time Maint Per 500h 4320h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50m 0.58m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00m 1.80m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00m 0.81m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0cm 57.7cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0cm 2.7cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0cm 3.0cm
Alarm
Level Chg 10.0Min 10.0Min
Time
Level Filt Time 30.0Min 30.0Min

4. Set the EPM115-M2A parameters.

Table 10-301 EPM115-M2A parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 11.5 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 424


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Auto Add Oil No Yes


Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.57 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.83 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 56.2 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 5.2 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

5. Set the EPM120-M2D parameters.

Table 10-302 EPM120-M2D parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 12 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.57 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 2.20 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 425


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 56.2 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 5.2 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

6. Set the EPM140-M2B parameters.

Table 10-303 EPM140-M2B parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 14 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 426


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min


Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

7. Set the EPM140-M2C parameters.

Table 10-304 EPM140-M2C parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 14 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1250 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No No
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

8. Set the EPM140-M2D parameters.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 427


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-305 EPM140-M2D parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 14 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1250 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

9. Set the EPM160-M2B parameters.

Table 10-306 EPM160-M2B parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 16 kW


Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 428


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

10. Set the EPM160-M2C parameters.

Table 10-307 EPM160-M2C parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 16 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.57 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 2.20 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 56.2 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 5.2 cm

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 429


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%


Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

11. Set the EPM160-M2D parameters.

Table 10-308 EPM160-M2D parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 16 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.57 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 2.20 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 56.2 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 5.2 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 430


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

12. Set the EPM200-M2B parameters.

Table 10-309 EPM200-M2B parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 20 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 2.20 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

Step 19 Set parameters for the reused DG.

Table 10-310 Setting parameters for the reused DG

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW Set based on site
Settings Power requirements.
Max Power 80.0% Set based on site
Ratio requirements.
Over Volt Prot 120.0% Set based on site
requirements.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 431


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value

Under Volt Prot 80.0% Set based on site


requirements.
Batt Undervolt 10.0 V Set based on site
Thro requirements.
Routine Maint 9999 h Set based on site
requirements.
Timed Maint Per 500 h Set based on site
requirements.

Step 20 Set communications parameters.


 Setting communications parameters for IP networking
a. Set the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address on the LCD.

Table 10-311 IP parameters

Main Second-L Third-Le Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu evel vel Menu Menu
Menu
Parameters Comm. Network IP Address 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter based on
Settings Parameters Parameters the address assigned by the
network administrator.
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Set this parameter based on
the address assigned by the
network administrator.
Default Gateway 192.168.0.1 Set this parameter based on
the address assigned by the
network administrator.
NOTE
If a WiFi module is installed on
the SMU, the default gateway
cannot be set to 192.168.0.1;
otherwise, it will conflict with
the WiFi gateway.

b. Set IP addresses and port numbers for the active and standby NetEco servers on the
LCD.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 432


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-312 NetEco parameters

Main Second- Third-Le Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Level vel Menu Value
Menu Menu
Parameters Comm. Network NetEco Primary 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the IP
Settings Parameter Parameter IP address of the active NetEco
s s server.
NetEco Backup IP 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the IP
address of the standby NetEco
server.
NetEco Port 31220 Set a port number for the
Number NetEco.

 Set wireless communications parameters.


a. Check whether the default wireless communications parameters on the LCD are
consistent with the communication configurations of the carrier network that the
SIM card belongs to. If they are inconsistent, modify the parameters according to
the actual configurations of the carrier network.

Table 10-313 Checking wireless communications parameters

Main Second-Lev Third-Level Fourth-Lev Default Value Setting


Menu el Menu Menu el Menu
Parameters Comm. Mobile Data Carrier Automatic Automatic, Others
Settings Parameters Operator
SIMn Acc - A maximum of 28
Point Name characters, including
NOTE lowercase English letters (a
This
to z), uppercase English
parameter is letters (A to Z), digits (0 to
displayed 9), and special characters
only when (@_#*-.).
Carrier
Operator is
set to
Others.

SIMn -
Access
Point No
NOTE
This
parameter is
displayed
only when
Carrier
Operator is
set to
Others.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 433


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Second-Lev Third-Level Fourth-Lev Default Value Setting


Menu el Menu Menu el Menu
SIMn User -
Name
NOTE
This
parameter is
displayed
only when
Carrier
Operator is
set to
Others.

SIMn User - A maximum of 27


Password characters, including
NOTE lowercase English letters (a
This
to z), uppercase English
parameter is letters (A to Z), digits (0 to
displayed 9), and special characters
only when (@_#-.).
Carrier
Operator is It is recommended that the
set to password contain at least
Others. two types of characters and
the length exceed six
characters.

b. Set IP addresses and port numbers for the active and standby NetEco servers on the
LCD.

Table 10-314 NetEco parameters

Main Menu Second-Le Third-Leve Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


vel Menu l Menu Menu
Parameters Comm. Network NetEco Primary 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the
Settings Parameters Parameters IP IP address of the active
NetEco server
NetEco Backup 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the
IP IP address of the standby
NetEco server.
NetEco Port 31220 Set a port number for the
Number NetEco.

 Set BBU in-band networking parameters.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 434


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-315 BBU in-band networking parameters

Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Fifth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu Menu Menu
Parameters Comm. Serial Port Northbound Port Mode Manual
Settings Parameters
Protocol Type M/S Protocol
M/S Protocol Baud Rate - 9600
Comm. Address - 3

----End

10.12.3 Manually Connecting the DG Supply


Prerequisites

Never allow sparks, flames, and inflammable objects to be close to a DG because this may
cause fire or explosions.

Check according to the following table before powering on and commissioning the DG.

Check Expected Result


Item
Appearanc  No engine oil leaks.
e  No fuel leaks.
 No coolant leaks.
 No component is damaged or lost.
 No fastener is loose, lost, or damaged.
 No component is cracked, worn out, or damaged and no connector is
damaged or corroded.
 The EMERGENCY STOP button is in the self-lock state, and the load
circuit breaker is in a proper position.
 No hose is cracked, worn out, damaged, or stuck.
Fuel, lube Levels of fuel, lube oil, and engine coolant are within the normal range.
oil, and
coolant
Battery The battery voltage is greater than 12 V DC.
voltage

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 435


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Procedure (EPM100-M2B, EPM120-M2D, EPM140-M2B, EPM140-M2C,


EPM160-M2B, EPM160-M2C, EPM160-M2D, and EPM200-M2B)
Step 1 Exhaust air from fuel pipes.
 Exhausting air from fuel pipes (EPM100-M2B, EPM120-M2D, EPM160-M2C, and
EPM160-M2D)
a. Loosen the air exhaust screw on the fuel filter.

Figure 10-99 Air exhaust screw

(1) Fuel filter

b. Repeatedly pinch the hand feed pump on the fuel transfer pump until the fuel flows
through the air exhaust screw has no bubbles.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 436


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-100 Hand feed pump

(1) Hand feed pump

c. Tighten the air exhaust screw on the fuel filter.


 Exhausting air from fuel pipes (EPM140-M2B, EPM140-M2C, and EPM160-M2B)
a. Loosen the air exhaust screw on the fuel filter.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 437


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-101 Air exhaust screw

b. Press the hand feed pump up and down until the fuel flowing out of the air exhaust
screw has no bubbles, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 438


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-102 Exhausting air from fuel pipes

(1) Hand feed pump

c. Tighten the air exhaust screw on the fuel filter.


 Exhausting air from fuel pipes (EPM200-M2B)
a. Loose the air exhaust screw from the fuel filter and fuel injection pump.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 439


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-103 Air exhaust screw

(1) Fuel filter

b. Press the hand feed pump up and down until the fuel flows through the air exhaust
screw has no bubbles.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 440


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-104 Exhausting air from fuel pipes

(1) Hand feed pump

c. Tighten the air exhaust screw on the fuel filter.


Step 2 Start the DG manually.
1. Rotate the EMERGENCY button until it is ejected.
2. Check that the DG AC output circuit breaker is OFF.
3. Turn on the power switch for the DG battery charger.
4. Set the GMU to manual mode, and then press the RESET button on the GMU panel to
clear alarms. When Gen-Set is Ready, press the START button to manually start the
DG.

Figure 10-105 Starting the DG manually

Step 3 Check the DG output voltage, as shown in the following figure.


1. Press I/O on the GMU panel.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 441


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

2. Open the door of the GMB and check that the DG output voltage is in the range of 207 V
AC to 253 V AC using a clamp meter.

Figure 10-106 Checking the DG output voltage (EPM100-M2B)

Figure 10-107 Checking the DG output voltage (EPM120-M2D, EPM160-M2C, and


EPM160-M2D)

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 442


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-108 Checking the DG output voltage (EPM140-M2B, EPM140-M2C, EPM160-M2B,


and EPM200-M2B)

Step 4 After checking that the DG can start properly, set the DG to work in automatic mode on the
GMU.

Figure 10-109 Setting the DG working mode

Step 5 Switch the DG AC output circuit breaker to ON.


Step 6 Switch the DG input circuit breaker on the ATS to ON.

If a third-party DG is used onsite, manually start the DG according to the DG manual.

----End

Procedure (EPM100-M2E, EPM120-M2H, EPM115-M2A, and EPM140-M2D)


Step 1 Prepare for starting the DG.
1. Rotate the EMERGENCY button until it is ejected.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 443


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

2. Check that the DG AC output circuit breaker is OFF.


3. Turn on the power switch for the DG battery charger.
4. Set the GMU to work in manual mode.

Figure 10-110 Starting the DG manually

Step 2 Exhaust air from fuel pipes.


1. When you start the DG for the first time, set Prestart Time/PreFuel Time on the GMU
to 120s so that the DG automatically exhausts air from fuel pipes during startup. Path:
Settings > Engine Setting > Prestart Time/PreFuel Time

 In GMU software V322 and earlier versions, Prestart Time is displayed. In the V330 version,
PreFuel Time is displayed.
 Path for viewing the GMU software version: Main Menu > Product Info > Software.
 The initial GMU password is 1111.
2. Press START on the GMU panel to start the DG.
3. After the DG normally starts, set Prestart Time/PreFuel Time to 15s.
Step 3 Check the DG output voltage.
1. Press I/O on the GMU panel.
2. Open the door of the GMB and check that the DG output voltage is in the correct voltage
range using a clamp meter.
− EPM100-M2E, EPM100-M2H, and EPM140-M2D output voltage range: 207–253
V AC
− EPM115-M2A output voltage range: 99–121 V AC

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 444


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-111 Checking the DG output voltage (EPM100-M2E, EPM100-M2H, and


EPM140-M2D)

Figure 10-112 Checking the DG output voltage (EPM115-M2A)

Step 4 If the DG works properly, switch the DG AC output circuit breaker to ON.
Step 5 Switch the DG input circuit breaker on the ATS to ON.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 445


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

If a third-party DG is used onsite, manually start the DG according to the DG manual.

----End

10.12.4 Starting a DG Self-Check


Context
 There is no battery alarm on the Monitoring, and battery power supply is normal.
 If the mains power is used, ensure that the mains AC input circuit breaker on the ATS is
OFF.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the DG to work in automatic mode on the GMU.

Figure 10-113 Setting the DG working mode

Step 2 Start a DG self-check.

Table 10-316 Starting a DG self-check

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Running Control EPS-D DG Self Check Confirm Self Check Yes

A maximum of two DGs can be connected. The auto check process is as follows:
1. About 2 minutes after starting DG 1, the monitoring unit checks the DG running status to determine
whether the DG has started.
2. About 2 minutes after shutting down DG 1, the monitoring unit checks the DG running status to
determine whether the DG has shut down.
3. About 2 minutes after starting DG 1, the monitoring unit checks the DG running status to determine
whether the DG has started.
4. About 2 minutes after shutting down DG 2, the monitoring unit checks the DG running status to
determine whether the DG has shut down.
After the auto check is complete, the SMU displays the results on the screen:
 Control DG Number (0/1/2)
 DG 1 Start Result (Success/Fail)
 DG 1 Stop Result (Success/Fail)
 DG 2 Start Result (Success/Fail)

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 446


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

 DG 2 Stop Result (Success/Fail)


A single-DG self-check takes about 4 minutes, and a dual-DG self-check takes more than 8 minutes.

Step 3 Verify that the self-check result is consistent with the actual number of DGs and the DGs
work properly. If the DG self-check fails, refer to the DG manual for troubleshooting and DG
cable connection checking.
----End

10.12.5 Connecting the Battery Supply (Lithium Battery)


Prerequisites
Required tools including a fuse extracting unit, clamp meter, and insulation gloves are
available.

Procedure
Step 1 Reinstall battery fuse 1 in the DCDU using a fuse extracting unit.

Figure 10-114 Position of battery fuse 1

(1) Battery fuse 1

Step 2 Check whether the RUN indicator on the lithium battery is steady on.
 If the RUN indicator is steady on, communication is normal.
 If the RUN indicator blinks fast, the lithium battery fails to communicate with the host.
 If the RUN indicator is off, check and correct the battery cable connections. Use a
multimeter to measure the voltage at the + and – output ports of the lithium battery.
Ensure that the voltage is positive and in the range of 43.2 V DC to 56.4 V DC. Replace

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 447


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

the lithium battery if the cable connections are correct, the battery port voltage is in the
range of 43.2 V DC to 56.4 V DC, but the indicator is still off.

If the lithium battery fails to communicate with the host:


1. Check whether the battery communications cable is properly connected.
2. Check whether the terminal build-out resistor of the battery is properly connected.
3. If both are normal, replace the battery.

----End

10.12.6 Connecting the Load Supply


Procedure
Step 1 Switch on all load circuit breakers one by one. During the process, measure the busbar voltage
using a clamp meter after switching on each circuit breaker. Then continue to switch on
another circuit breaker after ensuring that the busbar voltage is between 44.5 V DC and 57.6
V DC.
----End

10.13 Diesel-Grid Hybrid Power Supply Solution (Lithium


Battery)
10.13.1 Preparing for Power-On
Prerequisites
Required tools including a fuse extracting unit, clamp meter, and insulation gloves are
available.

Procedure
Step 1 Reinstall battery fuses in the DCDU using a fuse extracting unit.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 448


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-115 Positions of battery fuses

(1) Battery fuses

----End

10.13.2 Connecting the Mains Supply


Procedure
Step 1 Check that the mains AC input circuit breaker on the ATS is OFF, and turn on the upstream
mains AC switch for the ATS.
Step 2 Check that the input voltage of the mains AC input circuit breaker on the ATS ranges from 85
V AC to 300 V AC.
Step 3 Switch the mains AC input circuit breaker on the ATS to ON.
Step 4 Check that the DG stops and the mains starts to supply power.
----End

10.13.3 Connecting the Battery Supply (Lithium Battery)


Context
After AC power is switched on, the lithium battery supply is automatically connected.

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the RUN indicator on each lithium battery is steady on.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 449


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

 If the RUN indicator is steady on, communication is proper.


 If the RUN indicator blinks fast, the ESM fails to communicate with the host.
 If the RUN indicator is off, check and correct the ESM cable connections. Use a
multimeter to measure the voltage at the + and – output ports of the ESM. Ensure that
the voltage is positive and in the range of 43.2 V DC to 56.4 V DC. Replace the ESM if
the cable connections are correct, the battery port voltage is in the range of 43.2 V DC to
56.4 V DC, but the indicator is still off.

When the ESM fails to communicate with the host:


1. Check whether the ESM communications cable is properly connected.
2. Check whether the ESM terminal build-out resistor is properly connected.
3. If both are proper, replace the ESM.

----End

10.13.4 Setting Parameters (Lithium Battery)


Context
After the SMU is powered on for the first time and the system automatically identifies lithium
batteries, the SMU automatically restarts.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the parameters based on the following table.

Table 10-317 Parameter settings


Item Setting

Language English
Enter Password 000001

Step 2 After Setup Wizard Init is displayed on the LCD, set the following parameters.

Table 10-318 Parameter settings

Item Setting
Time Zone Set to the local time zone.
Date and Time Set to the local date and time.
Batter Factory AGISSON
Battery Model ESM-A
The SMU may restart. Yes

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 450


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Step 3 When the SMU is running properly, set the language, date, and time in the following menu
paths.

Table 10-319 Setting the language, date, and time

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Parameters Settings Local Parameters Language - Select a desired


language.
Date and Time Time Zone Set to the local time
zone.
Date and Time Set to the local date
and time.

Step 4 Set sensor parameters.

Table 10-320 Setting sensor parameters


Main Second- Third-Lev Fourth-Level Menu Default Value Setting
Menu Level el Menu
Menu
Paramet Setup Sensor Water Sensor - Set as required.
ers Parameter Config
Settings Smoke Sensor - Set as required.
Ambient Temp. Sensor - Set as required.
Ambient Humi. Sensor - Set as required.

Step 5 Set the dry contact alarm for the battery cabinet door status sensor.

This step is required only if a door status sensor is installed for the battery cabinet.

Table 10-321 Setting the dry contact alarm for the battery cabinet door status sensor

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Alarm Parameters DI Dry Contact DIN4 Alm. Close Open
Settings Para. Cond.

Step 6 Set the dry contact alarm for the inverter.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 451


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-322 Setting the dry contact alarm for the inverter

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Alarm Parameters DI Dry Contact DIN5 Alm. Close Open
Settings Para. Cond.

Step 7 Set the dry contact alarm for the ACDU.

Table 10-323 Setting the dry contact alarm for the ACDU

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Alarm Parameters DI Dry Contact DIN6 Alm. Close Open
Settings Para. Cond.

Step 8 Change the Wifi account password on the LCD.

Table 10-324 Changing Wifi account password

Main Menu Second-Level Menu Third-Level Menu Default Value Setting


Parameters Wifi settings Wifi SSID HUAWEI_SITE Change the account
settings password as required.
Wifi Password Changeme

Step 9 Set the mains AC parameter.

Table 10-325 Setting the mains AC parameter

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu

Parameters Settings Mains AC Model 3 Phase 4 Line Set as required.

Step 10 Set the ATS working scenario.

Table 10-326 Setting the ATS working scenario

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu

Parameters Settings ATS 1 Work Scenario Mains+DG Mains+DG

Step 11 Set the number of DGs.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 452


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-327 Setting the number of DGs

Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameter Setup Parameter Basic Parameters DG Number 1 1
s Settings

Step 12 Switch the GMU power circuit breaker to ON.


Step 13 Set DG parameters.
1. Set the EPM100-M2B parameters.

Table 10-328 EPM100-M2B parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 10 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.83 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 58.0 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 5.2 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Time
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

2. Set the EPM100-M2E parameters.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 453


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-329 EPM100-M2E parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 10 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1250 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Time
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

3. Set the EPM100-M2H parameters.

Table 10-330 EPM100-M2H parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5kW 10kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999h 1250h
Time Maint Per 500h 4320h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 454


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50m 0.58m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00m 1.80m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00m 0.81m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0cm 57.7cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0cm 2.7cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0cm 3.0cm
Alarm
Level Chg 10.0Min 10.0Min
Time
Level Filt Time 30.0Min 30.0Min

4. Set the EPM115-M2A parameters.

Table 10-331 EPM115-M2A parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 11.5 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.57 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.83 m
Width

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 455


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 56.2 cm


Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 5.2 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

5. Set the EPM120-M2D parameters.

Table 10-332 EPM120-M2D parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 12 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.57 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 2.20 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 56.2 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 5.2 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 456


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

6. Set the EPM140-M2B parameters.

Table 10-333 EPM140-M2B parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 14 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

7. Set the EPM140-M2C parameters.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 457


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-334 EPM140-M2C parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 14 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1250 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No No
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

8. Set the EPM140-M2D parameters.

Table 10-335 EPM140-M2D parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 14 kW


Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1250 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 458


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

9. Set the EPM160-M2B parameters.

Table 10-336 EPM160-M2B parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 16 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 459


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%


Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

10. Set the EPM160-M2C parameters.

Table 10-337 EPM160-M2C parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 16 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.57 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 2.20 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 56.2 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 5.2 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 460


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

11. Set the EPM160-M2D parameters.

Table 10-338 EPM160-M2D parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 16 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.57 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 2.20 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 56.2 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 5.2 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

12. Set the EPM200-M2B parameters.

Table 10-339 EPM200-M2B parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 20 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 461


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 2.20 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

Step 14 Set parameters for the reused DG.

Table 10-340 Setting parameters for the reused DG

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW Set based on site
Settings Power requirements.
Max Power 80.0% Set based on site
Ratio requirements.
Over Volt Prot 120.0% Set based on site
requirements.
Under Volt Prot 80.0% Set based on site
requirements.
Batt Undervolt 10.0 V Set based on site
Thro requirements.
Routine Maint 9999 h Set based on site
requirements.
Timed Maint Per 500 h Set based on site
requirements.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 462


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Step 15 Set communications parameters.


 Setting communications parameters for IP networking
a. Set the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address on the LCD.

Table 10-341 IP parameters

Main Second-L Third-Le Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu evel vel Menu Menu
Menu
Parameters Comm. Network IP Address 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter based on
Settings Parameters Parameters the address assigned by the
network administrator.
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Set this parameter based on
the address assigned by the
network administrator.
Default Gateway 192.168.0.1 Set this parameter based on
the address assigned by the
network administrator.
NOTE
If a WiFi module is installed on
the SMU, the default gateway
cannot be set to 192.168.0.1;
otherwise, it will conflict with
the WiFi gateway.

b. Set IP addresses and port numbers for the active and standby NetEco servers on the
LCD.

Table 10-342 NetEco parameters

Main Second- Third-Le Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Level vel Menu Value
Menu Menu
Parameters Comm. Network NetEco Primary 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the IP
Settings Parameter Parameter IP address of the active NetEco
s s server.
NetEco Backup IP 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the IP
address of the standby NetEco
server.
NetEco Port 31220 Set a port number for the
Number NetEco.

 Set wireless communications parameters.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 463


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

a. Check whether the default wireless communications parameters on the LCD are
consistent with the communication configurations of the carrier network that the
SIM card belongs to. If they are inconsistent, modify the parameters according to
the actual configurations of the carrier network.

Table 10-343 Checking wireless communications parameters

Main Second-Lev Third-Level Fourth-Lev Default Value Setting


Menu el Menu Menu el Menu
Parameters Comm. Mobile Data Carrier Automatic Automatic, Others
Settings Parameters Operator
SIMn Acc - A maximum of 28
Point Name characters, including
NOTE
lowercase English letters (a
This
to z), uppercase English
parameter is letters (A to Z), digits (0 to
displayed 9), and special characters
only when (@_#*-.).
Carrier
Operator is
set to
Others.

SIMn -
Access
Point No
NOTE
This
parameter is
displayed
only when
Carrier
Operator is
set to
Others.

SIMn User -
Name
NOTE
This
parameter is
displayed
only when
Carrier
Operator is
set to
Others.

SIMn User - A maximum of 27


Password characters, including
NOTE
lowercase English letters (a
This
to z), uppercase English
parameter is letters (A to Z), digits (0 to
displayed 9), and special characters
only when (@_#-.).
Carrier
Operator is It is recommended that the

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 464


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Second-Lev Third-Level Fourth-Lev Default Value Setting


Menu el Menu Menu el Menu
set to password contain at least
Others. two types of characters and
the length exceed six
characters.

b. Set IP addresses and port numbers for the active and standby NetEco servers on the
LCD.

Table 10-344 NetEco parameters

Main Menu Second-Le Third-Leve Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


vel Menu l Menu Menu

Parameters Comm. Network NetEco Primary 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the
Settings Parameters Parameters IP IP address of the active
NetEco server
NetEco Backup 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the
IP IP address of the standby
NetEco server.
NetEco Port 31220 Set a port number for the
Number NetEco.

 Set BBU in-band networking parameters.


a. Set BBU in-band networking parameters.

Table 10-345 BBU in-band networking parameters

Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Fifth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu Menu Menu
Parameters Comm. Serial Port Northbound Port Mode Manual
Settings Parameters
Protocol Type M/S Protocol
M/S Protocol Baud Rate - 9600
Comm. Address - 3

b. Set IP addresses and port numbers for the active and standby NetEco servers on the
LCD.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 465


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-346 NetEco parameters

Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Comm. Network NetEco Primary 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter
Settings Parameters Parameters IP to the IP address of
the active NetEco
server.
NetEco Backup 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter
IP to the IP address of
the standby NetEco
server.
NetEco Port 31220 Set a port number
Number for the NetEco.

----End

10.13.5 Manually Connecting the DG Supply


Prerequisites

Never allow sparks, flames, and inflammable objects to be close to a DG because this may
cause fire or explosions.

Check according to the following table before powering on and commissioning the DG.

Check Expected Result


Item
Appearanc  No engine oil leaks.
e  No fuel leaks.
 No coolant leaks.
 No component is damaged or lost.
 No fastener is loose, lost, or damaged.
 No component is cracked, worn out, or damaged and no connector is
damaged or corroded.
 The EMERGENCY STOP button is in the self-lock state, and the load
circuit breaker is in a proper position.
 No hose is cracked, worn out, damaged, or stuck.
Fuel, lube Levels of fuel, lube oil, and engine coolant are within the normal range.
oil, and
coolant

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 466


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Check Expected Result


Item
Battery The battery voltage is greater than 12 V DC.
voltage

Procedure (EPM100-M2B, EPM120-M2D, EPM140-M2B, EPM140-M2C,


EPM160-M2B, EPM160-M2C, EPM160-M2D, and EPM200-M2B)
Step 1 Exhaust air from fuel pipes.
 Exhausting air from fuel pipes (EPM100-M2B, EPM120-M2D, EPM160-M2C, and
EPM160-M2D)
a. Loosen the air exhaust screw on the fuel filter.

Figure 10-116 Air exhaust screw

(1) Fuel filter

b. Repeatedly pinch the hand feed pump on the fuel transfer pump until the fuel flows
through the air exhaust screw has no bubbles.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 467


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-117 Hand feed pump

(1) Hand feed pump

c. Tighten the air exhaust screw on the fuel filter.


 Exhausting air from fuel pipes (EPM140-M2B, EPM140-M2C, and EPM160-M2B)
a. Loosen the air exhaust screw on the fuel filter.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 468


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-118 Air exhaust screw

b. Press the hand feed pump up and down until the fuel flowing out of the air exhaust
screw has no bubbles, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 469


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-119 Exhausting air from fuel pipes

(1) Hand feed pump

c. Tighten the air exhaust screw on the fuel filter.


 Exhausting air from fuel pipes (EPM200-M2B)
a. Loose the air exhaust screw from the fuel filter and fuel injection pump.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 470


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-120 Air exhaust screw

(1) Fuel filter

b. Press the hand feed pump up and down until the fuel flows through the air exhaust
screw has no bubbles.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 471


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-121 Exhausting air from fuel pipes

(1) Hand feed pump

c. Tighten the air exhaust screw on the fuel filter.


Step 2 Start the DG manually.
1. Rotate the EMERGENCY button until it is ejected.
2. Check that the DG AC output circuit breaker is OFF.
3. Turn on the power switch for the DG battery charger.
4. Set the GMU to manual mode, and then press the RESET button on the GMU panel to
clear alarms. When Gen-Set is Ready, press the START button to manually start the
DG.

Figure 10-122 Starting the DG manually

Step 3 Check the DG output voltage, as shown in the following figure.


1. Press I/O on the GMU panel.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 472


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

2. Open the door of the GMB and check that the DG output voltage is in the range of 207 V
AC to 253 V AC using a clamp meter.

Figure 10-123 Checking the DG output voltage (EPM100-M2B)

Figure 10-124 Checking the DG output voltage (EPM120-M2D, EPM160-M2C, and


EPM160-M2D)

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 473


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-125 Checking the DG output voltage (EPM140-M2B, EPM140-M2C, EPM160-M2B,


and EPM200-M2B)

Step 4 After checking that the DG can start properly, set the DG to work in automatic mode on the
GMU.

Figure 10-126 Setting the DG working mode

Step 5 Switch the DG AC output circuit breaker to ON.


Step 6 Switch the DG input circuit breaker on the ATS to ON.

If a third-party DG is used onsite, manually start the DG according to the DG manual.

----End

Procedure (EPM100-M2E, EPM120-M2H, EPM115-M2A, and EPM140-M2D)


Step 1 Prepare for starting the DG.
1. Rotate the EMERGENCY button until it is ejected.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 474


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

2. Check that the DG AC output circuit breaker is OFF.


3. Turn on the power switch for the DG battery charger.
4. Set the GMU to work in manual mode.

Figure 10-127 Starting the DG manually

Step 2 Exhaust air from fuel pipes.


1. When you start the DG for the first time, set Prestart Time/PreFuel Time on the GMU
to 120s so that the DG automatically exhausts air from fuel pipes during startup. Path:
Settings > Engine Setting > Prestart Time/PreFuel Time

 In GMU software V322 and earlier versions, Prestart Time is displayed. In the V330 version,
PreFuel Time is displayed.
 Path for viewing the GMU software version: Main Menu > Product Info > Software.
 The initial GMU password is 1111.
2. Press START on the GMU panel to start the DG.
3. After the DG normally starts, set Prestart Time/PreFuel Time to 15s.
Step 3 Check the DG output voltage.
1. Press I/O on the GMU panel.
2. Open the door of the GMB and check that the DG output voltage is in the correct voltage
range using a clamp meter.
− EPM100-M2E, EPM100-M2H, and EPM140-M2D output voltage range: 207–253
V AC
− EPM115-M2A output voltage range: 99–121 V AC

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 475


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-128 Checking the DG output voltage (EPM100-M2E, EPM100-M2H, and


EPM140-M2D)

Figure 10-129 Checking the DG output voltage (EPM115-M2A)

Step 4 If the DG works properly, switch the DG AC output circuit breaker to ON.
Step 5 Switch the DG input circuit breaker on the ATS to ON.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 476


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

If a third-party DG is used onsite, manually start the DG according to the DG manual.

----End

10.13.6 Starting a DG Self-Check


Context
 There is no battery alarm on the Monitoring, and battery power supply is normal.
 If the mains power is used, ensure that the mains AC input circuit breaker on the ATS is
OFF.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the DG to work in automatic mode on the GMU.

Figure 10-130 Setting the DG working mode

Step 2 Start a DG self-check.

Table 10-347 Starting a DG self-check

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Running Control EPS-D DG Self Check Confirm Self Check Yes

The auto check process is as follows:


1. About 2 minutes after starting DG 1, the Monitoring checks the DG running status to determine
whether the DG has started.
2. About 2 minutes after shutting down DG 1, the Monitoring checks the DG running status to
determine whether the DG has shut down.
After the auto check is complete, the SMU displays the results on the screen:
 Control DG Number (0/1)
 DG 1 Start Result (Success/Fail)
 DG 1 Stop Result (Success/Fail)
A single-DG self-check takes about 4 minutes

Step 3 Verify that the self-check result is consistent with the actual number of DGs and the DGs
work properly. If the DG self-check fails, refer to the DG manual for troubleshooting and DG
cable connection checking.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 477


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

----End

10.13.7 Connecting the Load Supply


Procedure
Step 1 Switch on all load circuit breakers one by one. During the process, measure the busbar voltage
using a clamp meter after switching on each circuit breaker. Then continue to switch on
another circuit breaker after ensuring that the busbar voltage is between 44.5 V DC and 57.6
V DC.
----End

10.14 Diesel-Grid Hybrid Power Supply Solution (Lithium


Battery + Lead-Acid Battery)
10.14.1 Connecting the Battery Supply (Lead-Acid Battery)
Prerequisites
Required tools including a fuse extracting unit, clamp meter, and insulation gloves are
available.

Procedure
Step 1 Check as follows before connecting the battery supply.
1. Flip the battery switch on the DCDU to AUTO.
2. Switch the load circuit breaker on the DCDU to OFF.
Step 2 Check that the battery string voltage is in the range of 43.2 V DC to 56.4 V DC using a clamp
meter.
Step 3 Connect the battery supply.
1. Reinstall battery fuse 2 in the DCDU using a fuse extracting unit.

Before reinstalling a fuse, switch the AC input circuit breaker on the ACDU to OFF.
Otherwise, the fuse will produce sparks during operation.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 478


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-131 Position of battery fuse 2

(1) Battery fuse 2

2. Flip the DCDU battery switch to MANUAL.


Step 4 Check that the busbar voltage is in the range of 43.2 V DC to 56.4 V DC using a clamp meter.
----End

10.14.2 Setting Parameters (Lithium Battery + Lead-Acid Battery)


Procedure
Step 1 Set the parameters based on the following table.

Table 10-348 Parameter settings

Item Setting
Language English
Enter Password 000001

Step 2 After Setup Wizard Init is displayed on the LCD, set the following parameters.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 479


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-349 Parameter settings

Item Setting
Time Zone Set to the local time zone.
Date and Time Set to the local date and time.
Batter Factory AGISSON
Battery Model FCB-A
NOTE
Set the battery model for lead-acid batteries.
There is no need to set this parameter for lithium
batteries.

The SMU may restart. Yes

Step 3 After the SMU restarts, set parameters according to the following table.

Table 10-350 Parameter settings

Item Setting

Language English
Enter Password 000001
Battery 1 Connected No
Battery 2 Connected Yes
Single-String Cap. Rated capacity of the batteries in a battery
string.
NOTE
 This parameter indicates the rated capacity of
lead-acid batteries.
 The batteries controlled by one circuit
breaker or fuse are called a battery string.

Step 4 When the SMU is running properly, set the language, date, and time in the following menu
paths.

Table 10-351 Setting the language, date, and time

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Parameters Settings Local Parameters Language - Select a desired


language.
Date and Time Time Zone Set to the local time
zone.
Date and Time Set to the local date

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 480


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu
and time.

Step 5 Set hybrid scenario parameters.

Table 10-352 Setting hybrid scenario parameters

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Settin


Menu Menu Menu Value g
Parameters Setup Parameter Basic Parameters Hybrid Scenario No Yes
Settings

Step 6 Set iMix Enable to Enable.

Table 10-353 Setting the iMix Enable

Main Menu Second-Lev Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


el Menu Menu Menu
Parameters Power Basic iMix Enable Disable Enable
Settings System Parameters

Step 7 Set the lithium battery connection mode.

Table 10-354 Setting the lithium battery connection mode

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters Li Battery Basic Parameters Battery 1 Connected Yes
Settings NOTE Battery 2 Connected No
This parameter is
displayed only when Priority Charger Disable, Enable
Battery Model is set
to ESM-A. Discharger Mode Auto, Constant Volt
Dischg
Cycle Mode Li-Ion and Acid Cycle:
Lithium batteries and
lead-acid batteries
switch between each
other to discharge based
on the configured
discharge capacity.
NOTE
This parameter is
displayed when

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 481


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Discharger Mode is set
to Constant Volt Dischg.
When Discharger Mode
is set to Auto, both
lithium batteries and
lead-acid batteries
discharge.

Li-Ion Primary:
Lithium batteries
discharge preferentially.
When lithium batteries
discharge to the
configured depth of
discharge (DOD), they
switch to lead-acid
batteries for discharge.
NOTE
This parameter is
displayed when
Discharger Mode is set
to Constant Volt Dischg.
When Discharger Mode
is set to Auto, both
lithium batteries and
lead-acid batteries
discharge.

Li-Ion Standby:
Lead-acid batteries
discharge preferentially.
When lead-acid
batteries discharge to
the configured DOD,
they switch to lithium
batteries for discharge.
Cycle Factor Set based on site
NOTE requirements.
This parameter is
displayed when
Cycle Mode is set to
Li-Ion and Acid
Cycle.

Step 8 Set lead-acid battery parameters.

Table 10-355 Setting lead-acid battery parameters

Main Menu Second-Lev Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


el Menu Menu Menu
Parameters Acid Battery Basic Battery Cable Set based on site requirements.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 482


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Lev Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


el Menu Menu Menu
Settings Parameters Length NOTE
 When each battery string is connected to the
Batt Cable CS RTN+ busbar over one cable, set Cable
Area Length to half of the total length of cables
between both ends of a battery string and the
positive and negative busbars, and set Cable
CSA to the cross-sectional area of the cable.
 When each battery string is connected to the
RTN+ busbar over two cables, set Cable
Length to half of the total length of a suite of
cables between both ends of a battery string
and the positive and negative busbars, and set
Cable CSA to the sum of the cross-sectional
areas of the two cables.

Step 9 Set sensor parameters.

Table 10-356 Setting sensor parameters

Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Menu Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Setup Sensor Config Water Sensor - Set as required.
Settings Parameter
Smoke Sensor - Set as required.
Ambient Temp. - Set as required.
Sensor
Ambient Humi. - Set as required.
Sensor
Batt. Temp. Sensor 1 - Set as required.

Step 10 Set the dry contact alarm for the battery cabinet door status sensor.

This step is required only if a door status sensor is installed for the battery cabinet.

Table 10-357 Setting the dry contact alarm for the battery cabinet door status sensor

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Alarm Parameters DI Dry Contact DIN4 Alm. Close Open
Settings Para. Cond.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 483


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Step 11 Set the dry contact alarm for the inverter.

Table 10-358 Setting the dry contact alarm for the inverter

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Alarm Parameters DI Dry Contact DIN5 Alm. Close Open
Settings Para. Cond.

Step 12 Set the dry contact alarm for the ACDU.

Table 10-359 Setting the dry contact alarm for the ACDU

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters Alarm Parameters DI Dry Contact DIN6 Alm. Close Open
Settings Para. Cond.

Step 13 Change the Wifi account password on the LCD.

Table 10-360 Changing Wifi account password

Main Menu Second-Level Menu Third-Level Menu Default Value Setting


Parameters Wifi settings Wifi SSID HUAWEI_SITE Change the account
settings password as required.
Wifi Password Changeme

Step 14 Set the ATS working scenario.

Table 10-361 Setting the ATS working scenario

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu

Parameters Settings ATS 1 Work Scenario Mains+DG Mains+DG

Step 15 Set the mains AC parameter.

Table 10-362 Setting the mains AC parameter

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu

Parameters Settings Mains AC Model 3 Phase 4 Line Set as required.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 484


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Step 16 Set the number of DGs.

Table 10-363 Setting the number of DGs


Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting
Menu Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameter Setup Parameter Basic Parameters DG Number 1 1
s Settings

Step 17 Switch the GMU power circuit breaker to ON.


Step 18 Set DG parameters.
1. Set the EPM100-M2B parameters.

Table 10-364 EPM100-M2B parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 10 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.83 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 58.0 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 5.2 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Time
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 485


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

2. Set the EPM100-M2E parameters.

Table 10-365 EPM100-M2E parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 10 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1250 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Time
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

3. Set the EPM100-M2H parameters.

Table 10-366 EPM100-M2H parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5kW 10kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999h 1250h

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 486


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Time Maint Per 500h 4320h


Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50m 0.58m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00m 1.80m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00m 0.81m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0cm 57.7cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0cm 2.7cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0cm 3.0cm
Alarm
Level Chg 10.0Min 10.0Min
Time
Level Filt Time 30.0Min 30.0Min

4. Set the EPM115-M2A parameters.

Table 10-367 EPM115-M2A parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 11.5 kW


Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.57 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 487


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.83 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 56.2 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 5.2 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

5. Set the EPM120-M2D parameters.

Table 10-368 EPM120-M2D parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 12 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.57 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 2.20 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 56.2 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 5.2 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 488


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

6. Set the EPM140-M2B parameters.

Table 10-369 EPM140-M2B parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 14 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

7. Set the EPM140-M2C parameters.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 489


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Table 10-370 EPM140-M2C parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 14 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1250 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No No
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

8. Set the EPM140-M2D parameters.

Table 10-371 EPM140-M2D parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 14 kW


Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1250 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 490


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

9. Set the EPM160-M2B parameters.

Table 10-372 EPM160-M2B parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 16 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 1.80 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 491


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%


Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

10. Set the EPM160-M2C parameters.

Table 10-373 EPM160-M2C parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 16 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.57 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 2.20 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 56.2 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 5.2 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 492


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

11. Set the EPM160-M2D parameters.

Table 10-374 EPM160-M2D parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 16 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.57 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 2.20 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 56.2 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 5.2 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

12. Set the EPM200-M2B parameters.

Table 10-375 EPM200-M2B parameter settings

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW 20 kW
Settings Power
Routine Maint 9999 h 1000 h
Time Maint Per 500 h 4320 h
Auto Add Oil No Yes

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 493


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Other Device Fuel Tank 1 Tank Type Vertical Cuboid
Config Column
Fuel Tank 1.50 m 0.58 m
Height
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 2.20 m
Length
Cuboid Tank 1.00 m 0.81 m
Width
Fuel Level UL 300.0 cm 57.7 cm
Fuel Level LL 0.0 cm 2.7 cm
Low Fuel THR 15.0% 15.0%
Refuel THR 20.0% 20.0%
Level Chg 3.0 cm 3.0 cm
Alarm
Level Chg Time 10.0 Min 10.0 Min
Level Filt Time 30.0 Min 30.0 Min

Step 19 Set parameters for the reused DG.

Table 10-376 Setting parameters for the reused DG

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Menu Menu Value
Parameters EPS-D EPS-D1 D.G. Rated 12.5 kW Set based on site
Settings Power requirements.
Max Power 80.0% Set based on site
Ratio requirements.
Over Volt Prot 120.0% Set based on site
requirements.
Under Volt Prot 80.0% Set based on site
requirements.
Batt Undervolt 10.0 V Set based on site
Thro requirements.
Routine Maint 9999 h Set based on site
requirements.
Timed Maint Per 500 h Set based on site
requirements.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 494


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Step 20 Set communications parameters.


 Setting communications parameters for IP networking
a. Set the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address on the LCD.

Table 10-377 IP parameters

Main Second-L Third-Le Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


Menu evel vel Menu Menu
Menu
Parameters Comm. Network IP Address 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter based on
Settings Parameters Parameters the address assigned by the
network administrator.
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Set this parameter based on
the address assigned by the
network administrator.
Default Gateway 192.168.0.1 Set this parameter based on
the address assigned by the
network administrator.
NOTE
If a WiFi module is installed on
the SMU, the default gateway
cannot be set to 192.168.0.1;
otherwise, it will conflict with
the WiFi gateway.

b. Set IP addresses and port numbers for the active and standby NetEco servers on the
LCD.

Table 10-378 NetEco parameters

Main Second- Third-Le Fourth-Level Default Setting


Menu Level vel Menu Value
Menu Menu
Parameters Comm. Network NetEco Primary 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the IP
Settings Parameter Parameter IP address of the active NetEco
s s server.
NetEco Backup IP 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the IP
address of the standby NetEco
server.
NetEco Port 31220 Set a port number for the
Number NetEco.

 Set wireless communications parameters.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 495


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

a. Check whether the default wireless communications parameters on the LCD are
consistent with the communication configurations of the carrier network that the
SIM card belongs to. If they are inconsistent, modify the parameters according to
the actual configurations of the carrier network.

Table 10-379 Checking wireless communications parameters

Main Second-Lev Third-Level Fourth-Lev Default Value Setting


Menu el Menu Menu el Menu
Parameters Comm. Mobile Data Carrier Automatic Automatic, Others
Settings Parameters Operator
SIMn Acc - A maximum of 28
Point Name characters, including
NOTE
lowercase English letters (a
This
to z), uppercase English
parameter is letters (A to Z), digits (0 to
displayed 9), and special characters
only when (@_#*-.).
Carrier
Operator is
set to
Others.

SIMn -
Access
Point No
NOTE
This
parameter is
displayed
only when
Carrier
Operator is
set to
Others.

SIMn User -
Name
NOTE
This
parameter is
displayed
only when
Carrier
Operator is
set to
Others.

SIMn User - A maximum of 27


Password characters, including
NOTE
lowercase English letters (a
This
to z), uppercase English
parameter is letters (A to Z), digits (0 to
displayed 9), and special characters
only when (@_#-.).
Carrier
Operator is It is recommended that the

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 496


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Main Second-Lev Third-Level Fourth-Lev Default Value Setting


Menu el Menu Menu el Menu
set to password contain at least
Others. two types of characters and
the length exceed six
characters.

b. Set IP addresses and port numbers for the active and standby NetEco servers on the
LCD.

Table 10-380 NetEco parameters

Main Menu Second-Le Third-Leve Fourth-Level Default Value Setting


vel Menu l Menu Menu

Parameters Comm. Network NetEco Primary 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the
Settings Parameters Parameters IP IP address of the active
NetEco server
NetEco Backup 192.168.0.10 Set this parameter to the
IP IP address of the standby
NetEco server.
NetEco Port 31220 Set a port number for the
Number NetEco.

 Set BBU in-band networking parameters.

Table 10-381 BBU in-band networking parameters


Main Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Fifth-Level Setting
Menu Menu Menu Menu Menu
Parameters Comm. Serial Port Northbound Port Mode Manual
Settings Parameters
Protocol Type M/S Protocol
M/S Protocol Baud Rate - 9600
Comm. Address - 3

----End

10.14.3 Connecting the Mains Supply


Procedure
Step 1 Check that the mains AC input circuit breaker on the ATS is OFF, and turn on the upstream
mains AC switch for the ATS.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 497


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Step 2 Check that the input voltage of the mains AC input circuit breaker on the ATS ranges from 85
V AC to 300 V AC.
Step 3 Switch the mains AC input circuit breaker on the ATS to ON.
Step 4 Check that the DG stops and the mains starts to supply power.
----End

10.14.4 Manually Connecting the DG Supply


Prerequisites

Never allow sparks, flames, and inflammable objects to be close to a DG because this may
cause fire or explosions.

Check according to the following table before powering on and commissioning the DG.

Check Expected Result


Item
Appearanc  No engine oil leaks.
e  No fuel leaks.
 No coolant leaks.
 No component is damaged or lost.
 No fastener is loose, lost, or damaged.
 No component is cracked, worn out, or damaged and no connector is
damaged or corroded.
 The EMERGENCY STOP button is in the self-lock state, and the load
circuit breaker is in a proper position.
 No hose is cracked, worn out, damaged, or stuck.
Fuel, lube Levels of fuel, lube oil, and engine coolant are within the normal range.
oil, and
coolant
Battery The battery voltage is greater than 12 V DC.
voltage

Procedure (EPM100-M2B, EPM120-M2D, EPM140-M2B, EPM140-M2C,


EPM160-M2B, EPM160-M2C, EPM160-M2D, and EPM200-M2B)
Step 1 Exhaust air from fuel pipes.
 Exhausting air from fuel pipes (EPM100-M2B, EPM120-M2D, EPM160-M2C, and
EPM160-M2D)

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 498


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

a. Loosen the air exhaust screw on the fuel filter.

Figure 10-132 Air exhaust screw

(1) Fuel filter

b. Repeatedly pinch the hand feed pump on the fuel transfer pump until the fuel flows
through the air exhaust screw has no bubbles.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 499


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-133 Hand feed pump

(1) Hand feed pump

c. Tighten the air exhaust screw on the fuel filter.


 Exhausting air from fuel pipes (EPM140-M2B, EPM140-M2C, and EPM160-M2B)
a. Loosen the air exhaust screw on the fuel filter.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 500


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-134 Air exhaust screw

b. Press the hand feed pump up and down until the fuel flowing out of the air exhaust
screw has no bubbles, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 501


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-135 Exhausting air from fuel pipes

(1) Hand feed pump

c. Tighten the air exhaust screw on the fuel filter.


 Exhausting air from fuel pipes (EPM200-M2B)
a. Loose the air exhaust screw from the fuel filter and fuel injection pump.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 502


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-136 Air exhaust screw

(1) Fuel filter

b. Press the hand feed pump up and down until the fuel flows through the air exhaust
screw has no bubbles.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 503


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-137 Exhausting air from fuel pipes

(1) Hand feed pump

c. Tighten the air exhaust screw on the fuel filter.


Step 2 Start the DG manually.
1. Rotate the EMERGENCY button until it is ejected.
2. Check that the DG AC output circuit breaker is OFF.
3. Turn on the power switch for the DG battery charger.
4. Set the GMU to manual mode, and then press the RESET button on the GMU panel to
clear alarms. When Gen-Set is Ready, press the START button to manually start the
DG.

Figure 10-138 Starting the DG manually

Step 3 Check the DG output voltage, as shown in the following figure.


1. Press I/O on the GMU panel.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 504


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

2. Open the door of the GMB and check that the DG output voltage is in the range of 207 V
AC to 253 V AC using a clamp meter.

Figure 10-139 Checking the DG output voltage (EPM100-M2B)

Figure 10-140 Checking the DG output voltage (EPM120-M2D, EPM160-M2C, and


EPM160-M2D)

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 505


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-141 Checking the DG output voltage (EPM140-M2B, EPM140-M2C, EPM160-M2B,


and EPM200-M2B)

Step 4 After checking that the DG can start properly, set the DG to work in automatic mode on the
GMU.

Figure 10-142 Setting the DG working mode

Step 5 Switch the DG AC output circuit breaker to ON.


Step 6 Switch the DG input circuit breaker on the ATS to ON.

If a third-party DG is used onsite, manually start the DG according to the DG manual.

----End

Procedure (EPM100-M2E, EPM120-M2H, EPM115-M2A, and EPM140-M2D)


Step 1 Prepare for starting the DG.
1. Rotate the EMERGENCY button until it is ejected.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 506


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

2. Check that the DG AC output circuit breaker is OFF.


3. Turn on the power switch for the DG battery charger.
4. Set the GMU to work in manual mode.

Figure 10-143 Starting the DG manually

Step 2 Exhaust air from fuel pipes.


1. When you start the DG for the first time, set Prestart Time/PreFuel Time on the GMU
to 120s so that the DG automatically exhausts air from fuel pipes during startup. Path:
Settings > Engine Setting > Prestart Time/PreFuel Time

 In GMU software V322 and earlier versions, Prestart Time is displayed. In the V330 version,
PreFuel Time is displayed.
 Path for viewing the GMU software version: Main Menu > Product Info > Software.
 The initial GMU password is 1111.
2. Press START on the GMU panel to start the DG.
3. After the DG normally starts, set Prestart Time/PreFuel Time to 15s.
Step 3 Check the DG output voltage.
1. Press I/O on the GMU panel.
2. Open the door of the GMB and check that the DG output voltage is in the correct voltage
range using a clamp meter.
− EPM100-M2E, EPM100-M2H, and EPM140-M2D output voltage range: 207–253
V AC
− EPM115-M2A output voltage range: 99–121 V AC

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 507


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-144 Checking the DG output voltage (EPM100-M2E, EPM100-M2H, and


EPM140-M2D)

Figure 10-145 Checking the DG output voltage (EPM115-M2A)

Step 4 If the DG works properly, switch the DG AC output circuit breaker to ON.
Step 5 Switch the DG input circuit breaker on the ATS to ON.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 508


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

If a third-party DG is used onsite, manually start the DG according to the DG manual.

----End

10.14.5 Starting a DG Self-Check


Context
 There is no battery alarm on the Monitoring, and battery power supply is normal.
 If the mains power is used, ensure that the mains AC input circuit breaker on the ATS is
OFF.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the DG to work in automatic mode on the GMU.

Figure 10-146 Setting the DG working mode

Step 2 Start a DG self-check.

Table 10-382 Starting a DG self-check

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu

Running Control EPS-D DG Self Check Confirm Self Check Yes

The auto check process is as follows:


1. About 2 minutes after starting DG 1, the Monitoring checks the DG running status to determine
whether the DG has started.
2. About 2 minutes after shutting down DG 1, the Monitoring checks the DG running status to
determine whether the DG has shut down.
After the auto check is complete, the SMU displays the results on the screen:
 Control DG Number (0/1)
 DG 1 Start Result (Success/Fail)
 DG 1 Stop Result (Success/Fail)
A single-DG self-check takes about 4 minutes

Step 3 Verify that the self-check result is consistent with the actual number of DGs and the DGs
work properly. If the DG self-check fails, refer to the DG manual for troubleshooting and DG
cable connection checking.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 509


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

----End

10.14.6 Connecting the Battery Supply (Lithium Battery)


Prerequisites
Required tools including a fuse extracting unit, clamp meter, and insulation gloves are
available.

Procedure
Step 1 Reinstall battery fuse 1 in the DCDU using a fuse extracting unit.

Figure 10-147 Position of battery fuse 1

(1) Battery fuse 1

Step 2 Check whether the RUN indicator on the lithium battery is steady on.
 If the RUN indicator is steady on, communication is normal.
 If the RUN indicator blinks fast, the lithium battery fails to communicate with the host.
 If the RUN indicator is off, check and correct the battery cable connections. Use a
multimeter to measure the voltage at the + and – output ports of the lithium battery.
Ensure that the voltage is positive and in the range of 43.2 V DC to 56.4 V DC. Replace
the lithium battery if the cable connections are correct, the battery port voltage is in the
range of 43.2 V DC to 56.4 V DC, but the indicator is still off.

If the lithium battery fails to communicate with the host:

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 510


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

1. Check whether the battery communications cable is properly connected.


2. Check whether the terminal build-out resistor of the battery is properly connected.
3. If both are normal, replace the battery.

----End

10.14.7 Connecting the Load Supply


Procedure
Step 1 Switch on all load circuit breakers one by one. During the process, measure the busbar voltage
using a clamp meter after switching on each circuit breaker. Then continue to switch on
another circuit breaker after ensuring that the busbar voltage is between 44.5 V DC and 57.6
V DC.
----End

10.15 Setting Communications Parameters for Intelligent


Battery Monitoring Modules
Prerequisites
The network connection is normal:
 iBOX: The LINK indicator is steady on (green), and the RUN indicator is blinking at
long intervals (green).
 iBAT: The RUN indicator is steady on (green).

If the iBOX is used for the first time, it is recommended that you press and hold down the networking
button for more than 10s until the indicator becomes steady on, and then press the networking switch.
The green indicator blinks at short intervals and the iBOX starts to connect to the iBAT.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the number of iBATs that can be connected on the SMU.

Table 10-383 iBAT quantity setting

Main Menu Second-Level Third-Level Fourth-Level Setting


Menu Menu Menu
Parameters iBOX iBOX Equip Number of 0-96
settings Batteries Set the parameter based on the
number of connected iBATs.

Step 2 Press the networking button on the iBOX. When the LINK indicator on the iBOX turns from
"steady on" (green) to "blinking at super short intervals" (green), the iBOX enters the network
setup state.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 511


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

 "Blinking at long intervals": The indicator is on for 1s and then off for 1s alternately.
 "Blinking intermittently at super short intervals": The indicator is blinking for 0.5s and then off for
0.5s alternately.
 "Blinking at super short intervals": The indicator is on for 0.05s and then off for 0.05s alternately.
 Two or more iBOXs cannot be networked simultaneously. Otherwise, mapping between iBOXs and
iBATs will not be ensured.

Figure 10-148 iBOX

(1) Networking switch (2) LINK indicator

Step 3 Press the networking button on the iBAT. When the RUN/ALM indicator on the iBAT turns
from "steady on" (green) to "blinking at super short intervals" (green), the iBAT joins the
detected iBOX network.

If the RUN/ALM indicator on the iBAT is not steady on (green) during networking, press and hold down
its networking button for at least 5s to clear the original network.

Figure 10-149 iBAT

(1) Networking switch (2) RUN/ALM indicator

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 512


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Step 4 Repeat Step 3 to enable other iBATs, from right to left and from the bottom up, to join the
iBOX network.
Step 5 Press the networking button on the iBOX. When the LINK indicator on the iBOX and the
RUN/ALM indicator on the iBAT turn from "blinking at super short intervals" (green) to
"blinking at long intervals" (green), the networking is complete.

If the ALM indicator on the iBOX is steady on after the networking is complete, the actual number of
connected iBATs is less than the number configured on the SMU.

----End

10.16 Setting IP Camera Parameters


10.16.1 Setting Parameters
Context
The default IP address for IP cameras is 192.168.0.120 and is used for initial login.

Only one IP camera can be installed.

Procedure
Step 1 Ensure that the PC IP address is in the same network segment as the camera IP address.
If the IP camera has a default IP address of 192.168.0.120, a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0,
and a default gateway of 192.168.0.1, set the IP address to 192.168.0.11, subnet mask to
255.255.255.0, and default gateway to 192.168.0.1 on the PC.
Step 2 Connect a PC to the IP camera:
 Connect directly: Connect the communications cable of the IP camera to the network
port on the PC.
 Connect with a PoE switch: Use a network cable to connect the network port of the PC
and an idle PoE port of the PoE switch.
Step 3 Enter https://192.168.0.120 in the PC browser and press Enter to log in to the IP camera.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 513


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-150 IP camera login page

Step 4 Enter the preset user name admin and the preset password HuaWei123 on the login page, and
click Login.

To preview the page, install a plug-in as instructed and refresh the page.

Step 5 Choose Settings > Network Configuration > Network Parameters, set the following
parameters, and click Save.
 Way to obtain IP: Use the following IP address.
 IP address, subnet mask, and gateway IP address: obtain the information from the
customer.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 514


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-151 Setting camera IP parameters

Step 6 Choose Settings > Snapshot Manager > Snapshot Configuration, set the following
parameters, and click Save.
 Picture Quality
a. Picture quality: Good

If Picture quality is set to Best, the picture capture interval will be greater than 40s, which will
increase the risk of missing picture capture.
 Scheduled Snapshot
a. Enable: select
b. Interval(s): 10
 Upload Snapshots
a. Enable: select
b. Upload Protocol: SFTP
c. Directory: Use level-1 directory
d. Level-1 directory: Custom, camera1
e. Server IP: SMU IP address
f. Port: 22
g. User Name: sftpadmin
h. Password: Changeme

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 515


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-152 Setting capture parameters

Step 7 Choose Settings > Basic Configuration > Time Configuration, set the following parameters,
and click Save.

Set Time to the local time and Time Zone to the local time zone.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 516


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-153 Time setting

----End

10.16.2 Previewing the Real-Time Site Situation


Procedure
Step 1 Connect a PC to the IP camera and log in to the IP camera. For details, see steps 1-4 in
10.16.1 Setting Parameters.
Step 2 On the Preview page, click the plug-in download message.

Figure 10-154 IP camera preview page

Step 3 Install the plug-in as instructed.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 517


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Step 4 After installation is complete, refresh the page and click One push.

Figure 10-155 One-click focusing

----End

10.16.3 Configuring the IP Camera on the WebUI


Procedure
Step 1 On the monitoring WebUI of the power system, choose System Settings > IP Camera and
set the following parameters:
 Protocol Type
a. Protocol Type: SFTP
 SFTP User Management
a. Current User Name, Old Password: Set them to the IP camera user name and
password.
 IP Camera Number
a. IP Camera Number: 1
 Camera IP
a. Camera IP Address: IP address obtained from the customer in 10.16.1 Setting
Parameters.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 518


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-156 Configuring the IP camera

Step 2 Click Submit.


----End

10.16.4 Viewing Real-time Photos and Alarm Photos on the


WebUI
Viewing Real-time Photos
The SMU obtains a real-time photo from the IP camera every 40s (configurable). To view the
real-time photos, choose Monitoring > Camera Group on the WebUI.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 519


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-157 Viewing real-time photos

To modify parameter settings, choose Monitoring > Camera Group > Camera n >
Running Parameter on the WebUI.

Figure 10-158 Modifying parameter settings

Viewing and Exporting Alarm Photos


Choose Query > Camera and view photos saved by the SMU when a door status or infrared
sensor alarm is generated onsite.

The alarm photos are saved to both the SMU and SD card. You can export the photos stored in the SMU.
The SMU stores a maximum of 1.2 MB photos. When the storage space is full, new photos will replace
old ones.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 520


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Figure 10-159 Viewing and exporting alarm photos

10.17 Opening an Electronic Door Lock


Context
The SMU manages the permission for opening an electronic door lock on a cabinet. The lock
can be opened using the access card, WebUI (with an administrator account), or mechanical
key.

Prerequisites
 The following are the prerequisites for opening an electronic lock on the WebUI:
a. An electronic door lock has been installed on the cabinet.
b. A communications expansion module has been installed in the cabinet.
c. You have an administrator account.
 The following are the prerequisites for opening an electronic lock using an access card:
a. An electronic door lock has been installed on the cabinet.
b. A communications expansion module has been installed in the cabinet.
c. You have the access card that matches the electronic door lock.

Setting Parameters

Table 10-384 Electronic door lock parameters

Parameter Description Default Value Value Range


Access Card Set this mode to Yes. The No Yes, No

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 521


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

Parameter Description Default Value Value Range


Authenticated access card information can
be recorded onsite.
Card No. Authorized access card - A string of not more than 10
number. digits
Start Date Validity start time for the Current time YYYY-MM-DD
access card. HH:MM:SS
Expire Date Validity end time for the 2069-12-31 YYYY-MM-DD
access card. 23:59:59 HH:MM:SS
Lock No. Specifies the application Elock1, Elock2, Elock1
scope of the access card. If Elock3, and Elock4 Elock2
you set this parameter to
Elock1, the access card can Elock3
only open door lock 1. Elock4
The SMU manages a
maximum of four electronic
door locks.
The SMU identifies the
electronic door locks that
connect to the COM ports on
the communications
expansion board, and sets
door lock numbers from left
to right and from top to
bottom.
Lock Close Delay After the access card is 60s 3–240
successfully authenticated, if
the door is not open within
the preset Lock Close
Delay, the SMU locks the
electronic door lock again.

Procedure
None.
Opening a lock on the WebUI
 Opening all door locks
Choose Monitoring > E-Lock Group > Running Control, set Open All locks to Yes,
and click Submit.
 Opening a single door lock
Choose Monitoring > E-Lock Group > Electronic Lock n > Running Control, set
Open lock to Yes, and click Submit.
Opening a lock using an access card
Step 1 Add access card information.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 522


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 10 Power-on and Commissioning

On the WebUI, choose System Settings > Electronic Lock and grant permission to the
access card in any of the following ways:
 Swiping the access card
Under Basic Parameters, set Access Card Authenticated to Yes, and place the access
card near the door lock. The SMU automatically reads information. Set other information
as required and confirm the settings.

 If you add access card information by swiping the access card, any electronic door locks monitored
by the SMU cannot be opened during the adding process. Otherwise, Access Card Authenticated
will automatically change to No. If you need to continue to add access cards for the electronic door
lock, close the electronic door lock and perform the operations again.
 To ensure device security, set Access Card Authenticated to No after recording the information.
 After site deployment, delete the permission granted to the access card to avoid risks.
 Manually typing the card number
Under Electronic Lock Information, click Add and manually type access card
information. Set other information as required and confirm the settings.

You can use this method if you know the access card number.

Step 2 Place the access card near the electronic door lock.
----End

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 523


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 11 Flipping the Commissioning Switch to AUTO

11 Flipping the Commissioning Switch to


AUTO

Context

 Before delivery, the commissioning switch is set to AUTO and the system is under
automatic control.
 Open the panel and flip the switch to MANUAL only when you need to forcibly power on
batteries. Flip the switch back to AUTO after the commissioning.

Procedure
Step 1 Flip the commissioning switch to AUTO.

Figure 11-1 Flipping the commissioning switch to AUTO (DCDU-400AN5)

(1) Commissioning switch

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 524


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 11 Flipping the Commissioning Switch to AUTO

Figure 11-2 Flipping the commissioning switch to AUTO (DCDU-400AS4)

(1) Commissioning switch

----End

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 525


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 12 Checking Before Leaving the Site

12 Checking Before Leaving the Site

12.1 Installing Rat Guards on the Front and Rear Sides of


the Base
If rat guards are required, perform the following steps to install them.

Installing Rat Guards on the Front and Rear Sides of the Base (ICC330 + ESC330)
Step 1 Install rat guards on the front and rear sides of the base.

Figure 12-1 Installing rat guards on the front and rear sides of the base

----End

Installing Rat Guards on the Front and Rear Sides of the Base (ESC710 + ESC720)
Step 1 Install fasteners for rat guards on the front and rear of the base.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 526


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 12 Checking Before Leaving the Site

Figure 12-2 Installing rat guard fasteners

Step 2 Install rat guards on the front and rear sides of the base.

Figure 12-3 Installing rat guards on the front and rear sides of the base

----End

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 527


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 12 Checking Before Leaving the Site

12.2 Installing an Antitheft Enclosure Frame


Prerequisites

Before installing an antitheft enclosure frame, properly plan the cable route to avoid
interference.

Procedure
Step 1 Install supports for the antitheft enclosure frame.
1. Install screws at the bottom of the supports.
2. Install the support bracket and tighten the screws.
3. Install the support side bracket and tighten the screws.

Figure 12-4 Installing supports

Step 2 Adjust the size of the antitheft enclosure frame based on the cabinet size.
1. Loosen the size adjustment screws on the antitheft enclosure frame.
2. Adjust the size of the antitheft enclosure frame based on the cabinet size.
3. Tighten the screws.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 528


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 12 Checking Before Leaving the Site

Figure 12-5 Adjusting the size of the antitheft enclosure frame

Step 3 Install the supports on the antitheft enclosure frame.


1. Determine the support installation positions on the antitheft enclosure frame based on the
support mounting holes on the cabinet.
2. Install the long support on the left side of the antitheft enclosure frame, and then install
the short support at the symmetric position on the right side.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 529


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 12 Checking Before Leaving the Site

Figure 12-6 Installing supports on the antitheft enclosure frame (top view)

The short and long supports are installed in the same way. The long support is used as an example.

Step 4 Unlock the antitheft enclosure frame.


1. Use the delivered antitheft wrench to remove the screws from the baffle plate.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 530


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 12 Checking Before Leaving the Site

Figure 12-7 Removing the lock baffle plate from the antitheft enclosure frame (bottom view)

Set aside the lock baffle plate, which will be reinstalled later.
2. Unlock with a key and remove the latch.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 531


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 12 Checking Before Leaving the Site

Figure 12-8 Removing the latch (top view)

Step 5 Install the antitheft enclosure frame on the cabinet.

Insert the support on the left side of the antitheft enclosure frame into the cabinet and then the support on
the right.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 532


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 12 Checking Before Leaving the Site

Figure 12-9 Installing the antitheft enclosure frame on the cabinet

Step 6 Lock the antitheft enclosure frame.


1. Insert the latch.
2. Lock the antitheft enclosure frame using the key.
3. Reinstall the lock baffle plate on the antitheft enclosure frame.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 533


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 12 Checking Before Leaving the Site

Figure 12-10 Cabinet with the antitheft enclosure frame installed

----End

12.3 Subsequent Operations


Procedure
Step 1 Set all the switches to the appropriate status based on site requirements.
Step 2 Observe the power system for 1 hour and check that no alarm (excluding door status alarms)
is displayed on the liquid crystal display (LCD) of the monitoring module and that the voltage
and current for batteries and loads are normal.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 534


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide 12 Checking Before Leaving the Site

After power-on and commissioning, if the site cannot be powered on, switch off the battery circuit
breaker or disconnect the battery fuse. If the site cannot be powered on within two months, disconnect
the battery loop.

Step 3 Reinstall the removed panel if any.


Step 4 Seal used cable holes with fireproof putty and seal unused cable holes with lids delivered with
the cabinet.
Step 5 Check whether the paint on the surface of the cabinet is intact. Repair any damaged paint.
Step 6 Lock the cabinet door and hand over the key to the administrator.
Step 7 Ensure that the site is clean before you leave the site.
----End

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 535


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide A Appendix

A Appendix

A.1 Installing a Ground Bar (BOM Number: 21120291)


If the ground bar is required, perform the following steps to install it.

Procedure
Step 1 Determine the positions of mounting holes.

Figure A-1 Determining the positions of mounting holes

(1) Ground bar (2) Mounting holes (3) Marker

Step 2 Drill holes and install expansion sleeve.


1. Drill a hole in the concrete floor using a hammer drill. The hole depth should range from
52 mm to 60 mm.
2. Partially tighten the expansion anchor bolt and vertically insert it into the hole. Knock
the expansion anchor bolt using a rubber mallet until the expansion sleeve is fully
inserted into the hole.
3. Partially tighten the expansion anchor bolt.
4. Loosen the nut, and remove the spring washer, small flat washer, and small insulation
plastic.

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 536


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide A Appendix

Figure A-2 Drilling holes and installing expansion anchor sleeves

(1) Small flat washer (2) Large flat washer (3) M8 nut
(4) Spring washer (5) Small insulation plastic (6) Large insulation plastic
(7) Expansion sleeve (8) Expansion anchor bolt (9) Concrete floor

Step 3 Installing a ground bar.


1. Install the small plastic, flat washer, spring washer, and nut in sequence.
2. Install the ground bar.

Figure A-3 Installing a ground bar

----End

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 537


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide A Appendix

A.2 Associations Between UIM Dry Contacts and Alarms


Table A-1 Associations between dry contacts and alarms (DCDU-400AS4)

Port Type Silk Screen Associated Alarm

Dry contact input DIN1 Boolean value input signal port 1


DIN2 Boolean value input signal port 2
DIN3 Boolean value input signal port 3
DIN4 Boolean value input signal port 4
DIN5 Boolean value input signal port 5
DIN6 Boolean value input signal port 6
Dry contact ALM1 Mains Failure alarm
output
ALM2 DC Overvoltage/DC Ultra Overvoltage/DC
The default Undervoltage/DC Ultra Undervoltage
setting (closed:
alarm; open: ALM3 Rectifier Fault/Rectifier Protection/Rectifier
normal) can be Communication Failure/Multi-Rectifier Fault
modified.
ALM4 AC SPD Fault/DC SPD Fault
ALM5 LLVD1, LLVD2, LLVD3, LLVD4, common
load, or battery fuse blown alarm
ALM6 Battery High Temperature/Battery Low
Temperature/Battery Very High
Temperature/Battery Very Low
Temperature/Ambient High
Temperature/Ambient Low
Temperature/Ambient Very High Temperature
ALM7 Smoke Alarm
ALM8 Door Status Alarm

Table A-2 Associations between dry contacts and alarms (DCDU-400AN5)

Port Type Silk Screen Associated Alarm


Dry contact input DIN1 Boolean value input signal port 1
DIN2 Boolean value input signal port 2
DIN3 Boolean value input signal port 3
DIN4 Boolean value input signal port 4
DIN5 Boolean value input signal port 5
DIN6 Boolean value input signal port 6

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 538


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide A Appendix

Port Type Silk Screen Associated Alarm


Dry contact ALM1 Mains Failure alarm
output
ALM2 DC Overvoltage/DC Ultra Overvoltage/DC
The default Undervoltage/DC Ultra Undervoltage
setting (closed:
alarm; open: ALM3 Rectifier Fault/Rectifier Protection/Rectifier
normal) can be Communication Failure/Multi-Rectifier Fault
modified.
ALM4 AC SPD Fault/DC SPD Fault
ALM5 Load Fuse Break/Battery Fuse Break
ALM6 Battery High Temperature/Battery Low
Temperature/Battery Very High
Temperature/Battery Very Low
Temperature/Ambient High
Temperature/Ambient Low
Temperature/Ambient Very High Temperature
ALM7 Smoke Alarm
ALM8 Door Status Alarm

A.3 Preparing Terminals


This section describes how to prepare cord end terminals and OT terminals.
Cut a cable of a proper length and install an OT terminal or a cord end terminal. Figure A-4
and Figure A-5 show the procedures for preparing a cord end terminal and an OT terminal
respectively.

Figure A-4 Preparing a cord end terminal

(1) Cable (2) Cord end terminal (3) Crimping tool

Figure A-5 Preparing an OT terminal

(1) Cable (2) OT terminal (3) Heat shrink tubing

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 539


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide A Appendix

(4) Hydraulic pliers (5) Heat gun

A.4 Installing Floating Nuts


This section describes the positions and procedures for installing floating nuts for different
heights of components.

Prerequisites
A flat-head screwdriver and a pair of protective gloves have been prepared.

Procedure
Step 1 Determine the mounting holes for floating nuts based on the component height.

Figure A-6 Positions for installing floating nuts for a 1 U component

Figure A-7 Positions for installing floating nuts for a 2 U component

Figure A-8 Positions for installing floating nuts for a 3 U component

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 540


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide A Appendix

Figure A-9 Positions for installing floating nuts for a 4 U component

Step 2 Install floating nuts using a flat-head screwdriver.

When installing floating nuts, wear protective gloves and do not exert excessive force.
Otherwise, the flat-head screwdriver may hurt your hand or damage the device.

Figure A-10 Installing a floating nut

----End

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 541


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide B Acronyms and Abbreviations

B Acronyms and Abbreviations

A
ACC air-condition controller
ACDB alternating current distribution box
ACDU alternating current distribution unit
APM advanced power module
ATS AC transfer switch

B
BBU baseband unit
BC battery charger
BLVD battery low voltage disconnection
BTS base transceiver station

C
CAN control area network
CCS cabinet with cooling system

D
DCDB direct current distribution box
DCDU direct current distribution unit
DIN dry contact input
DO dry contact output
DG diesel generator

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 542


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide B Acronyms and Abbreviations

E
ECC energy control center
EMC electromagnetic compatibility
EMI electromagnetic interference
EMS electromagnetic susceptibility
EPS energy plant system
ESC energy storage cabinet
ESD electrostatic discharge
ESM energy storage module
ESMU energy storage management unit
ESS energy storage system
ESU energy storage unit

F
FCB fast charge battery
FE fast Ethernet

G
GPRS general packet radio service

H
HAU heater assembly unit
HTTPS Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure

I
ICC integrated controller and converter
IDG integrated diesel generator
IDU integrated distribution unit
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IP Internet Protocol

L
LCD liquid crystal display

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 543


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide B Acronyms and Abbreviations

LLVD load low voltage disconnection

M
MCB miniature circuit breaker
MCCB molded case circuit breaker
MPPT maximum power point tracking
MTBF mean time between failures
MTS manual transfer switch

N
NetEco Network Ecosystem
NMS network management system

O
OSS operations support system

P
PDU power distribution unit
PV photovoltaic
PVDU photovoltaic distribution unit

R
RCD residual current device

S
SCB solar cycle battery
SIM subscriber identity module
SJB solar junction box
SMU site monitoring unit
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
SOH status of health
SPD surge protective device
SSU solar supply unit

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 544


PowerCube 1000 (ICC330-H1-C4, ICC330-H1-C5,
ESC330-D5, ESC720-A3, ESC710-D2, ESC300-N1)
Installation Guide B Acronyms and Abbreviations

T
TCUC temperature control unit C

U
UI user interface
UIM user interface module
USB Universal Serial Bus

Issue 04 (2019-03-13) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 545

Potrebbero piacerti anche